SmartLogger3000

User Manual

Issue 22
Date 2024-09-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2024. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees
or representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: https://e.huawei.com

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document introduces the SmartLogger3000 (SmartLogger for short) and
SmartModule1000 (SmartModule for short) in terms of installation, electrical
connections, system operation and maintenance, and troubleshooting. Understand
the SmartLogger and SmartModule features, functions, and safety precautions
provided in this document before installing and operating the SmartLogger and
SmartModule.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for operating personnel and qualified electricians of
photovoltaic (PV) and energy storage plants.

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows:

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if

not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which,

if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if

not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if

not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data
loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated
results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to
personal injury.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Symbol Description

Supplements the important information in the main

text.
NOTE is used to address information not related to
personal injury, equipment damage, and environment
deterioration.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue
contains all the changes made in earlier issues.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30)
Updated 4.1.4 Connecting an MBUS Cable.

Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.

Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later

Versions).

Updated 6.3.9.1 Running Parameters.

Updated 6.3.11 Setting PCS Parameters (213KTL-H0).

Updated 6.3.14 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 3).

Updated 6.3.19 Setting IEC103 Device Parameters.

Deleted section "Setting IEC 104 Device Parameters."

Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.

Updated 6.6.1 On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG).

Updated 6.6.2 On-grid/Off-grid (VSG).

Updated 6.6.3 Off-Grid.

Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.

Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.

Updated 7.4.6 License Management.

Added 7.4.14 SOC Balancing.

Updated 8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are Supported by the
SmartLogger?

Updated 8.15 How Do I Use Mobile Network Sharing?

Updated C Port No. List.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Issue 21 (2024-07-30)
Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.
Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Added 6.3.11 Setting PCS Parameters (213KTL-H0).
Added 6.3.13 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 2).
Updated 6.3.15 Setting PID Module Parameters.
Updated 6.3.23 Setting IMD Parameters.
Updated 7.4.1 Upgrading the Device Firmware Version.
Updated 7.4.2 Setting Security Parameters.
Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.
Updated 7.4.10 Adjusting the Total Energy Yield.
Updated D Certificate Management and Maintenance.

Issue 20 (2024-04-15)
Updated 2.1.1 Model.
Updated 6.1.1 WebUI Layout.
Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.
Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Updated 6.3.3 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System.
Updated 6.3.9.1 Running Parameters.
Updated 6.3.9.3 Characteristic Curves.
Updated 6.3.10.1 Running Parameters.
Updated 6.3.12.4 Setting ESR Parameters.
Added 6.3.24 Setting Relay Parameters.
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.6.1 On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG).
Added 6.6.2 On-grid/Off-grid (VSG).
Updated 6.6.3 Off-Grid.
Updated 6.6.4 Black Start.
Updated 6.8.9 Setting Feed-in at Limited Current.
Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.
Updated 7.4.11 Force Start.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Updated 7.4.2 Setting Security Parameters.

Updated 7.4.3 Sending a System Maintenance Command.
Added 7.4.13 Communication Records.
Updated 8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are Supported by the
SmartLogger?.

Issue 19 (2024-02-23)
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.

Issue 18 (2024-01-30)
Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.
Updated 6.3.12.5 Setting HVAC Parameters.
Added 6.8.9 Setting Feed-in at Limited Current.
Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.

Issue 17 (2023-12-15)
Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Updated 6.3.9.1 Running Parameters.
Updated 6.3.16 Setting Meter Parameters.
Added 6.6 Setting Microgrid Control Parameters.

Issue 16 (2023-11-07)
Updated 4.1.11 Installing a SIM Card and a 4G Antenna.
Updated 6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login.
Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Updated 6.3.8.1 Setting Parameters for a Built-in MBUS Module.
Updated 6.3.8.2.1 Setting SmartMBUS CCO01A Parameters.
Updated 6.3.10 Setting PCS Parameters (100KTL and 200KTL Series).
Updated 6.3.12.1 Setting CMU Parameters.
Added 6.3.23 Setting IMD Parameters.
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.7 Setting Feature Parameters.
Updated 7.4.6 License Management.
Updated 7.4.11 Force Start.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Updated A Product User Lists.

Added E Contact Information.
Added F Digital Power Customer Service.

Issue 15 (2023-10-11)
Updated 6.3.16 Setting Meter Parameters.
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.8.7 Setting DRM Parameters.
Added 7.4.12 Device Replacement.

Issue 14 (2023-08-18)
Updated 2.1.2 Networking.
Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Added 6.3.5 Setting SPPC Communications Parameters.
Updated 6.3.15 Setting PID Module Parameters.
Updated 6.3.15.2 Setting SmartPID2000 Parameters.
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.7 Setting Feature Parameters.
Updated 6.8.6 Setting Parameters for Smart Reactive Power Compensation.
Updated 6.8.7 Setting DRM Parameters.
Updated 7.4.6 License Management.
Updated 8.3 How Do I Set Email Parameters?
Updated 9.1 Technical Specifications of the SmartLogger.

Issue 13 (2023-06-12)
Updated 2.1.3 Appearance.
Updated 2.2.3 Appearance.
Updated 6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login.
Updated 6.3.3 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System.
Updated 6.3.8 Setting MBUS Parameters.
Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.

Issue 12 (2023-04-20)
Updated 2.1.2 Networking.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Updated 4.1.10 Connecting Fiber Jumpers.

Updated 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Updated 6.3.3 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System.
Updated 6.3.8 Setting MBUS Parameters.
Updated 6.3.15 Setting PID Module Parameters.
Deleted "Setting Capacity Limit".
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.5 Setting EMS Control Parameters.
Added 6.7 Setting Feature Parameters.

Issue 11 (2023-01-20)
Updated 1 Safety Information.
Updated 6.3.12.2 Setting ESU Parameters.
Updated 6.3.16 Setting Meter Parameters.
Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.8.8.2 Setting NS Protection Remote Shutdown.
Updated 7.4.11 Force Start.
Updated 7.5 Device Replacement.
Added 8.18 Resetting Password.
Updated 8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are Supported by the
SmartLogger?
Updated G Acronyms and Abbreviations.

Issue 10 (2022-08-20)
Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.
Updated 6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login.
Added 6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later
Versions).
Updated 6.3.6 Setting Parameters for the Slave SmartLogger.
Added 6.3.7 Setting GOOSE Communications Parameters.
Updated 6.3.9 Setting Inverter Parameters.
Updated 6.3.10 Setting PCS Parameters (100KTL and 200KTL Series).
Updated 6.3.12.1 Setting CMU Parameters.
Updated 6.3.12.2 Setting ESU Parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Updated 6.3.12.5 Setting HVAC Parameters.

Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.

Updated 6.3.18 Setting STS Parameters.

Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.

Updated 6.8.3 Setting Reactive Power Control.

Updated 7.3 Alarm Reference.

Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.

Added 7.4.11 Force Start.

Issue 09 (2022-01-07)
Updated 2.1.2 Networking.

Updated 2.2.2 Networking.

Updated 6.1.1 WebUI Layout.

Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.

Added 6.3.3 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System.

Updated 6.3.10 Setting PCS Parameters (100KTL and 200KTL Series).

Updated 6.3.12.1 Setting CMU Parameters.

Updated 6.3.12.2 Setting ESU Parameters.

Updated 6.3.12.5 Setting HVAC Parameters.

Updated 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.

Added "Setting Capacity Limit".

Updated 6.5 Setting EMS Control Parameters.

Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.

Updated 6.8.3 Setting Reactive Power Control.

Updated 6.8.5 Setting Export Limitation Parameters.

Updated 7.4.1 Upgrading the Device Firmware Version.

Updated 7.4.3 Sending a System Maintenance Command.

Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.

Added 7.4.8 Managing Users.

Updated 7.4.9 Collecting Performance Data.

Updated 7.4.10 Adjusting the Total Energy Yield.

Updated 8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are Supported by the
SmartLogger?.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Issue 08 (2021-10-15)
Updated 2.1.2 Networking.
Updated 2.2.2 Networking.
Updated 6.1.1 WebUI Layout.
Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.
Updated 6.2 Device Commissioning.
Updated 6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login.
Added 6.2.3 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V800R021C10).
Updated 6.3.1 Setting User Parameters.
Updated 6.3.2 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System
(V300R001C00).
Added 6.3.10 Setting PCS Parameters (100KTL and 200KTL Series).
Added 6.3.12.1 Setting CMU Parameters.
Added 6.3.12.2 Setting ESU Parameters.
Added 6.3.12.3 Setting ESC Parameters.
Added 6.3.12.4 Setting ESR Parameters.
Added 6.3.12.5 Setting HVAC Parameters.
Added 6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters.
Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.
Updated 6.8.5 Setting Export Limitation Parameters.
Updated 7.2 Troubleshooting.
Updated 7.3 Alarm Reference.
Updated 7.4.1 Upgrading the Device Firmware Version.
Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.
Updated C Port No. List.
Updated G Acronyms and Abbreviations.

Issue 07 (2021-06-30)
Updated 6.1 Introduction to WebUI.
Updated 6.1.3 WebUI Menus.
Updated 6.3.9.1 Running Parameters.
Added 6.3.9.4 Battery.
Added 6.5 Setting EMS Control Parameters.
Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Updated 7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs.

Updated 7.4.5 Starting an Onsite Test.

Updated 8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are Supported by the
SmartLogger?.

Issue 06 (2021-03-20)
Updated 6.3.2 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System
(V300R001C00).

Updated 6.3.9.1 Running Parameters.

Updated 6.3.9.2 Tracking System.

Updated 6.3.16.1 Setting DL/T645 Meter Parameters.

Updated 6.3.16.2 Setting Modbus-RTU Meter Parameters.

Updated 6.3.17.1 Setting Modbus-RTU EMI Parameters.

Added 6.3.22 Smart Tracking Algorithm.

Updated 6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control.

Updated 6.8.5 Setting Export Limitation Parameters.

Updated 6.8.6 Setting Parameters for Smart Reactive Power Compensation.

Added 6.8.8 Setting Remote Shutdown.

Updated 6.8.8.1 Setting Dry Contact Remote Shutdown.

Added 6.8.8.2 Setting NS Protection Remote Shutdown.

Added 7.4.3.1 Exporting Full Configuration Files.

Added 7.4.3.2 Importing Full Configuration Files.

Updated 8.15 How Do I Use Mobile Network Sharing?

Added 8.16 WebUI Allows Login Only in Chinese or Prompts to Switch to

Chinese After Login.

Issue 05 (2020-09-30)
Updated 6.3.2 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System
(V300R001C00).

Updated 6.3.8 Setting MBUS Parameters.

Added 8.15 How Do I Use Mobile Network Sharing?

Added C Port No. List.

Issue 04 (2020-03-11)
Updated 6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

SmartLogger3000
User Manual About This Document

Issue 03 (2020-01-10)
Added the description about the SmartModule.

Issue 02 (2019-12-18)
Updated 6 WebUI Operations.
Updated 9.1 Technical Specifications of the SmartLogger.

Issue 01 (2019-09-24)
This issue is used for first office application (FOA).

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

SmartLogger3000
User Manual Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Personal Safety.........................................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.3 Environment Requirements................................................................................................................................................. 5
1.4 Mechanical Safety................................................................................................................................................................... 6

2 Product Overview.................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 SmartLogger............................................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1.1 Model....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.2 Networking.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1.3 Appearance.......................................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.2 SmartModule.......................................................................................................................................................................... 24
2.2.1 Model..................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.2 Networking.......................................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.2.3 Appearance.......................................................................................................................................................................... 27

3 Device Installation................................................................................................................ 33
3.1 Checking Before Installation............................................................................................................................................. 33
3.2 Tools.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 33
3.3 Installation Requirements.................................................................................................................................................. 34
3.4 Installing the SmartLogger................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.5 Installing the SmartLogger and SmartModule........................................................................................................... 37
3.6 Installing a Power Adapter................................................................................................................................................ 40

4 Cable Connections.................................................................................................................43
4.1 Connecting Cables to the SmartLogger........................................................................................................................ 43
4.1.1 Preparing Cables................................................................................................................................................................ 43
4.1.2 Connecting a PE Cable.....................................................................................................................................................44
4.1.3 Connecting an RS485 Communications Cable........................................................................................................ 44
4.1.4 Connecting an MBUS Cable........................................................................................................................................... 46
4.1.5 Connecting a DI Signal Cable........................................................................................................................................49
4.1.6 Connecting the Output Power Cable..........................................................................................................................50
4.1.7 Connecting the AI Signal Cable.................................................................................................................................... 51
4.1.8 Connecting the DO Signal Cable................................................................................................................................. 52

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

SmartLogger3000
User Manual Contents

4.1.9 Connecting the Ethernet Cable.....................................................................................................................................53

4.1.10 Connecting Fiber Jumpers............................................................................................................................................ 54
4.1.11 Installing a SIM Card and a 4G Antenna................................................................................................................ 55
4.1.12 Connecting the 24 V Input Power Cable.................................................................................................................57
4.2 Connecting Cables to the SmartModule.......................................................................................................................58
4.2.1 Preparing Cables................................................................................................................................................................ 58
4.2.2 Connecting the PE Cable.................................................................................................................................................59
4.2.3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable.....................................................................................................................................59
4.2.4 Connecting the 12 V Input Power Cable................................................................................................................... 60
4.2.5 Connecting the RS485 Communications Cable.......................................................................................................61
4.2.6 Connecting the DI Signal Cable....................................................................................................................................63
4.2.7 Connecting the Output Power Cable..........................................................................................................................64
4.2.8 Connecting the AI Signal Cable.................................................................................................................................... 64
4.2.9 Connecting the PT Signal Cable................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2.10 Connecting the 24 V Input Power Cable.................................................................................................................66

5 System Operation..................................................................................................................68
5.1 Check Before Power-on....................................................................................................................................................... 68
5.2 Powering On the System.................................................................................................................................................... 68

6 WebUI Operations.................................................................................................................70
6.1 Introduction to WebUI........................................................................................................................................................ 70
6.1.1 WebUI Layout..................................................................................................................................................................... 71
6.1.2 Icon Description................................................................................................................................................................. 76
6.1.3 WebUI Menus..................................................................................................................................................................... 77
6.2 Device Commissioning........................................................................................................................................................ 86
6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login..................................................................................................................................... 87
6.2.2 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R001C00)..............................................................................91
6.2.3 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V800R021C10)..............................................................................91
6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023 and Later Versions)............................................... 95
6.3 Parameter Settings............................................................................................................................................................. 122
6.3.1 Setting User Parameters............................................................................................................................................... 122
6.3.2 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System (V300R001C00).................................. 124
6.3.3 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management System.................................................................. 131
6.3.4 Setting RS485 Communications Parameters......................................................................................................... 139
6.3.5 Setting SPPC Communications Parameters........................................................................................................... 141
6.3.6 Setting Parameters for the Slave SmartLogger.................................................................................................... 142
6.3.7 Setting GOOSE Communications Parameters....................................................................................................... 143
6.3.8 Setting MBUS Parameters............................................................................................................................................ 145
6.3.8.1 Setting Parameters for a Built-in MBUS Module..............................................................................................146
6.3.8.2 Setting Parameters for an External MBUS Module......................................................................................... 149
6.3.8.2.1 Setting SmartMBUS CCO01A Parameters....................................................................................................... 149
6.3.8.2.2 Setting SmartMBUS CCO01B Parameters........................................................................................................152
6.3.9 Setting Inverter Parameters.........................................................................................................................................155

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

SmartLogger3000
User Manual Contents

6.3.9.1 Running Parameters................................................................................................................................................... 157

6.3.9.2 Tracking System........................................................................................................................................................... 177
6.3.9.3 Characteristic Curves.................................................................................................................................................. 180
6.3.9.4 Battery............................................................................................................................................................................. 181
6.3.10 Setting PCS Parameters (100KTL and 200KTL Series)..................................................................................... 185
6.3.10.1 Running Parameters................................................................................................................................................. 185
6.3.10.2 Characteristic Curve..................................................................................................................................................204
6.3.11 Setting PCS Parameters (213KTL-H0)................................................................................................................... 204
6.3.12 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 1)......................................................................................................................... 231
6.3.12.1 Setting CMU Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 232
6.3.12.2 Setting ESU Parameters.......................................................................................................................................... 234
6.3.12.3 Setting ESC Parameters...........................................................................................................................................234
6.3.12.4 Setting ESR Parameters...........................................................................................................................................235
6.3.12.5 Setting HVAC Parameters.......................................................................................................................................236
6.3.13 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 2)......................................................................................................................... 238
6.3.14 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 3)......................................................................................................................... 257
6.3.14.1 Setting ESR Parameters...........................................................................................................................................265
6.3.15 Setting PID Module Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 266
6.3.15.1 Setting PID01 Parameters...................................................................................................................................... 268
6.3.15.1.1 PID Module Running Parameters..................................................................................................................... 268
6.3.15.1.2 PID-PVBOX Running Parameters...................................................................................................................... 271
6.3.15.1.3 PID-SSC Running Parameters............................................................................................................................ 272
6.3.15.2 Setting SmartPID2000 Parameters......................................................................................................................272
6.3.16 Setting Meter Parameters..........................................................................................................................................277
6.3.16.1 Setting DL/T645 Meter Parameters.................................................................................................................... 277
6.3.16.2 Setting Modbus-RTU Meter Parameters........................................................................................................... 280
6.3.17 Setting EMI Parameters.............................................................................................................................................. 283
6.3.17.1 Setting Modbus-RTU EMI Parameters............................................................................................................... 283
6.3.17.2 Setting AI EMI Parameters..................................................................................................................................... 286
6.3.18 Setting STS Parameters.............................................................................................................................................. 288
6.3.19 Setting IEC103 Device Parameters.......................................................................................................................... 289
6.3.20 Setting Custom Device Parameters........................................................................................................................ 290
6.3.21 Setting Parameters for Poverty Alleviation Monitoring Center.................................................................... 292
6.3.22 Smart Tracking Algorithm......................................................................................................................................... 293
6.3.23 Setting IMD Parameters............................................................................................................................................. 294
6.3.24 Setting Relay Parameters........................................................................................................................................... 295
6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters............................................................................................................................. 296
6.5 Setting EMS Control Parameters................................................................................................................................... 314
6.6 Setting Microgrid Control Parameters.........................................................................................................................320
6.6.1 On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG)......................................................................................................................................... 320
6.6.2 On-grid/Off-grid (VSG)................................................................................................................................................. 324
6.6.3 Off-Grid.............................................................................................................................................................................. 328

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

SmartLogger3000
User Manual Contents

6.6.4 Black Start......................................................................................................................................................................... 331

6.7 Setting Feature Parameters............................................................................................................................................ 333
6.8 Power Grid Scheduling..................................................................................................................................................... 333
6.8.1 Power Adjustment Description................................................................................................................................... 333
6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control...................................................................................................................................... 334
6.8.3 Setting Reactive Power Control..................................................................................................................................343
6.8.4 Setting Parameters for Shutdown at High Feed-in Power............................................................................... 355
6.8.5 Setting Export Limitation Parameters...................................................................................................................... 356
6.8.6 Setting Parameters for Smart Reactive Power Compensation........................................................................ 358
6.8.7 Setting DRM Parameters.............................................................................................................................................. 360
6.8.8 Setting Remote Shutdown........................................................................................................................................... 362
6.8.8.1 Setting Dry Contact Remote Shutdown...............................................................................................................362
6.8.8.2 Setting NS Protection Remote Shutdown........................................................................................................... 364
6.8.9 Setting Feed-in at Limited Current........................................................................................................................... 366

7 Device Maintenance........................................................................................................... 368

7.1 Routine Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 368
7.2 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................................. 368
7.3 Alarm Reference..................................................................................................................................................................372
7.4 WebUI Maintenance Operations................................................................................................................................... 372
7.4.1 Upgrading the Device Firmware Version................................................................................................................ 372
7.4.2 Setting Security Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 373
7.4.3 Sending a System Maintenance Command........................................................................................................... 375
7.4.3.1 Exporting Full Configuration Files......................................................................................................................... 376
7.4.3.2 Importing Full Configuration Files......................................................................................................................... 376
7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs................................................................................................................................................... 377
7.4.5 Starting an Onsite Test................................................................................................................................................. 378
7.4.6 License Management.....................................................................................................................................................379
7.4.7 Managing the SmartModule....................................................................................................................................... 381
7.4.8 Managing Users...............................................................................................................................................................381
7.4.9 Collecting Performance Data...................................................................................................................................... 383
7.4.10 Adjusting the Total Energy Yield............................................................................................................................. 383
7.4.11 Force Start....................................................................................................................................................................... 384
7.4.12 Device Replacement.................................................................................................................................................... 385
7.4.13 Communication Records............................................................................................................................................ 385
7.4.14 SOC Balancing............................................................................................................................................................... 386
7.5 Device Replacement.......................................................................................................................................................... 389
7.5.1 Exporting Configuration Files from the SmartLogger WebUI......................................................................... 389
7.5.2 Exporting Configuration Files from the SUN2000 App...................................................................................... 389
7.6 Device Disposal................................................................................................................................................................... 391

8 FAQ......................................................................................................................................... 392
8.1 How Do I Connect the SmartLogger to the SUN2000 App or FusionSolar App?........................................ 392
8.2 How Do I Set FTP Parameters?......................................................................................................................................394

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

SmartLogger3000
User Manual Contents

8.3 How Do I Set Email Parameters?.................................................................................................................................. 396

8.4 How Do I Change the SSID and Password of the Built-in WLAN?....................................................................398
8.5 How Do I Use DI Ports?....................................................................................................................................................399
8.6 How Do I Use DO Ports?................................................................................................................................................. 400
8.7 How Do I Use the USB Port?.......................................................................................................................................... 401
8.8 How Do I Change a Device Name?.............................................................................................................................. 404
8.9 How Do I Change the Communications Address?.................................................................................................. 404
8.10 How Do I Export Inverter Parameters?.....................................................................................................................405
8.11 How Do I Clear Alarms?................................................................................................................................................ 405
8.12 How Do I Enable the AI1 Port to Detect SPD Alarms?....................................................................................... 406
8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are Supported by the SmartLogger?......................................406
8.14 How Do I Check the SIM Card Status?..................................................................................................................... 410
8.15 How Do I Use Mobile Network Sharing?................................................................................................................ 412
8.16 WebUI Allows Login Only in Chinese or Prompts to Switch to Chinese After Login............................... 414
8.17 How Do I Identify the Meter Wiring Direction on the SmartLogger?........................................................... 414
8.18 Resetting Password..........................................................................................................................................................415

9 Technical Specifications.....................................................................................................416
9.1 Technical Specifications of the SmartLogger............................................................................................................ 416
9.2 Technical Specifications of the SmartModule.......................................................................................................... 421

A Product User Lists............................................................................................................... 423

B Domain Name List of Management Systems...............................................................425
C Port No. List..........................................................................................................................426
D Certificate Management and Maintenance................................................................. 428
D.1 Preconfigured Certificate Risk Disclaimer..................................................................................................................428
D.2 Application Scenarios of Preconfigured Certificates.............................................................................................. 429

E Contact Information........................................................................................................... 431

F Digital Power Customer Service...................................................................................... 433
G Acronyms and Abbreviations........................................................................................... 434

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

1 Safety Information

Statement
Before transporting, storing, installing, operating, using, and/or maintaining
the equipment, read this document, strictly follow the instructions provided
herein, and follow all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this
document. In this document, "equipment" refers to the products, software,
components, spare parts, and/or services related to this document; "the Company"
refers to the manufacturer (producer), seller, and/or service provider of the
equipment; "you" refers to the entity that transports, stores, installs, operates,
uses, and/or maintains the equipment.

The Danger, Warning, Caution, and Notice statements described in this

document do not cover all the safety precautions. You also need to comply with
relevant international, national, or regional standards and industry practices. The
Company shall not be liable for any consequences that may arise due to
violations of safety requirements or safety standards concerning the design,
production, and usage of the equipment.

The equipment shall be used in an environment that meets the design

specifications. Otherwise, the equipment may be faulty, malfunctioning, or
damaged, which is not covered under the warranty. The Company shall not be
liable for any property loss, personal injury, or even death caused thereby.

Comply with applicable laws, regulations, standards, and specifications during

transportation, storage, installation, operation, use, and maintenance.

Do not perform reverse engineering, decompilation, disassembly, adaptation,

implantation, or other derivative operations on the equipment software. Do not
study the internal implementation logic of the equipment, obtain the source code
of the equipment software, violate intellectual property rights, or disclose any of
the performance test results of the equipment software.

The Company shall not be liable for any of the following circumstances or
their consequences:

● The equipment is damaged due to force majeure such as earthquakes, floods,

volcanic eruptions, debris flows, lightning strikes, fires, wars, armed conflicts,
typhoons, hurricanes, tornadoes, and other extreme weather conditions.
● The equipment is operated beyond the conditions specified in this document.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● The equipment is installed or used in environments that do not comply with

international, national, or regional standards.
● The equipment is installed or used by unqualified personnel.
● You fail to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the
product and in the document.
● You remove or modify the product or modify the software code without
authorization.
● You or a third party authorized by you cause the equipment damage during
transportation.
● The equipment is damaged due to storage conditions that do not meet the
requirements specified in the product document.
● You fail to prepare materials and tools that comply with local laws,
regulations, and related standards.
● The equipment is damaged due to your or a third party's negligence,
intentional breach, gross negligence, or improper operations, or other reasons
not related to the Company.

1.1 Personal Safety

DANGER

Ensure that power is off during installation. Do not install or remove a cable with
power on. Transient contact between the core of the cable and the conductor will
generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause a fire or personal injury.

DANGER

Non-standard and improper operations on the energized equipment may cause

fire, electric shocks, or explosion, resulting in property damage, personal injury, or
even death.

DANGER

Before operations, remove conductive objects such as watches, bracelets, bangles,

rings, and necklaces to prevent electric shocks.

DANGER

During operations, use dedicated insulated tools to prevent electric shocks or short
circuits. The dielectric withstanding voltage level must comply with local laws,
regulations, standards, and specifications.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

Figure 1-1 Personal protective equipment

General Requirements
● Do not stop protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions, and
related precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment.
● If there is a likelihood of personal injury or equipment damage during
operations, immediately stop, report the case to the supervisor, and take
feasible protective measures.
● Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed by
professionals.
● In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area
and activate the fire alarm or call emergency services. Do not enter the
affected building or equipment area under any circumstances.

Personnel Requirements
● Only professionals and trained personnel are allowed to operate the
equipment.
– Professionals: personnel who are familiar with the working principles and
structure of the equipment, trained or experienced in equipment
operations and are clear of the sources and degree of various potential
hazards in equipment installation, operation, maintenance
– Trained personnel: personnel who are trained in technology and safety,
have required experience, are aware of possible hazards on themselves in
certain operations, and are able to take protective measures to minimize
the hazards on themselves and other people
● Personnel who plan to install or maintain the equipment must receive
adequate training, be able to correctly perform all operations, and understand
all necessary safety precautions and local relevant standards.
● Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install,
operate, and maintain the equipment.
● Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect
the equipment.
● Personnel who will perform special tasks such as electrical operations,
working at heights, and operations of special equipment must possess the
required local qualifications.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● Only authorized professionals are allowed to replace the equipment or

components (including software).
● Only personnel who need to work on the equipment are allowed to access
the equipment.

1.2 Electrical Safety

DANGER

Non-standard and improper operations may result in fire or electric shocks.

DANGER

Prevent foreign matter from entering the equipment during operations. Otherwise,
equipment short-circuits or damage, load power derating, power failure, or
personal injury may occur.

WARNING

For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first when
installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last when removing the
equipment.

General Requirements
● Follow the procedures described in the document for installation, operation,
and maintenance. Do not reconstruct or alter the equipment, add
components, or change the installation sequence without permission.
● Obtain approval from the national or local electric utility company before
connecting the equipment to the grid.
● Before installing or removing power cables, turn off the switches of the
equipment and its upstream and downstream switches.
● If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, disconnect the power supply
immediately and do not use the equipment.
● Before performing operations on the equipment, check that all tools meet the
requirements and record the tools. After the operations are complete, collect
all of the tools to prevent them from being left inside the equipment.
● Before installing power cables, check that cable labels are correct and cable
terminals are insulated.
● When installing the equipment, use a torque tool of a proper measurement
range to tighten the screws. When using a wrench to tighten the screws,
ensure that the wrench does not tilt and the torque error does not exceed
10% of the specified value.
● If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before
operating the equipment.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● Check equipment connections periodically, ensuring that all screws are

securely tightened.
● Only qualified professionals can replace a damaged cable.
● Do not scrawl, damage, or block any labels or nameplates on the equipment.
Promptly replace labels that have worn out.
● Do not use solvents such as water, alcohol, or oil to clean electrical
components inside or outside of the equipment.

Grounding
● Ensure that the grounding impedance of the equipment complies with local
electrical standards.
● Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective
ground. Before operating the equipment, check its electrical connection to
ensure that it is reliably grounded.
● Do not work on the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground
conductor.
● Do not damage the ground conductor.
● For the equipment that uses a three-pin socket, ensure that the ground
terminal in the socket is connected to the protective ground point.
● If high touch current may occur on the equipment, ground the protective
ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting the power
supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of touch current may occur.

Cabling Requirements
● When selecting, installing, and routing cables, follow local safety regulations
and rules.
● When routing power cables, ensure that there is no coiling or twisting. Do not
join or weld power cables. If necessary, use a longer cable.
● Ensure that all cables are properly connected and insulated, and meet
specifications.
● Ensure that the slots and holes for routing cables are free from sharp edges,
and that the positions where cables are routed through pipes or cable holes
are equipped with cushion materials to prevent the cables from being
damaged by sharp edges or burrs.
● Ensure that cables of the same type are bound together neatly and straight
and that the cable sheath is intact. When routing cables of different types,
ensure that they are away from each other without entanglement and
overlapping.

1.3 Environment Requirements

DANGER

Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Do not

perform any operation on the equipment in such environments.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

DANGER

Do not place the equipment near heat sources or fire sources, such as smoke,
candles, heaters, or other heating devices. Overheat may damage the equipment
or cause a fire.

WARNING

Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under
areas prone to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents, or
areas prone to water leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation vents, or
feeder windows of the equipment room. Ensure that no liquid enters the
equipment to prevent faults or short circuits.

General Requirements
● Ensure that the equipment is stored in a clean, dry, and well ventilated area
with proper temperature and humidity and is protected from dust and
condensation.
● Keep the installation and operating environments of the equipment within the
allowed ranges. Otherwise, its performance and safety will be compromised.
● Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but
not limited to moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, inserting
connectors to or removing connectors from signal ports connected to outdoor
facilities, working at heights, performing outdoor installation, and opening
doors) in harsh weather conditions such as lightning, rain, snow, and level 6
or stronger wind.
● Do not install the equipment in an environment with direct sunlight, dust,
smoke, volatile or corrosive gases, infrared and other radiations, organic
solvents, or salty air.
● Do not install the equipment in an environment with conductive metal or
magnetic dust.
● Do not install the equipment in an area conducive to the growth of
microorganisms such as fungus or mildew.
● Do not install the equipment in an area with strong vibration, noise, or
electromagnetic interference.
● After installing the equipment, remove the packing materials such as cartons,
foam, plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.

1.4 Mechanical Safety

DANGER

When working at heights, wear a safety helmet and safety harness or waist belt
and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an insecure moveable object
or metal object with sharp edges. Make sure that the hooks will not slide off.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 6

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

WARNING

Ensure that all necessary tools are ready and inspected by a professional
organization. Do not use tools that have signs of scratches or fail to pass the
inspection or whose inspection validity period has expired. Ensure that the tools
are secure and not overloaded.

WARNING

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the sealing
performance and electromagnetic containment of the equipment and damage
components or cables inside. Metal shavings from drilling may short-circuit boards
inside the equipment.

General Requirements
● Do not perform operations such as arc welding and cutting on the equipment
without evaluation by the Company.
● Do not install other devices on the top of the equipment without evaluation
by the Company.
● Use correct tools and operate them in the correct way.

Moving Heavy Objects

● Be cautious to prevent injury when moving heavy objects.

● If multiple persons need to move a heavy object together, determine the

manpower and work division with consideration of height and other
conditions to ensure that the weight is equally distributed.
● If two persons or more move a heavy object together, ensure that the object
is lifted and landed simultaneously and moved at a uniform pace under the
supervision of one person.
● Wear personal protective gears such as protective gloves and shoes when
manually moving the equipment.
● To move an object by hand, approach to the object, squat down, and then lift
the object gently and stably by the force of the legs instead of your back. Do
not lift it suddenly or turn your body around.
● Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold
the handles of modules that are installed in the equipment.
● Do not quickly lift a heavy object above your waist. Place the object on a
workbench that is half-waist high or any other appropriate place, adjust the
positions of your palms, and then lift it.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 7

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 1 Safety Information

● Move a heavy object stably with balanced force at an even and low speed. Put
down the object stably and slowly to prevent any collision or drop from
scratching the surface of the equipment or damaging the components and
cables.
● When moving a heavy object, be aware of the workbench, slope, staircase,
and slippery places. When moving a heavy object through a door, ensure that
the door is wide enough to move the object and avoid bumping or injury.
● When transferring a heavy object, move your feet instead of turning your
waist around. When lifting and transferring a heavy object, ensure that your
feet point to the target direction of movement.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 8

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

2 Product Overview

2.1 SmartLogger

2.1.1 Model

Model Description
This document covers the following SmartLogger models:

● SmartLogger3000A01CN
● SmartLogger3000B01CN
● SmartLogger3000B03CN
● SmartLogger3000A01EU
● SmartLogger3000A03EU
● SmartLogger3000B02EU
● SmartLogger3000A01NH
● SmartLogger3000B00NH
● SmartLogger3000A01KR
● SmartLogger3000A01AU
● SmartLogger3000A00GL
● SmartLogger3000C01

Figure 2-1 Model

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 9

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Table 2-1 Model description

No. Meaning Description

1 Product family SmartLogger3000: data collector

2 Hardware ID ● A: does not support fiber

networking and can connect to a
maximum of 80 solar inverters.
● B: supports fiber networking and
a maximum of 150 solar inverters.
● C: supports SmartLogger-based
microgrid control.

3 Feature ID ● 00: does not support 4G

networking or MBUS
communication.
● 01: supports 4G networking, but
not MBUS communication.
● 02: supports MBUS
communication, but not 4G
networking.
● 03: supports 4G networking and
MBUS communication.

4 Region ● CN: China

● EU: Europe
● NH: Japan
● KR: South Korea
● AU: Australia
● GL: Global

Model Identification
You can view the SmartLogger model and communication mode on the
nameplate.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 10

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Figure 2-2 Nameplate

(1) Trademark, product model, and power (2) Communications mode

rating

(3) Compliance symbols (4) Company name and place of manufacture

NOTE

The nameplate figure is for reference only.

2.1.2 Networking

Functions
The SmartLogger monitors and manages PV systems and energy storage systems
(ESSs). It converges all ports, converts protocols, collects and stores data, and
centrally monitors and maintains the devices in the systems.

Networking Application
The SmartLogger is applicable to PV systems and ESSs. It supports the following:

● Local operations on the SmartLogger using the mobile app through the built-
in WLAN.
● RS485 networking, which enables the SmartLogger to connect to:
– Devices such as Huawei inverters and PID modules.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 11

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

– Third-party inverters, environment monitoring instruments (EMIs), Smart

Transformer Stations (STSs), and power meters that use the Modbus RTU
protocol.
– Power meters that use the DL/T645 protocol.
– Devices that use the IEC 103 protocol.
● Ethernet networking, which enables the SmartLogger to connect to the
inverters, Smart Power Control System (Smart PCS), Smart String ESSs, MBUS
CCO, and STSs.
● MBUS networking, which enables the SmartLogger to connect to Huawei
inverters and PID-PVBOXs that support MBUS communication.
● Dual-plane redundancy networking to provide reliable transmission.
● Connection to management systems:
– Connects to a management system or third-party device that uses the
Modbus TCP protocol over a wired or wireless network.
– Connects to a management system or a third-party device that uses the
IEC 104 protocol in the LAN over a wired network.
– Connects to a management system or a third-party device that uses the
GOOSE protocol over a wired network.
NOTE

● The SmartLogger cannot be connected to a management system that uses the IEC 104
protocol over a 4G/3G/2G or LTE dedicated network.
● The export+import meter needs to be connected to the grid over a separate RS485
communication line which is not connected to other devices in series.

Typical Networking Scenarios

● The SmartLogger supports the following northbound wired networks: fiber
ring network, fiber star network, and Ethernet star network.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 12

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Figure 2-3 Fiber ring network

NOTE

● A maximum of 15 SmartLoggers can be connected to form a fiber ring network. Each

SmartLogger can connect to devices such as inverters, EMIs, and power meters.
● The fiber channel switch must support and enable the standard RSTP, and the bridge
priority of the switch must be higher than 0x8000 of the SmartLogger (recommended
value: 0x7000; a smaller value indicates a higher bridge priority). For details about how
to configure the RSTP and bridge priority of the switch, contact the vendor. If the switch
does not support the RSTP, the fiber ring topology must be changed to a chain or star
topology.
● Multiple fiber ring networks can be connected to the management system over Ethernet
switches.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 13

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Figure 2-4 Fiber or Ethernet star network

NOTE

● Multiple SmartLoggers can be connected to the management system over Ethernet

switches.
● When the SmartLogger connects to an Ethernet switch over optical fibers, the maximum
communication distance is 12 km (with the 100M optical module) or 10 km (with the
1000M optical module). The maximum communication distance is 100 m when an
Ethernet cable is used for connection.
● The SmartLogger supports the following wireless networks: 4G/3G/2G
networking and LTE dedicated networking.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 14

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Figure 2-5 4G networking

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 15

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Figure 2-6 LTE dedicated networking

NOTE

● The WAN port of the SmartLogger connects to the customer-premises equipment (CPE)
through the power over Ethernet (PoE) module and PoE surge protective device (SPD).
● The IP addresses of the SmartLogger and CPE must be on the same network segment.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

2.1.3 Appearance
Appearance

Figure 2-7 SmartLogger

(1) LED indicators (2) SIM card slot (3) Mounting ear

(4) Guide rail clamp (5) MBUS port (6) GE port (WAN)

(7) SFP ports (8) 4G antenna port (9) RST button

(10) USB port (11) GE port (LAN) (12) DI ports

(13) 12 V output power port (14) AI ports (15) DO ports

(16) COM ports (17) 24 V input power port (18) 12 V input power port

(19) Protective ground point - -

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Indicators

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 18

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Table 2-2 Indicators

Indicator Status Description

Running Green off The SmartLogger is not

indicator powered on.
(RUN)
Blinking green slowly (on for The communication with the
1s and then off for 1s) management system is
normal.

Blinking green fast (on for The communication with the

0.125s and then off for 0.125s) management system is
interrupted.

Alarm/ Alarm status Red off No system alarm is raised.

Maintenance
indicator Blinking red The system raises a warning
(ALM) slowly (on for alarm.
1s and then
off for 4s)

Blinking red The system raises a minor

fast (on for alarm.
0.5s and then
off for 0.5s)

Steady red The system raises a major

alarm.

Maintenance Green off No local maintenance is in

status progress.

Blinking Local maintenance is in

green slowly progress.
(on for 1s and
then off for
1s)

Blinking Local maintenance fails or the

green fast (on connection to the app is to be
for 0.125s and set up.
then off for
0.125s)

Steady green Local maintenance succeeds.

4G indicator Green off The 4G/3G/2G networking

(4G) function is not enabled.

Blinking green slowly (on for Dial-up through the 4G/3G/2G

1s and then off for 1s) network is successful.

Blinking green fast (on for The 4G/3G/2G network is not

0.125s and then off for 0.125s) connected or the
communication is interrupted.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 19

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

NOTE

● Local maintenance refers to the operations performed by connecting a USB flash drive
to the SmartLogger USB port, such as full data import and export using a USB flash
drive, and by connecting the SmartLogger to the FusionSolar app or SUN2000 app over
the built-in WLAN hotspot.
● If an alarm and local maintenance happen concurrently, the alarm/maintenance
indicator shows the local maintenance state first. After local maintenance ends, the
indicator shows the alarm state.

Communications Ports
● GE ports: Ethernet ports, including one WAN port and one LAN port
Appearance GE Port Description

Pins PIN1 1+

PIN2 1–

PIN3 2+

PIN4 3+

PIN5 3–

PIN6 2–

PIN7 4+

PIN8 4–

Indicators Green If the indicator is steady green,

indicator the line is normal.

Yellow If the indicator blinks yellow,

indicator data communication is
normal.

● SFP ports: include two Ethernet optical ports (SFP1 and SFP2), support access
of 100M/1000M SFP or eSFP optical modules, and implement ring networking
using RSTP or STP.
NOTE

● If RSTP is used, fiber ring protection can be completed within 10 seconds. If STP is used,
fiber ring protection can be completed within 60 seconds.
● The SFP1 and SFP2 ports are Ethernet optical ports and work on the same network
segment as the WAN port.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 20

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Appearance SFP Port Description

SFP1 TX1 Transmit port

RX1 Receive port

SFP2 RX2 Receive port

TX2 Transmit port

Indicators Green If the indicator is steady green,

indicator the line is normal.

Yellow If the indicator blinks yellow,

indicator data communication is
normal.

● DI ports: digital input ports, which are used to connect to DI power grid
scheduling commands or alarm signals.
Appearance DI Port Description

DI1 1 Can connect to four passive

dry contact signals.
12V

DI2 2

12V

DI3 3

12V

DI4 4

12V

● AI ports: analog input ports, which are used to connect to AI power grid
scheduling commands or environment monitoring sensors.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 21

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Appearance AI Port Description

AI1 1 Supports one channel of

voltage-type (0–10 V) AI
GND signals.

AI2 2 Support three channels of

current-type (0–20 mA or 4–
GND 20 mA) AI signals.
AI3 3

GND

AI4 4

GND

● DO ports: digital output ports, supporting two relay outputs. A DO port

supports a maximum of 12 V signal voltage.
Appearance DO Port Description

DO1 NC ● The NC/COM is a normally

closed contact.
COM
● The NO/COM is a normally
NO open contact.

DO2 NC

COM

NO

● USB port: supports USB2.0 for connecting to a USB flash drive.

Appearance USB Port Description

USB After a USB flash drive is

inserted into the USB port,
you can perform local
maintenance operations on
the SmartLogger, such as
software upgrade and data
export.

● COM ports: RS485 communications port, supporting three independent RS485

channels and the access of devices that comply with the Modbus RTU, IEC
103, or DL/T645 protocol.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 22

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Appearance COM Port Description

COM1, + RS485A, RS485 differential

COM2, and signal+
COM3
– RS485B, RS485 differential
signal–

Power Ports
● Input power ports: There are two input power ports.
Appearance Input Power Port Description

12 V input DC IN DC2.0 input port, which

power port 12 V, 1 A supports 12 V DC input and is
used to connect to a power
adapter.

24 V input DC IN 2-pin cord end terminal, which

power port 24 V, 0.8 A supports 24 V DC input.
When the device connects to
the power supply through the
12 V input power port, this
port can be used as the 12 V
output power port.

● 12 V output power port: There is one 12 V output power port. Its maximum
output capability is 0.1 A. The port is used to drive the coil of the intermediate
relay in the export limitation or audible and visual alarm scenario.

NOTICE

Select the intermediate relay with a free-wheeling diode in the coil.

Otherwise, the device may be damaged.

Appearance Output Power Port Description

12 V output GND Power supply–

power port
12V Power supply+

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 23

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Button
Button Operation Function Description

RST button Hold down When WLAN is set to OFF in idle state, hold
the button for down the RST button for 1s to 3s to power on
1s to 3s. the WLAN module. The alarm/maintenance
indicator (ALM) then blinks green quickly for 2
minutes (other indicators are off) and the
SmartLogger waits for connecting to the app. If
the app is not connected, the WLAN module is
automatically powered off after it is powered
on for 4 hours.

Hold down If you hold down the RST button for 10s to
the button for 20s, the SmartLogger enters the safe mode. In
10s to 20s. this case, the device configuration parameters
are retained, but personal privacy and sensitive
data, including the login password and email
address, are cleared.

Hold down Within 3 minutes after the SmartLogger is

the button for powered on, hold down the RST button for
more than more than 60s until all indicators are off and
60s. then wait until the RUN indicator is on. The
SmartLogger restarts and restores its factory
settings.

Dimensions

Figure 2-8 Dimensions

2.2 SmartModule

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 24

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

2.2.1 Model

Model Description
This document covers the following SmartModule model:

● SmartModule1000A01

Figure 2-9 Model

Table 2-3 Model description

No. Meaning Description

1 Product family SmartModule1000: expansion

module

2 Hardware ID A: version A

3 Feature ID 01: SmartLogger scenario

Model Identification
You can view the SmartModule model on the nameplate.

Figure 2-10 Nameplate

(1) Trademark, product model, and power (2) Communications mode

rating

(3) Compliance symbols (4) Company name and place of manufacture

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 25

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

NOTE

The nameplate figure is for reference only.

2.2.2 Networking
Functions
The SmartModule monitors and manages PV systems and ESSs. It converges ports,
converts protocols, and collects data for devices in the systems, and extends ports
for the SmartLogger.

Networking
The SmartModule is applicable to PV systems and ESSs. It supports the following:
● RS485 networking, which enables the SmartModule to connect to:
– Devices such as Huawei inverters and PID modules.
– Third-party solar inverters, EMIs, STSs, and power meters that use the
Modbus RTU protocol.
– Power meters that use the DL/T645 protocol.
– Devices that use the IEC 103 protocol.
● Ethernet networking, which connects to the solar inverter, Smart PCS, Smart
String ESS, and STS.
● The SmartLogger can be connected over Ethernet.

Figure 2-11 Networking

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 26

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

2.2.3 Appearance
Appearance

Figure 2-12 Appearance

(1) LED indicators (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail clamp

(4) COM ports (5) DI ports (6) 12 V output power port

(7) AI ports (8) PT ports (9) Protective ground point

(10) 12 V input power port (11) 24 V input power port (12) GE ports

(13) RST button - -

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 27

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Indicators
Indicator Status Description

Running Green off The SmartModule is not

indicator powered on.
(RUN)
Blinking green slowly (on for The communication with the
1s and then off for 1s) SmartLogger is normal.

Blinking green fast (on for The communication with the

0.125s and then off for 0.125s) SmartLogger is interrupted.

Alarm/ Alarm status Red off No alarm is raised for the

Maintenance SmartModule.
indicator
(ALM) Blinking red The SmartModule is running
slowly (on for in non-encryption status.
1s and then
off for 4s)

Blinking red The SmartModule digital

fast (on for certificate is invalid.
0.5s and then
off for 0.5s)

Steady red Reserved.

Communications Ports
● GE ports: four Ethernet electrical ports. Connect the LAN port of the
SmartLogger to one GE port of the SmartModule using an Ethernet cable. The
SmartModule obtains an IP address from the DHCP server and automatically
registers with the SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 28

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Appearance GE Port Description

Pins PIN1 1+

PIN2 1–

PIN3 2+

PIN4 3+

PIN5 3–

PIN6 2–

PIN7 4+

PIN8 4–

Indicators Green If the indicator is steady green,

indicator the line is normal.

Yellow If the indicator blinks yellow,

indicator data communication is
normal.

● DI ports: digital input ports, which are used to connect to DI power grid
scheduling commands or alarm signals.
Appearance DI Port Description

DI1 1 Can connect to four passive

dry contact signals.
12V

DI2 2

12V

DI3 3

12V

DI4 4

12V

● AI ports: analog input ports, which are used to connect to AI power grid
scheduling commands or environment monitoring sensors.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 29

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Appearance AI Port Description

AI1 1 Supports one channel of

voltage-type (0–10 V) AI
GND signals.

AI2 2 Support three channels of

current-type (0–20 mA or 4–
GND 20 mA) AI signals.
AI3 3

GND

AI4 4

GND

● PT ports: can connect to two PT100/PT1000 temperature sensors.

Appearance PT Port Description

PT1 + Can connect to a three-wire or

two-wire PT100/PT1000
– temperature sensor.
GND ● Three-wire: cable length <
2 m for PT100; cable length
PT2 + < 20 m for PT1000
– ● Two-wire: cable length < 2
m for a PT temperature
GND sensor

● COM ports: RS485 communications port, supporting three independent RS485

channels and the access of devices that comply with the Modbus RTU, IEC
103, or DL/T645 protocol.
Appearance COM Port Description

COM1, + RS485A, RS485 differential

COM2, and signal+
COM3
– RS485B, RS485 differential
signal–

Power Ports
● Input power ports: There are two input power ports.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 30

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Appearance Input Power Port Description

12 V input DC IN DC2.0 input port, which

power port 12 V, 1 A supports 12 V DC input and is
used to connect to a power
adapter.

24 V input DC IN 2-pin cord end terminal, which

power port 24 V, 0.8 A supports 24 V DC input.
When the device connects to
the power supply through the
12 V input power port, this
port can be used as the 12 V
output power port.

● 12 V output power port: There is one 12 V output power port. Its maximum
output capability is 0.1 A. The port is used to drive the coil of the intermediate
relay in the export limitation or audible and visual alarm scenario.

NOTICE

Select the intermediate relay with a free-wheeling diode in the coil.

Otherwise, the device may be damaged.

Appearance Output Power Port Description

12 V output GND Power supply–

power port
12V Power supply+

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 31

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 2 Product Overview

Button
Button Operation Function Description

RST button Hold down If the Communication using expired

the button for certificate function is disabled for the
3s to 10s. SmartLogger and the digital certificate of the
SmartModule becomes invalid, after enabling
the function, press the RST button for 3s to 10s
to enable the SmartModule to enter the mode
of ignoring digital certificate expiration and
restore the communication with the
SmartLogger. The alarm/maintenance indicator
(ALM) blinks red slowly.
After the digital certificate of the SmartModule
is reloaded through the SmartLogger, the
SmartModule communication can recover.

Hold down Within 3 minutes after the SmartModule is

the button for powered on, hold down the RST button for
more than more than 60s until all indicators are off and
60s. then wait until the RUN indicator is on. The
SmartModule restarts and restores its factory
settings.

Dimensions

Figure 2-13 Dimensions

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 32

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

3 Device Installation

3.1 Checking Before Installation

Check Item Criteria

Outer The outer package is intact. If it is damaged or abnormal, do

packaging not unpack it and contact your dealer.

Deliverables Check the quantity of deliverables against the Packing List in

the packing case. If any component is missing or damaged,
contact your dealer.

3.2 Tools
Type Tool

Hammer drill Diagonal pliers Wire stripper Crimping tool

Installation

RJ45 crimping Flat-head Phillips insulated Flat-head

tool screwdriver torque insulated torque
screwdriver screwdriver

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 33

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Type Tool

Utility knife Cable cutter Vacuum cleaner Marker

Measuring tape Cable tie Heat gun Multimeter

Heat shrink Level Rubber mallet

tubing

PPE

Insulated gloves Safety goggles Dust mask Insulated shoes

3.3 Installation Requirements

NOTICE

● Do not install the SmartLogger in areas with flammable and explosive

materials and direct sunlight.
● The SmartLogger should be installed at a proper height to facilitate operation
and maintenance.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 34

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Figure 3-1 Installation position

3.4 Installing the SmartLogger

The SmartLogger can be wall-mounted or guide rail-mounted.

Wall-mounted Installation

WARNING

● Avoid drilling holes into the water pipes and power cables buried in the wall.
● Install a SmartLogger on a flat and secure interior wall.
● When wall-mounting the SmartLogger, ensure that the cable connection area
faces downwards for ease of cable connection and maintenance.
● You are advised to use the tapping screws and expansion tubes delivered with
the SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 35

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Figure 3-2 Wall-mounted installation

Guide Rail-mounted Installation

Prepare a 35 mm standard guide rail by yourself. Ensure that the guide rail:
● Has sufficient length for securing the SmartLogger. The recommended
effective length is 230 mm or greater.
● Has been secured before you install the SmartLogger.

Figure 3-3 Guide rail-mounted installation

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 36

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

3.5 Installing the SmartLogger and SmartModule

Combine the SmartLogger and SmartModule and install them on a wall or along
a guide rail.

Wall-mounted Installation

WARNING

Avoid drilling holes into the water pipes and power cables buried in the wall.

Step 1 Combine the SmartLogger and SmartModule.

NOTE

If the SmartLogger and SmartModule have been combined before delivery, skip this step.

Figure 3-4 Connecting the SmartLogger to the SmartModule using a connecting

plate

Step 2 Install the SmartLogger and SmartModule.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 37

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Figure 3-5 Wall-mounted installation

----End

Guide Rail-mounted Installation (Stand-alone)

Prepare a 35 mm standard guide rail by yourself. Ensure that the guide rail:
● Has sufficient length for securing the SmartLogger and SmartModule. The
recommended effective length is 360 mm or greater.
● Has been secured before you install the SmartLogger and SmartModule.
NOTE

Ensure that the SIM card slot on the SmartLogger is not blocked.

Figure 3-6 Guide rail-mounted installation

Guide Rail-mounted Installation (Combined)

Prepare a 35 mm standard guide rail by yourself. Ensure that the guide rail:

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 38

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

● Has sufficient length for securing the SmartLogger and SmartModule. The
recommended effective length is 360 mm or greater.
● Has been secured before you install the SmartLogger and SmartModule.
NOTE

Ensure that the SIM card slot on the SmartLogger is not blocked.

Step 1 Combine the SmartLogger and SmartModule.

NOTE

If the SmartLogger and SmartModule have been combined before delivery, you only need
to remove the mounting ears and guide rail clamps in the middle. You do not need to use a
connecting plate to connect the SmartLogger and SmartModule.

Figure 3-7 Connecting the SmartLogger to the SmartModule using a connecting

plate

Step 2 Install the SmartLogger and SmartModule.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Figure 3-8 Guide rail-mounted installation

----End

3.6 Installing a Power Adapter

A power adapter can be installed on a wall or flat surface.

If the SmartLogger requires a power adapter for power supply, install a power
adapter.

Wall-mounted Installation
It is recommended that the power adapter be installed on the right side of the
SmartLogger. Keep the AC power cable port upward.

WARNING

Avoid drilling holes into the water pipes and power cables buried in the wall.

Figure 3-9 Wall-mounted installation (mode 1)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 40

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Figure 3-10 Wall-mounted installation (mode 2)

Flat Surface-mounted Installation

Install the power adapter on a flat surface. This section describes how to install
the power adapter on the top of the SmartLogger.

Step 1 Place the power adapter horizontally on the top of the SmartLogger.

NOTICE

● Ensure that the power adapter indicator faces upward or outward.

● Ensure that the adapter is securely installed.

Step 2 Plan the cable route of the power adapter to ensure that the SIM card can be
installed properly.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 3 Device Installation

Figure 3-11 Flat surface-mounted installation

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 42

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

4 Cable Connections

4.1 Connecting Cables to the SmartLogger

4.1.1 Preparing Cables

Type Recommended Cable Specifications

PE cable Outdoor copper-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 4–6 mm2 or 12–10
AWG

RS485 Two-core or multi-core outdoor shielded cable with a cross-sectional area of

communications 0.2–2.5 mm2 or 24–14 AWG
cable

(Optional) MBUS Delivered with the SmartLogger, 1.5 m long

cable

DI signal cable Two-core or multi-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 0.2–1.5 mm2 or
24–16 AWG
Output power
cable

AI signal cable

DO signal cable

Network cable Delivered with the SmartLogger, 2.2 m long. If the delivered network cable is
too short, you are advised to prepare a network cable of Cat 5e or higher
specifications and shielded RJ45 connectors.

(Optional) 24 V Two-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 0.2–1.5 mm2 or 24–16 AWG
input power
cable

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 43

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

4.1.2 Connecting a PE Cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a PE cable.

Figure 4-1 Connecting a PE cable

----End

4.1.3 Connecting an RS485 Communications Cable

Context
● The SmartLogger can connect to RS485 communications devices, such as a
solar inverter, an EMI, a power meter, and a PID module over the COM port.
● Ensure that RS485+ is connected to COM+ of the SmartLogger and RS485– is
connected to the COM– of the SmartLogger.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect an RS485 communications cable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 44

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-2 Connecting an RS485 communications cable

Port Silk Screen Description

COM1, COM2, and + RS485A, RS485 differential

COM3 signal+

– RS485B, RS485 differential

signal–

Step 2 If devices need to be cascaded, cascade the devices and then connect them to the
SmartLogger.

NOTICE

● You are advised to connect fewer than 30 devices to each RS485 route.
● The baud rate, communications protocol, and parity mode of all devices on an
RS485 cascading link must be the same as those of the COM port on the
SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 45

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-3 Cascading connection

----End

4.1.4 Connecting an MBUS Cable

Context
● If both the SmartLogger and the inverter support MBUS, the SmartLogger can
be connected to the inverter through an AC power cable. In this case, you do
not need to connect the RS485 communications cable to the inverter.
● If the SmartLogger uses an AC power cable as the communications cable, a
miniature circuit breaker (MCB) and a fuse switch disconnector need to be
installed to prevent device damage in the case of short circuits.

NOTICE

● If the inverter uses both MBUS and RS485 for communication, choose Settings
> Comm. Param. > RS485, and set Protocol to Modbus-Control. If this step is
not performed, the power grid dispatching function will be affected.
● The total rated power of the PV system connected to the MBUS port of the
SmartLogger must be greater than 75 kW.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 46

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-4 MBUS networking

Procedure
Step 1 Connect an MBUS cable.

Figure 4-5 Connecting an MBUS cable

Table 4-1 Components

No. Component Specifications Quantity

1 Busbar - 1
L1/L2/L3

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 47

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

No. Component Specifications Quantity

2 Fuse ● When the rated AC voltage on the 3

low-voltage side of the STS is less
than or equal to 500 V, the rated
voltage of the fuse shall be
greater than or equal to 500 V;
when the rated AC voltage on the
low-voltage side of the STS is
greater than 500 V and less than
or equal to 800 V, the rated
voltage of the fuse shall be
greater than or equal to 800 V.
● When the rated AC voltage on the
low-voltage side of the STS is less
than or equal to 500 V, the rated
current of the fuse shall be
greater than or equal to 6 A;
when the rated AC voltage on the
low-voltage side of the STS is
greater than 500 V and less than
or equal to 800 V, the rated
current of the fuse shall be
greater than or equal to 32 A.

3 Fuse switch ● When the rated AC voltage on the 1

disconnector low-voltage side of the STS is less
than or equal to 500 V, the rated
voltage of the fuse switch
disconnector shall be greater than
or equal to 500 V; when the rated
AC voltage on the low-voltage
side of the STS is greater than
500 V and less than or equal to
800 V, the rated voltage of the
fuse switch disconnector shall be
greater than or equal to 800 V.
● When the rated AC voltage on the
low-voltage side of the STS is less
than or equal to 500 V, the rated
current of the fuse switch
disconnector shall be greater than
or equal to 6 A; when the rated
AC voltage on the low-voltage
side of the STS is greater than
500 V and less than or equal to
800 V, the rated current of the
fuse switch disconnector shall be
greater than or equal to 32 A. The
fuse switch disconnector has
three poles.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 48

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

No. Component Specifications Quantity

4 MCB ● When the rated AC voltage on the 1

low-voltage side of the STS is less
than or equal to 500 V, the rated
voltage of the MCB shall be
greater than or equal to 500 V;
when the rated AC voltage on the
low-voltage side of the STS is
greater than 500 V and less than
or equal to 800 V, the rated
voltage of the MCB shall be
greater than or equal to 800 V.
● When the rated AC voltage on the
low-voltage side of the STS is less
than or equal to 500 V, the rated
current of the MCB shall be
greater than or equal to 6 A and
less than or equal to 32 A; when
the rated AC voltage on the low-
voltage side of the STS is greater
than 500 V and less than or equal
to 800 V, the rated current of the
MCB shall be 32 A.

----End

4.1.5 Connecting a DI Signal Cable

Context
The SmartLogger can receive DI signals such as remote power grid scheduling
commands and alarms over DI ports. It can only receive passive dry contact
signals. It is recommended that the signal transmission distance be less than or
equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect a DI signal cable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 49

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-6 Connecting a DI signal cable

Port Silk Screen Description

DI DI1 1 Can connect to four passive

dry contact signals.
12V

DI2 2

12V

DI3 3

12V

DI4 4

12V

----End

4.1.6 Connecting the Output Power Cable

Context
In the export limitation or audible and visual alarm scenario, the SmartLogger can
drive the coil of the intermediate relay through the 12 V output power port. It is
recommended that the transmission distance be less than or equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the output power cable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 50

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-7 Connecting the output power cable

(1) Intermediate relay

----End

4.1.7 Connecting the AI Signal Cable

Context
The SmartLogger can receive AI signals from EMIs over AI ports. It is
recommended that the signal transmission distance be less than or equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the AI signal cable.

Figure 4-8 Connecting the AI signal cable

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 51

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Port Silk Screen Description

AI AI1 1 Supports 0–10 V input voltage.

GND

AI2 2 Support 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA

input current.
GND

AI3 3

GND

AI4 4

GND

NOTE

AI ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 are for AI+ signals, and the GND port is for AI– signals.

----End

4.1.8 Connecting the DO Signal Cable

Context
The DO port supports a maximum of 12 V signal voltage. The NC/COM is a
normally closed contact, while the NO/COM is a normally open contact. It is
recommended that the signal transmission distance be less than or equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DO signal cable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 52

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-9 Connecting a DO signal cable

----End

4.1.9 Connecting the Ethernet Cable

Context
● The SmartLogger can connect to an Ethernet switch, router, or PC over a WAN
port.
● The SmartLogger can be connected to the SmartModule or a PC over the LAN
port.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE

When crimping the network cable, ensure that the shielding layer of the cable is securely
connected to the metal shell of the RJ45 connectors.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 53

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-10 Connecting an Ethernet cable

(1) White-and-orange (2) Orange (3) White-and-green (4) Blue

(5) White-and-blue (6) Green (7) White-and-brown (8) Brown

----End

4.1.10 Connecting Fiber Jumpers

Context
The SmartLogger can connect to devices such as the ATB through optical fibers.

Procedure
Step 1 Insert optical modules into the SFP1 and SFP2 ports of the SmartLogger.

NOTICE

● Optical modules are optional. Configure the 100M or 1000M optical module
based on the peer port of the optical switch. SFP or eSFP optical modules
should be used. The transmission distance supported by the 100M optical
module should be greater than or equal to 12 km, and the transmission
distance supported by the 1000M optical module should be greater than or
equal to 10 km.
● When inserting an optical module into the SFP1 port, verify that the side with a
label faces upward. When inserting an optical module into the SFP2 port, verify
that the side with a label faces downward.
● In dual-plane redundancy networking, SFP1 and SFP2 can connect to the
northbound monitoring system (IEC104) of the SmartLogger at the same time.

Step 2 Connect the fiber jumpers delivered with the optical modules to the ports on the
optical modules.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-11 Connecting fiber jumpers

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Disconnection can be performed in reverse order.

NOTE

● When removing a fiber jumper, press down the clip first.

● When removing an optical module, pull it out by the handle. Ensure that the interval
between removing and inserting an optical module is greater than 0.2s.

4.1.11 Installing a SIM Card and a 4G Antenna

Context
The SmartLogger provides the 4G wireless communication function. A SIM card of
the local carrier can be inserted for dial-up access.
Prepare a standard SIM card (dimensions: 25 mm x 15 mm; capacity ≥ 64 KB)
Monthly data package of the SIM card ≥ Monthly data of the inverters + Monthly
data of the EMIs + Monthly data of the optimizers If other devices are connected
to the SmartLogger in the network, the monthly data package of the SIM card
needs to be increased as required.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 55

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Table 4-2 SIM card data package recommendation (residential scenario)

Managem Recommended Monthly SIM Card Data Baseline
ent Data Package
System

FusionSolar Inverte Without 10 MB + 4 MB x ● Device performance

Smart PV r power Number of data can be updated
Manageme meters or inverters every 5 minutes.
nt System batteries ● Logs of the inverters
(SmartPVM and I-V diagnosis can
S) With 10 MB + 7 MB x
power Number of be exported monthly.
meters inverters The inverters can be
upgraded monthly.
With 13 MB + 7 MB x
LUNA200 Number of
0-(5-30)- inverters + 5 MB
S0 x Number of
batteries power control
modules

Environmental 3 MB x Number
monitoring of EMIs
instrument (EMI)

Optimizer 2 MB + 0.2 MB x
Number of
optimizers

Table 4-3 SIM card data package recommendation (C&I scenario)

Manageme Recommended Monthly SIM Card Data Baseline
nt System Data Package

FusionSolar Inverter 3 MB + 15 MB x ● Device performance

SmartPVMS Number of data can be updated
inverters every 5 minutes.
● Logs of the inverters,
EMI 3 MB x Number
PCSs, ESSs, and I-V
of EMIs
diagnosis can be
Optimizer 2 MB + 0.3 MB exported monthly.
x Number of ● The inverters, PCSs, and
optimizers ESSs can be upgraded
monthly. If the
ESS LUNA2 80 MB + 80 MB SmartLogger needs to
(includi 000-20 x Number of be upgraded monthly,
ng PCS) 0KWH- ESSs an addition of 80 MB
2H1 data is required.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Manageme Recommended Monthly SIM Card Data Baseline

nt System Data Package

LUNA2 80 MB + 650
000-2.0 MB x Number
MWH-2 of ESSs
H1

Power meter 3 MB x Number

of power
meters

Procedure
Step 1 Insert a SIM card into the SIM card slot.

NOTICE

● When installing the SIM card, determine its installation direction based on the
silk screen.
● Press the SIM card in place to lock it. In this case, the SIM card is correctly
installed.
● When removing the SIM card, push it inward to eject it.

Step 2 Install an antenna.

Figure 4-12 Installing a SIM card and antenna

----End

4.1.12 Connecting the 24 V Input Power Cable

Context
The 24 V input power cable needs to be connected in the following scenarios:
● Scenario 1: The 24 V DC power supply is used.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 57

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

● Scenario 2: The SmartLogger connects to the power supply through the 12 V

input power port, and the 24 V input power port functions as the 12 V output
power port to supply power to devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the input power cable.

Figure 4-13 Connecting the input power cable

----End

4.2 Connecting Cables to the SmartModule

4.2.1 Preparing Cables

Type Recommended Cable Specifications

PE cable Outdoor copper-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 4–6 mm2 or 12–10
AWG

Network cable The cable is delivered with the SmartModule and is 0.35 m long. If the
delivered network cable is too short, you are advised to prepare a network
cable of Cat 5e or higher specifications and shielded RJ45 connectors.

12 V input power The cable is delivered with the SmartModule and is 0.5 m long.
cable

RS485 Two-core or multi-core outdoor shielded cable with a cross-sectional area of

communications 0.2–2.5 mm2 or 24–14 AWG
cable

DI signal cable Two-core or multi-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 0.2–1.5 mm2 or
24–16 AWG
Output power
cable

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 58

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Type Recommended Cable Specifications

AI signal cable

PT signal cable For details about the cables and cable connection operations, see the
documents delivered with the PT100/PT1000.

(Optional) 24 V Two-core cable with a cross-sectional area of 0.2–1.5 mm2 or 24–16 AWG
input power
cable

4.2.2 Connecting the PE Cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the PE cable.

Figure 4-14 Connecting a PE cable

NOTE

If the SmartLogger is connected to the SmartModule over a connecting plate, connect a PE

cable to the ground point of the SmartLogger or SmartModule based on site requirements.

----End

4.2.3 Connecting the Ethernet Cable

Context
● The SmartModule can be connected to the SmartLogger and a PC over the GE
port.
● Connect the LAN port of the SmartLogger to one of the GE ports (GE1 and
GE4 recommended) of the SmartModule through an Ethernet cable. The IP

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 59

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

address can be obtained through DHCP and the registration can be completed
automatically.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE

When crimping the network cable, ensure that the shielding layer of the cable is securely
connected to the metal shell of the RJ45 connectors.

Figure 4-15 Connecting an Ethernet cable

(1) White-and-orange (2) Orange (3) White-and-green (4) Blue

(5) White-and-blue (6) Green (7) White-and-brown (8) Brown

----End

4.2.4 Connecting the 12 V Input Power Cable

Context
The SmartLogger connects to the power supply through the 12 V input power
port, and the 24 V input power port of the SmartLogger functions as the 12 V
output power port to supply power to the SmartModule.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the 12 V input power cable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-16 Connecting the 12 V input power cable

----End

4.2.5 Connecting the RS485 Communications Cable

Context
● The SmartModule can connect to RS485 communications devices, such as a
solar inverter, an EMI, a power meter, and a PID module over the COM port.
● Ensure that RS485+ is connected to COM+ of the SmartModule and RS485– is
connected to the COM– of the SmartModule.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the RS485 communications cable.

Figure 4-17 Connecting an RS485 communications cable

Port Silk Screen Description

COM1, COM2, and + RS485A, RS485 differential

COM3 signal+

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 61

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Port Silk Screen Description

– RS485B, RS485 differential

signal–

Step 2 If devices need to be cascaded, cascade the devices and then connect them to the
SmartModule.

NOTICE

● You are advised to connect fewer than 30 devices to each RS485 route.
● The baud rate, communications protocol, and parity mode of all devices on an
RS485 cascading link must be the same as those of the COM port on the
SmartModule.

Figure 4-18 Cascading connection

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 62

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

4.2.6 Connecting the DI Signal Cable

Context
The SmartModule can receive DI signals such as remote commands and alarms
over DI ports. It can only receive passive dry contact signals. It is recommended
that the signal transmission distance be less than or equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the DI signal cable.

Figure 4-19 Connecting the DI signal cable

Port Silk Screen Description

DI DI1 1 Can connect to four passive

dry contact signals.
12V

DI2 2

12V

DI3 3

12V

DI4 4

12V

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 63

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

4.2.7 Connecting the Output Power Cable

Context
In the export limitation or audible and visual alarm scenario, the SmartModule
can drive the coil of the intermediate relay through the 12 V output power port. It
is recommended that the transmission distance be less than or equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the output power cable.

Figure 4-20 Connecting the output power cable

(1) Intermediate relay

----End

4.2.8 Connecting the AI Signal Cable

Context
The SmartModule can receive AI signals from EMIs over AI ports. It is
recommended that the signal transmission distance be less than or equal to 10 m.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the AI signal cable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 64

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Figure 4-21 Connecting the AI signal cable

Port Silk Screen Description

AI AI1 1 Supports 0–10 V input voltage.

GND

AI2 2 Support 0–20 mA or 4–20 mA

input current.
GND

AI3 3

GND

AI4 4

GND

NOTE

AI ports 1, 2, 3, and 4 are for AI+ signals, and the GND port is for AI– signals.

----End

4.2.9 Connecting the PT Signal Cable

Context
The SmartModule provides two PT ports, which can be used to connect to three-
wire or two-wire PT100/PT1000 temperature sensors.
When a PT port needs to be connected to a two-wire PT100/PT1000, use a short-
circuit cable to short-circuit GND and – of the port.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 65

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the PT signal cable.

Figure 4-22 Connection to a three-wire PT100/PT1000

(1) PT100/PT1000 temperature sensor

Figure 4-23 Connection to a two-wire PT100/PT1000

(1) PT100/PT1000 temperature sensor

----End

4.2.10 Connecting the 24 V Input Power Cable

Context
The 24 V input power cable needs to be connected in the following scenarios:

● Scenario 1: The 24 V DC power supply is used.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 66

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 4 Cable Connections

● Scenario 2: The SmartModule connects to the power supply through the 12 V

input power port, and the 24 V input power port functions as the 12 V output
power port to supply power to devices.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the input power cable.

Figure 4-24 Connecting the input power cable

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 67

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 5 System Operation

5 System Operation

5.1 Check Before Power-on

No. Check That

1 The SmartLogger and SmartModule are installed correctly and

securely.

2 All cables are connected securely.

3 Routing for the power cables and signal cables meets the
requirements for routing strong-current and weak-current cables and
complies with the cable routing plan.

4 Cables are bound neatly, and cable ties are secured evenly and
properly in the same direction.

5 There are no sundries such as unnecessary adhesive tape or cable ties

on cables.

5.2 Powering On the System

Step 1 Connect the power supply.
● Method 1: When a power adapter is used, connect the power adapter cable
and turn on the switch on the AC socket side.
NOTE

● The rated input voltage of the power adapter is 100–240 V AC, and the rated input
frequency is 50/60 Hz.
● Select an AC socket that matches the power adapter.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 5 System Operation

Figure 5-1 Power supply through the power adapter

● Method 2: When a DC power supply is used, check that the cable between
the DC power supply and the SmartLogger as well as the SmartModule is
connected properly, and turn on the upstream power switch of the DC power
supply.
Step 2 When MBUS is used for communication, turn on all the upstream switches of the
MBUS port.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 69

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6 WebUI Operations

6.1 Introduction to WebUI

NOTICE

● The web user interface (WebUI) figures in this document are for reference only.
The actual WebUI may vary.
● The parameter names, value ranges, and default values are subject to change.
The actual display may vary.
● Delivering a reset, shutdown, or upgrade command to the inverter and Smart
PCS may cause the inverter and Smart PCS to disconnect from the grid, which
affects the energy yield.
● Only professionals are allowed to set the grid parameters, protection
parameters, feature parameters, and power adjustment parameters of the
inverter and Smart PCS. If the power grid parameters, protection parameters,
and feature parameters are incorrectly set, the inverter and Smart PCS may
disconnect from the power grid. If the power adjustment parameters are
incorrectly set, the inverter and Smart PCS may fail to connect to the power
grid as required. In these cases, the energy yield will be affected.
● Only professionals are allowed to set the power grid scheduling parameters of
the SmartLogger. Incorrect settings may cause the plant to fail to connect to
the power grid as required, which affects the energy yield.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 70

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.1.1 WebUI Layout

Figure 6-1 WebUI layout

No. Function Description

1 First-level menu Choose the corresponding first-level menu before you perform
any operation over the WebUI.

2 Second-level Under the first-level menu, choose the device to be queried or

menu the parameter to be set under the second-level menu.

3 Third-level menu ● After choosing a second-level menu, choose a third-level

menu to access the query or setting page.
● There are no third-level menus under certain second-level
menus.

4 Details page Displays details of the queried information or parameter

setting.

5 System time Displays the current system time.

6 Power grid Displays the current power grid scheduling mode and
scheduling status scheduling value of the system.

7 Icon for SIM card Displays the signal strength of the SIM card.
signal strength

8 Alarm icon Displays the severities and number of active system alarms. You
can click a number to access the alarm page.

9 Display language Selects the display language or chooses to log out.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 71

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-2 Plant running information (without battery or power meter)

No. Parameter Description

1 Active power Total active power of inverters

2 Energy yield of Total energy yield of inverters on the current day

current day

3 Total energy Total energy yield of inverters

yield

4 Reduced CO2 (Total energy yield – Total power supply from grid) x CO2
emission emission reduction coefficient. If the result is negative, the value
is zero.

5 Revenue (Total energy yield – Total power supply from grid) x Revenue
coefficient. If the result is negative, the value is zero.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 72

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-3 Plant running information (with power meter but without battery)

No. Parameter Description

1 Active power Total active power of inverters

2 Reactive power Vector sum of the reactive power of inverters: Positive value
indicates that power is transmitted to the grid and negative
value indicates that power is transmitted from the grid.

3 Load power Vector sum of the active power and grid-tied active power

4 Grid-tied active Active power of the feed-in meter: Positive value indicates
power purchasing electricity and negative value indicates selling
electricity.

5 Grid-tied reactive Reactive power of the feed-in meter: Positive value indicates that
power power is transmitted from the grid and negative value indicates
that power is transmitted to the power grid.

6 Energy yield of Total energy yield of inverters on the current day

current day

7 Daily Energy yield of current day + Daily supply from grid – Daily feed-
consumption in to grid – Today's power supply from grid

8 Daily feed-in to Current total negative active energy of the feed-in meter – Total
grid negative active energy at 00:00 on the current day

9 Daily supply Current total positive active energy of the feed-in meter – Total
from grid positive active energy at 00:00 on the current day

10 Total energy Total energy yield of inverters

yield

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 73

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-4 Plant running information (with battery but without power meter)

No. Parameter Description

1 Active power Vector sum of the active power of inverters and Smart PCSs:
Positive value indicates that energy is generated through the
inverter and negative value indicates that energy is stored
through the rectifier.

2 Reactive power Vector sum of the reactive power of inverters and Smart PCSs:
Positive value indicates that power is transmitted to the grid and
negative value indicates that power is transmitted from the grid.

3 Energy yield of Total energy yield of inverters and Smart PCSs of the current day
current day

4 Today's power Total power supplied from the grid to inverters and Smart PCSs
supply from grid of the current day

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 74

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-5 Plant running information (with power meter and battery)

No. Parameter Description

1 Active power Vector sum of the active power of inverters and Smart PCSs:
Positive value indicates that energy is generated through the
inverter and negative value indicates that energy is stored
through the rectifier.

2 Reactive power Vector sum of the reactive power of inverters and Smart PCSs:
Positive value indicates that power is transmitted to the grid and
negative value indicates that power is transmitted from the grid.

3 Load power Vector sum of the active power and grid-tied active power

4 Grid-tied active Active power of the feed-in meter: Positive value indicates
power purchasing electricity and negative value indicates selling
electricity.

5 Grid-tied reactive Reactive power of the feed-in meter: Positive value indicates that
power power is transmitted from the grid and negative value indicates
that power is transmitted to the power grid.

6 Energy yield of Total energy yield of inverters and Smart PCSs of the current day
current day

7 Today's power Total power supplied from the grid to inverters and Smart PCSs
supply from grid of the current day

8 Daily Energy yield of current day + Daily supply from grid – Daily feed-
consumption in to grid – Today's power supply from grid

9 Daily supply Current total positive active energy of the feed-in meter – Total
from grid positive active energy at 00:00 on the current day

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 75

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.1.2 Icon Description

Icon Description Icon Description

Click the About icon to Click the Drop-down

query the WebUI icon to select a
version information. parameter or time.

Click the Exit icon to Alarms are classified

log out. into major, minor, and
warning ones. Click
the Alarm icon to
query an alarm.

Click the Increase/ Click the Start icon to

Decrease icon to start the device.
adjust time.

The Select icon Click the Stop icon to

indicates that a shut down the device.
parameter is selected.

The Select icon Click the Reset icon to

indicates that a reset the device.
parameter is not
selected. Click the icon
to select a parameter.

Hide icon and Display ● The inverter and

icon. Smart PCS are in
Running state.
● The device such as
the EMI, power
meter, slave
SmartLogger, or
MBUS is in Online
state.
● The PID is in
Running state.

The device is in The inverter and

Disconnection state. Smart PCS are in
If a device is in Loading state.
Disconnection state,
its parameters cannot
be set.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 76

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Icon Description Icon Description

● The inverter and Ascending order or

Smart PCS are in descending order icon.
abnormal grid-tied Click the icon to sort
power generation the items in ascending
state, such as or descending order
Initializing, Power- for the corresponding
off, and Idle. column.
● The PID device is in
Power-off, Idle or
other state in
which it is not
running properly.

Icons during - -
deployment, including
Cable connection
alarm, Add Devices,
Remove Devices,
Modify Device Info,
and Topology view.

6.1.3 WebUI Menus

Table 6-1 WebUI menus
First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function
Menu Menu

Deployment - - Supports the deployment wizard

Wizard function. You can set deployment
parameters, connect devices, and
connect to the management system
according to the wizard.

Overview Plant Running Info. - Queries plant information.

Active Alarm - Queries active alarms.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 77

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Plant Yield - Queries the energy generated,

consumed, purchased, and sold.
● Daily data (at hourly granularity)
can be stored for 30 days.
● Monthly data (at daily granularity)
can be stored for one year.
● Yearly data (at monthly
granularity) can be stored for 10
years.
● Historical data (at yearly
granularity) can be stored for 25
years.

Performance Data - Queries or exports performance data.

Device Running Info. - Queries or exports device running

information.

Mobile Data - Queries mobile network data.

Monitoring SmartLogger3000 Running Info. Queries the running information.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

Module(M1) Queries the expansion module.

About Queries the version and

communication information of the
master SmartLogger.

Inverter Running Info. Queries the running information.

NOTE
SUN2000 is displayed for
Active Alarm Queries active alarms.
V300R001C00.
Performance Queries or exports performance data.
Data

Energy Queries the energy yield.

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

Tracking Sets tracking system parameters.

System

Battery Queries or sets battery parameters.

Characteristic Sets the characteristic curve.

Curve

About Queries the version and

communication information.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

PCS Running Info. Queries the running information.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Energy Queries the energy yield.

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

Characteristic Sets the characteristic curve.

Curve

About Queries the version information.

CMU Running Info. Queries the running information.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Energy Queries the energy yield.

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries the version information.

ESU Running Info. Queries the running information.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries the version information.

ESC Running Info. Queries the running information.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries the version information.

ESR Running Info. Queries the running information.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Energy Queries the energy yield.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 79

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

Optimizer Queries the working status of the

status battery pack optimizer.

ESM Running Info. Queries the running information.

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries the version information.

HVAC Running Info. Queries the running information.

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries the version information.

TCU Running Info. Queries the running information.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

About Queries the version information.

MBUS Running Info. Queries the running information.

STA List ● Sets or synchronizes the baud rates

of MBUS communication devices.
● Exports the STA list.

Networking ● Sets running parameters.

Settings ● Manages the SN list.

About Queries the version and

communication information.

EMI Running Info. Queries the running information.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries communication information.

Meter Running Info. Queries the running information.

NOTE
Power Meter is displayed
Performance Queries or exports performance data.
for V300R001C00. Data

Running Sets the running parameters of the

Param. DL/T645 power meter.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

About Queries communication information.

PID Running Info. Queries the running information.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries the version and

communication information.

STS Teleindication Queries teleindication parameters.

Telemetering Queries telemetering parameters.

Telecontrol Sets telecontrol parameters.

Performance Queries or exports performance data.

Data

Running Sets running parameters.

Param.

About Queries communication information.

Custom Device, IEC103 Running Info. Queries the running information.

Device, and IEC104
Device Teleindication Queries teleindication parameters.

Telemetering Queries telemetering parameters.

Telecontrol Sets telecontrol parameters.

Teleadjust Sets teleadjust parameters.

Query Alarm History - Queries historical alarms.

Operation Log - Queries operation logs.

Export Data - Exports historical alarms, energy data,

operation logs, grid scheduling data,
and xDR data (black box data), or
exports all data.

Security Events - Queries security events.

Settings User Param. Date&Time Sets the date and time.

Plant Sets plant information.

Revenue Sets the revenue parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 81

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Save Period Sets the save period of performance

data.

Comm. Param. Wireless ● Sets parameters for the built-in

Network WLAN.
● Sets mobile data (4G/3G/2G)
parameters.

Wired Sets wired network parameters.

Network

RS485 Sets RS485 parameters.

Management ● Sets management system

System parameters.
● Uploads a security certificate.

Modbus TCP Sets Modbus TCP parameters.

IEC103 Sets IEC 103 parameters.

IEC104 Sets IEC 104 parameters.

FTP Sets FTP parameters.

Email Sets email parameters.

GOOSE Sets GOOSE parameters.

SPPC Sets SPPC parameters.

HTTPS Sets the listening port.

Power Adjustment Active Power Sets parameters for active power

Control control.

Reactive Sets parameters for reactive power

Power Control control.

Shutdown at Sets shutdown at high feed-in power.

high feed-in
power

Export Provides a wizard for export

Limitation limitation. You can set parameters by
following the wizard.

Smart Provides a wizard for smart reactive

Reactive power compensation. You can set
Power parameters by following the wizard.
Compensation

DRM Sets DRM parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 82

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Feed-in at Set parameters for feed-in at limited

limited current current.

Microgrid Control General ● Sets microgrid configuration

Configuration parameters.
● Sets load switch parameters.

Dispatch Sets dispatch control parameters.

Control

Black Start Performs black start.

EMS Control - Sets the working mode of battery

control.

Battery Settings Battery ● Sets the working mode of battery

Settings control.
● Set the power allocation
parameter.
● Sets automatic calibration
parameters.
● Sets the array end-of-charge SOC
and end-of-discharge SOC.

Battery Enables or disables array parameter

parameters synchronization.

Capacity Sets peak shaving and power boost

Control limit modes.

Remote Shutdown Dry Contact Sets parameters for remote shutdown

Remote over dry contacts.
Shutdown

NS Protection Sets remote shutdown parameters for

Remote NS protection.
Shutdown

DI DI Port Configures the DI port function.

Configuration

Startup Delay Set the startup delay time.

Alarm Output - Sets the mapping between inverter

alarms and DO ports.

Smart Tracking - Sets the parameters related to the

Algorithm smart tracking algorithm.

Feature Parameters - ● Sets array MPPT parameters.

● Sets the start time of the PCS
insulation resistance detection.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Other Parameters Cooperate Sets the system type.

Mode
Parameters

Other ● Enables or disables RS485 upgrade

Parameters rate adaptation.
● Enables or disables data
forwarding for unconnected
devices.
● Sets the IEC 104 data push period.
● Enables or disables AI1 SPD alarm
detection.
● Enables or disables STS
overtemperature protection.
● Sets the reset control port of the
external router.
● Enables or disables mobile
network sharing.
● Sets a third-party server.
● Sets target network.
● Enables or disables SSH.
● Sets collection interval of the built-
in MBUS.
● Enables or disables no response
from disconnected devices.
● Enables or disables local
maintenance through WAN port.
● Sets battery log printout interval.
● Enables or disables load tracking.
● Enables or disables battery export
limitation.
● Sets maximum grid power during
battery discharge.
● Sets adjustment deadband.
● Enables or disables DER-AVM
access.
● Sets the system type.
● Enables or disables power
protection of the MCCB in the LV
panel of the STS.
● Enables or disables mixed-flow fan
control.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 84

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

Maintenance Firmware Upgrade - Upgrades the firmware of the

SmartLogger, inverter, MBUS, or PID.

Product Information - Queries product information.

Security Settings - ● Changes the user password.

● Sets the automatic logout time.
● Uploads a WebUI security
certificate.
● Updates the key.
● Sets the function of locking out a
user upon login failures.
● Sets the certificate alarm time.
● Uploads a module security
certificate.
● Enables or disables communication
using an expired module
certificate.
● Uploads a southbound device
security certificate.
● Sets web TLS1.0, 1.1.
● Enables or disables intrusion
detection.
● Starts or stops Modbus remote
communication networking.
● Enables or disables anti-rollback.

System Maint. - ● Resets the system.

● Restores factory settings.
● Clears data.
● Exports all configuration files.
● Imports all configuration files.
● Clears cache.
● Clears user data.

Device Log - Exports device logs.

Onsite Test Inspection Starts the health check of inverters.

Spot-check Starts the spot-check of inverters.

Alarm Test Simulates or clears alarms of

inverters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 85

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

First-Level Second-Level Menu Third-Level Function

Menu Menu

License Management - ● Views the license information.

● Exports the license application file.
● Loads or revokes a license.

User Management - Add, modify, or delete a user.

Device Mgmt. Connect ● Adds or removes a device.

Device ● Imports or exports configurations.

SmartModule ● Removes the SmartModule.

● Sets the authentication password.

Device List ● Modifies device information.

● Imports or exports device
information.

Export Param. Exports device parameters.

Clear Alarm Clears device alarms.

Data Re- Re-collects historical performance

collection data and energy yield of devices.

Adjust total Adjusts the total energy yield.

energy yield

Force Start Sends a force start command to all

devices in the array.

Transparent Data - Uploads the file for transparent data

Transmission transmission.

Communication records - Starts or exports communication

records.

NOTE

The third-level menu varies with the device model and grid code. The displayed menu may
vary.

6.2 Device Commissioning

Prerequisites
● Device and cable installation has been checked according to the specifications
and requirements of PV and energy storage plants.
● Devices in the PV and energy storage plants and SmartLogger are powered
on.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

● You have obtained the IP address of the SmartLogger as well as the user
name and password used for logging in to the WebUI.

Context
After installing or replacing a device or SmartLogger, you need to set device
parameters and add the device.

6.2.1 Preparations and WebUI Login

Prerequisites
● The operating system of Windows 7 or later is supported.
● Browser: Chrome 52, Firefox 58, or Internet Explorer 9, or a later version is
recommended.
● It is recommended that a maximum of two users log in to the WebUI at the
same time.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the network cable between the network port of the PC and the WAN or
LAN port of the SmartLogger. It is recommended that the PC be connected to the
LAN port of the SmartLogger.

Step 2 Set the IP address for the PC on the same network segment as the SmartLogger IP
address.

Connected Item SmartLogger Example PC

Port Default Value Setting

LAN port IP address 192.168.8.10 192.168.8.11

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 192.168.8.1 192.168.8.1

WAN port IP address 192.168.0.10 192.168.0.11

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Default gateway 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.1

NOTE

● When the IP address of the WAN port is in the network segment from 192.168.8.1 to
192.168.8.255, set the default gateway to 192.168.8.1 and the IP address of the LAN
port to 192.168.3.10. If the connected port is a LAN port, you need to adjust the
network configuration of the PC.
● It is recommended that the PC be connected to the LAN port of the SmartLogger or the
GE port of the SmartModule. When the PC is connected to the GE port of the
SmartModule, adjust the network configuration of the PC to the configuration mode
when the PC is connected to the LAN port of the SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 87

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Step 3 Set LAN parameters.

NOTICE

● If the SmartLogger is connected to a LAN and a proxy server has been

configured, you need to cancel the proxy server configurations.
● If the SmartLogger is connected to the Internet and the PC is connected to the
LAN, do not cancel the proxy server configurations.

1. Open Internet Explorer.

2. Choose Tools > Internet Options.
3. Click the Connections tab and then click LAN settings.
4. Clear Use a proxy server for your LAN.

Figure 6-6 LAN settings

5. Click OK.
Step 4 Log in to the SmartLogger WebUI.
1. In the address box of a browser, enter https://XX.XX.XX.XX (XX.XX.XX.XX is
the IP address of the SmartLogger) and press Enter. The login page is
displayed.
If you log in to the WebUI for the first time, a security risk warning is
displayed. Click Continue to this website to log in to the WebUI.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 88

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

– It is recommended that users use their own certificates. If the certificate is not
replaced, the security risk warning will be displayed during each login.
– After logging in to the WebUI, you can import a certificate under Maintenance >
Security Settings > Network Security Certificate.
– The imported security certificate needs to be bound to the SmartLogger IP address.
Otherwise, the security risk warning will still be displayed during login.
– If an error message "ERR_INSUFFICIENT_RESOURCES" is displayed for the browser
during login, the browser resources are insufficient. Clear the cache and restart the
browser.
– If an error message "ERR_CONNECTION_TIMED_OUT" is displayed for the browser
during login, perform the following troubleshooting operations:

▪ Check whether the browser proxy is abnormal. If yes, set the browser proxy
according to step 3.

▪ Check whether the IP address of another device conflicts with that of the
SmartLogger. If yes, assign a new IP address.

Figure 6-7 Security risk warning

2. Select a desired language.

3. Select User Name and enter Password according to the following table, and
then click Log In.
If... Then...

On the login page, 1. Enter the initial password Changeme in

User Name is Password and click Log In.
admin by default. 2. Change the initial password as prompted and use
the admin user name and new password to log in
again.

On the login page, Select installer in User Name, set the login
User Name is password as prompted, and click Log In.
empty by default.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 89

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

– Update the SmartLogger software as required.

– To ensure account security, protect the password by changing it periodically, and
keep it secure. Your password might be stolen or cracked if it is left unchanged for
extended periods. If you lose the password, the device must be restored to its
factory settings. In these cases, the Company shall not be liable for any loss caused
to the plant.
– You will be locked out for 10 minutes after five consecutive failed password
attempts in 5 minutes.
– A dialog box with recent login information is displayed after login. Click OK.
– If the password of a non-administrator account is lost, you must reset the
password using an administrator account. The administrator resets the password
and enters the initial password. The non-administrator user logs in to the system
using the initial password provided by the administrator. After the login, the user is
forced to change the password.
– If the password of an administrator account is lost, hold down the RST button on
the SmartLogger for 10–20s to enter the safe mode. After the SmartLogger enters
the safe mode, the device parameter settings are retained. Personal privacy and
sensitive data, including login passwords and email addresses, will be deleted.
SmartLogger V300R023C00 and later versions support this function.
4. Choose Monitoring > Logger(Local) > About to view the SmartLogger
software version and check whether software upgrade is needed.
5. (Optional) To upgrade the SmartLogger software version, contact the
Company's engineers to obtain the upgrade package and guide and complete
the upgrade accordingly.
NOTE

– After the software upgrade is complete, the SmartLogger automatically restarts.

Log in to the SmartLogger WebUI again 3 minutes later.
– If the SmartLogger is upgraded from V300R001C00 to V800R021C00, the original
administrator admin becomes an advanced user, and the login password remains
unchanged. If administrator rights are required, log in to the SmartLogger as
installer. The password is the same as that for logging in to the mobile app. If the
SmartLogger is upgraded from V800R021C00 to V300R023C00, the login
passwords of the advanced user admin and administrator installer remain
unchanged.
– If the SmartLogger is upgraded from V300R001C00 to V300R023C00, the original
administrator admin becomes an advanced user, and the login password remains
unchanged. If administrator rights are required, log in to the SmartLogger as
installer and set the login password as prompted.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If any page is blank or a menu cannot be accessed after you log in to the WebUI,
clear the cache, refresh the page, or log in again.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 90

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.2.2 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard

(V300R001C00)

Context
The deployment wizard allows you to set basic SmartLogger parameters, connect
Huawei devices, power meters, and EMIs, configure Huawei NMS and third-party
NMS, and implement interworking with third-party devices.

After the SmartModule communicates with the SmartLogger properly, the

SmartLogger automatically identifies the SmartModule. The device name of the
SmartModule is Module(M1), and the corresponding port is M1. port.

Procedure
Step 1 Log in as user admin to access the deployment wizard page.

Step 2 Set parameters as prompted. For details, click Help on the page.
NOTE

During parameter setting, click Previous, Next, or Skip as required.

Figure 6-8 Deployment wizard

Step 3 After setting parameters, click Finish.

----End

6.2.3 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard

(V800R021C10)

Context
The deployment wizard allows you to set basic SmartLogger parameters, connect
Huawei devices, power meters, and EMIs, configure Smart PCS, Huawei NMS, and
third-party NMS, and implement interworking with third-party devices.

After the SmartModule communicates with the SmartLogger properly, the

SmartLogger automatically identifies the SmartModule. The device name of the
SmartModule is Module(M1), and the corresponding port is M1. port.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 91

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the WebUI and access the deployment wizard page.
Step 2 Set corresponding parameters as prompted. For details, see Help on the page.
NOTE

During parameter setting, click Previous, Next, or Skip as required.

1. Set basic parameters.

Figure 6-9 Setting basic parameters

2. After Huawei devices are connected, click Search for Device to check the
cable connections and allocate addresses.

Figure 6-10 Searching for devices

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 92

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

– During the process of Search for Device, do not perform upgrade operations (such
as upgrading through the app, management system, or WebUI).
– When you click Search for Device, cable connections (DC and AC) will be checked
before device search (not applicable to third-party devices), and device addresses
will be automatically allocated.
– After the cable connection check and device search are complete, if a cable

connection alarm is generated, you can click the alarm icon to view the
corresponding alarm information.
– If an alarm is generated when the cable connection check fails, click the alarm icon

to view the alarm cause and handling suggestions. After the fault is rectified,
check the cable connections again.

– After the cable connection check and device search are complete, click to view
the corresponding topology information.
– After a device is added or deleted, you need to click Search for Device again in
Deployment Wizard. Otherwise, the system topology will not be updated.
3. Connect to power meters.

Figure 6-11 Setting power meter parameters

4. Connect to EMIs.

Figure 6-12 Setting EMI parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

5. Set the battery working mode for battery control.

Figure 6-13 Working modes

6. Connect to the Huawei NMS.

Figure 6-14 Huawei NMS

7. Connect to a third-party NMS, select IEC104.

Figure 6-15 Third-party NMS

8. Connect to third-party devices.

Figure 6-16 Third-party devices

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

9. Complete the configuration.

Figure 6-17 Completing the configuration

----End

6.2.4 Commissioning Using Deployment Wizard (V300R023

and Later Versions)
Context
The deployment wizard allows you to set basic SmartLogger parameters, connect
devices, power meters, and EMIs, configure battery control, management system,
and third-party management system, third-party devices, and microgrid
parameters.
After the SmartModule communicates with the SmartLogger properly, the
SmartLogger automatically identifies the SmartModule. The device name of the
SmartModule is Module(M1), and the corresponding port is M1.port.

Procedure
NOTE

● Microgrid is displayed only when the SmartLogger model is SmartLogger3000.

● During parameter setting, click Previous, Next, or Skip as required. For details, see Help
on the page.

Step 1 Click Deployment Wizard and set basic parameters.

● Set basic parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-18 Setting basic parameters

● Select a communication mode based on the site requirements.

Step 2 Connect devices.
● Set the startup authorization code of the ESS. Enter the startup authorization
code and click to complete the startup authorization for the ESS.
Otherwise, the ESS cannot be started. Contact the device vendor or its
authorized supervision service provider to apply for a startup authorization
code through the Power Partner app. This function is supported in
SmartLogger V300R024C00 and later versions, which shall be matched with
the version of the ESS software.
– C&I scenario: LUNA2000B V100R023C00SPC120 and later versions.
– Utility-scale scenario: LUNA2000C V100R023C00SPC120 and later
versions.
● Click Search for Device to search for devices.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 96

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-19 Searching for devices

NOTE

– During the process of Search for Device, do not perform upgrade operations (such
as upgrading through the app, management system, or WebUI).
– When you click Search for Device, cable connections will be checked before device
search (not applicable to third-party devices), and device addresses will be
automatically allocated. For the LUNA2000-4472-2S, device search and cable
connection check are performed separately. Click Search for Device to start device
search (not applicable to third-party devices) and address allocation. After the
device search is complete, click Wiring inspection to check cable connections.
– After the cable connection check is complete, if a cable connection alarm is

generated, you can click the alarm icon to view the corresponding alarm
information.
– If an alarm is generated when the cable connection check fails, click the alarm icon

to view the alarm cause and handling suggestions. After the fault is rectified,
check the cable connections again.
– If the cable connection check is complete and Are you sure you want to continue
searching for devices? is displayed, the cable connection check is successful. If you
click Yes and Failed to allocate the address. Try again. is displayed:

▪ In the ESS-only scenario, click OK and go to the next step. You do not need to
perform Search for Device.

▪ In the PV-only or PV+ESS scenario, wait for 1 minute, choose Maintenance >
Device Mgmt. > Connect Device, and click Auto Assign Address to allocate
communication addresses again. You do not need perform Search for Device
again.

– After the cable connection check and device search are complete, click to view
the corresponding topology information.
– After a device is added or deleted, you need to click Search for Device again in
Deployment Wizard. Otherwise, the system topology will not be updated.
● Set parameters such as Grid Code and Working mode.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-2 Parameter settings after device search (for versions earlier than
SmartLogger V300R023C10)
Parameter Description

Running under Grid connection Set this parameter only for the PCS,
state but not for the inverter.
– In the on-grid scenario, set this
parameter to On-grid(PQ).
– In the off-grid scenario, set this
parameter to Off-grid(VSG).

Microgrid compatibility – In the on-grid scenario, set this

parameter to Disable.
– In the off-grid scenario, set this
parameter to Enable.

Grid Code Set this parameter based on the grid

code of the country or region where
the devices are used.

NOTICE

For PCSs on the same DC bus, ensure that the settings of Running under Grid
connection state and Microgrid compatibility are the same.

Table 6-3 Parameter settings after device search (SmartLogger V300R023C10

and later versions)
Parameter Description Remarks

Scenario under – In the on-grid scenario, You do not need to

Arrays Operation set this parameter to On- set this parameter
Scenario grid. in industry
– In the off-grid scenario, cooperation mode.
set this parameter to Off-
grid.
– In the on/off-grid
switching scenario, set this
parameter to On/Off-
grid.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 98

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Standby mode under When there is no scheduling, Set this parameter

The subarray hot the Smart PCS enters the hot based on site
standby mode standby mode based on the requirements in
battery status to reduce SmartLogger
system loss. V300R023C10 and
– Zero-power operation: later versions.
no hot standby
– Seam hot standby: After
the Smart PCS enters the
hot standby mode, the
relay on the AC side will
be disconnected.
– Seamless hot standby:
After the Smart PCS
enters the hot standby
mode, the relay on the AC
side will not be
disconnected. The reactive
power of the ports needs
to be supplemented.

Insulation resistance Specifies whether to enable -

detection under insulation resistance
Periodic insulation detection.
resistance test

Detection start time Specifies the start time for This parameter is
under Periodic the insulation resistance displayed when
insulation resistance detection function. Periodic insulation
test resistance test is
set to Enable.
Detection interval Specifies the insulation
under Periodic resistance detection interval.
insulation resistance
test

Grid Code Set the grid code of the -

country or region where the
devices are used.

Working mode under – If Scenario is set to On- This parameter

Basic parameters grid, set this parameter to needs to be set
PQ or VSG. only for the PCS.
– If Scenario is set to Off-
grid, set this parameter to
VSG.
– If Scenario is set to On/
Off-grid, set this
parameter to PQ or VSG.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Microgrid This setting prevents the -

compatibility under power grid voltage and
Basic parameters frequency from increasing
when the system power is
high. Set this parameter
based on site requirements.

Automatic switching Specifies whether to enable -

of the working mode automatic switching between
under Basic working modes.
parameters

Charge/discharge Set Charge/discharge rate. -

rate under Power Other parameters under
Baseline Power Baseline will be
automatically generated.

Active power Set the lower limit of the Active power

baseline (kW) under maximum apparent power, baseline shall be
Power Baseline which is also used as the smaller than
baseline for active power Apparent power
scheduling. baseline.

Apparent power Set the upper limit of the -

baseline (kVA) under maximum active power,
Power Baseline which is also used as the
baseline for reactive power
scheduling.

Maximum Overload Set the maximum overload Set this parameter

Active Power (kW) active power for grid based on site
under Power forming. requirements in
Baseline SmartLogger
V300R024C10 and
Maximum Overload Set the maximum overload later versions.
Apparent Power apparent power for grid
(kVA) under Power forming.
Baseline

Rated power Set the rated capacity of the -

reference under device.
Power Baseline

NOTICE

For PCSs on the same DC bus, ensure that the settings of Working mode and
Microgrid compatibility under Basic parameters are the same.

● Load a license.
For details about how to load a license, see 7.4.6 License Management.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 100

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Step 3 Connect to power meters.

Figure 6-20 Setting meter parameters

Step 4 Connect to EMIs.

Figure 6-21 Setting EMI parameters

Step 5 Configure battery settings. This step is required only for the energy storage
scenarios.
● Set the battery control working mode.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 101

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-22 Working mode

Table 6-4 Battery control working modes

Working Mode Mode Description

No control The SmartLogger directly delivers the external

scheduling power limit. No other power
scheduling control is performed. The power is
automatically controlled by the device.

Maximum self- – This mode applies to areas where the

consumption electricity price is high, or areas where the FIT
subsidy is low or unavailable. The PV+ESS
system generates sufficient PV power for loads
and uses the surplus PV power to charge the
ESS (if the PV power is insufficient for loads,
the TOU mode is recommended).
– PV power is preferentially supplied to loads,
and the surplus power is used to charge the
ESS. If the ESS is fully charged or is being
charged at full power, the surplus power is fed
to the grid. When PV power is insufficient or
no PV power can be generated at night, the
ESS discharges power to loads. This improves
the self-consumption rate and energy self-
sufficiency rate, and reduces electricity costs.
The grid cannot charge the ESS but can supply
power to loads.
– The SmartLogger performs ESS scheduling
based on the external scheduling power limit
and the preceding policies.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 102

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

Fully fed to grid – This parameter applies only to distributed

scenarios.
– This mode maximizes the PV energy fed to the
grid. When the PV output power in the
daytime is greater than the maximum output
capacity of the inverter, the surplus PV power
is used to charge the ESS. When the PV output
power is less than the maximum output
capacity of the inverter, the ESS discharges
energy to the inverter to maximize the energy
fed from the inverter to the grid. The grid
cannot charge the ESS.
– The SmartLogger directly delivers the external
scheduling power limit.
NOTE
Fully fed to grid is displayed only in distributed energy
storage scenarios.

TOU – It is applicable to the PV+ESS system and ESS-

only system where peak to valley electricity
prices are different and power meters are
available.
– You can manually set the charge and discharge
time segments. For example, if you set the low
electricity price period at night as the charge
time, the system charges the batteries at the
maximum power during the charge time. If
you set the high electricity price period as the
discharge time, batteries can discharge only
during the discharge time based on the actual
load power, reducing electricity costs.
– Click Add to set the charge and discharge time
segments. A maximum of 14 time segments
can be set. During the charge time, the grid
can charge the batteries. During the discharge
time, the batteries can supply power to the
loads. In other time segments, the batteries do
not discharge. The PV system and grid supply
power to loads, and the PV system can charge
the batteries.
– In some countries, the grid is not allowed to
charge batteries. In such case, this mode
cannot be used.
– The SmartLogger performs ESS scheduling
based on the external scheduling power limit
and the preceding policies.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

TOU (fixed power)[1] – It is applicable to the PV+ESS system and ESS-

only system where peak to valley electricity
prices are different and power meters are
unavailable.
– You can manually set the charge and discharge
time segments. For example, if you set the low
electricity price period at night as the charge
time, the system charges the batteries at the
fixed power during the charge time. If you set
the high electricity price period as the
discharge time, batteries can discharge only
during the discharge time at the fixed power,
reducing electricity costs.
– Click Add to set the charge and discharge time
segments. A maximum of 14 time segments
can be set. During the charge time, the grid
can charge the batteries. During the discharge
time, the batteries can supply power to the
loads. In other time segments, the batteries do
not discharge and are not charged.
– In some countries, the grid is not allowed to
charge batteries. In such case, this mode
cannot be used.
– The SmartLogger performs ESS scheduling
based on the external scheduling power limit
and the preceding policies.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 104

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

Charge/Discharge – This mode applies to utility-scale plant

based on grid scheduling scenarios where the northbound
dispatch controller delivers active power scheduling
commands.
– The purpose of scheduled discharge is to meet
the active power scheduling target value at the
grid access point. PV energy is preferred. If the
generated PV energy is insufficient, the
batteries discharge and the energy is fed to the
grid based on the active power scheduling
target value. If the generated PV energy is
sufficient, the energy is fed to the grid based
on the active power scheduling target value,
and the surplus PV energy is used to charge
the batteries.
– The purpose of scheduled charge is to meet
the active power scheduling target value at the
grid access point. If the battery charge power
is insufficient or the Smart PCS limits the
power, the grid charges the batteries with the
maximum capability. If the batteries are not
fully charged when the scheduling target value
is met, the PV power is used to charge the
batteries.

Custom[2] – This mode applies to utility-scale plant (with

ESSs) scheduling scenarios. Customers can
control the battery discharge power.
– Non-discharge period: The batteries cannot
discharge and can be charged based on the
scheduling command.
– Discharge period: If Adaptive discharge
power is enabled, the control logic is the same
as that for scheduled charge and discharge.
The battery charge and discharge power is
determined by the upper-layer scheduling
command. If Adaptive discharge power is
disabled, the battery discharge power is fixed
to the reference value set by the customer. In
this case, the upper-layer scheduling command
controls only the PV inverters but not the
batteries.

Note [1]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC150

and later versions.
Note [2]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC120
and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-5 Running parameters in each battery control working mode

Working Mode Parameter Description

Maximum self- Active power Set the grid power

consumption threshold of grid threshold at the grid
during battery connection point for loads
discharge when the load power is
greater than the PV power.

Adjustment deadband Set the precision of the

grid power at the grid
connection point. This
parameter affects the
power value range at the
grid connection point. If
the actual grid power
threshold at the grid
connection point is within
this range, i.e. [Active
power threshold of grid
during battery discharge –
Adjustment deadband,
Maximum grid power
during battery discharge +
Adjustment deadband],
the grid power
requirement at the grid
connection point is met.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

TOU Preferred use of – Charge: When the PV

surplus PV power power is greater than
the load power, the
surplus PV energy is
used to charge the
batteries. After the
maximum charge
power is reached or the
batteries are fully
charged, the surplus PV
energy is fed to the
grid.
– Fed to grid: When the
PV power is greater
than the load power,
the surplus PV energy is
preferentially fed to the
grid. When the
maximum output
power of the device is
reached, the surplus
energy is used to
charge the batteries.
This setting is
applicable to the
scenario where the FIT
is higher than the
electricity price. The
grid cannot charge the
batteries.

Maximum power for Set the maximum power

charging batteries at which the grid charges
from grid the batteries.

Active power Set the grid power

threshold of grid threshold at the grid
during battery connection point for loads
discharge when the load power is
greater than the PV power.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 107

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

Adjustment deadband Set the precision of the

grid power at the grid
connection point. This
parameter affects the
power value range at the
grid connection point. If
the actual grid power
threshold at the grid
connection point is within
this range, i.e. [Active
power threshold of grid
during battery discharge –
Adjustment deadband,
Maximum grid power
during battery discharge +
Adjustment deadband],
the grid power
requirement at the grid
connection point is met.

Start time Set the start time and end

time of charge and
End time discharge. A maximum of
Charge/Discharge 14 time segments can be
set. You can set a cycle by
Repeat week by clicking the
buttons corresponding to
Mon. through Sun. in the
Repeat box. The buttons
are blue by default,
indicating being selected.
After you click it, the
button turns gray.

TOU (fixed power) Start time Set the start time, end
time, and power of charge
End time and discharge. A
Charge/Discharge maximum of 14 time
segments can be set. You
Charge/Discharge can set a cycle by week by
power (kW) clicking the buttons
corresponding to Mon.
Repeat through Sun. in the
Repeat box. The buttons
are blue by default,
indicating being selected.
After you click it, the
button turns gray.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 108

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

Charge/Discharge Array end-of-charge/ The default value is

based on grid discharge SOC Disable. The default value
dispatch derating is recommended. Set this
parameter as required.
After this parameter is
enabled, the SmartLogger
will be derated according
to a certain slope to
prevent sudden power
changes of arrays at the
cut-off SOC point.

Control charge/ The default value is

discharge time Disable. The default value
window is recommended. Set this
parameter as required. You
can set the time segment
for charge forbidden,
discharge forbidden,
charge, and discharge only
after the control charge/
discharge time window is
enabled.

Start time Set the start time, end

time, and power of charge
End time forbidden, discharge
Charge/Discharge forbidden, charge, and
discharge. A maximum of
Charge/Discharge 14 time segments can be
power (kW) set. You can set a cycle by
week by clicking the
Repeat buttons corresponding to
Mon. through Sun. in the
Repeat box. The buttons
are blue by default,
indicating being selected.
After you click it, the
button turns gray.

Protection against The default value is

communication Disable. The default value
disconnection is recommended. Set this
parameter as required.
NOTE
In the utility-scale ESS low-
voltage coupling scenario,
the PV+ESS capacity exceeds
the transformer station
capacity. You are advised to
set this parameter to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

Custom ESS discharge start Set the start time of

time battery discharge. During
the period from the start
time to the end time, the
batteries can be charged
and can discharge. Beyond
the period, the batteries
cannot discharge and can
only be charged.

ESS discharge end Set the end time of

time battery discharge. During
the period from the start
time to the end time, the
batteries can be charged
and can discharge. Beyond
the period, the batteries
cannot discharge and can
only be charged.

Adaptive discharge – Enable: PV power

power supply is preferred. If
the PV power is
insufficient, the
batteries supply power
to loads; if the PV
power is sufficient, the
system outputs at the
target value and the
surplus PV power is
used to charge the
batteries.
– Disable: Batteries
discharge based on the
discharge power set on
the GUI.

Reference discharge Set the battery discharge

power power during the
discharge period.

Note [1]: This parameter is added in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC120

and later versions. This parameter is displayed and needs to be set only
when the Smart PCS is connected.

● Set the power allocation parameter. You can set this parameter in
SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC550 and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 110

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Difference The default value is 5%. The default value is

threshold for recommended. Set this parameter as required. When
starting array SOC the SOC difference between racks in the array is
rapid equilibrium greater than the value of Difference threshold for
starting array SOC rapid equilibrium, the rapid
equilibrium algorithm is enabled.

● Set the scheduling mode. The scheduling mode applies only to the C&I
scenario and is displayed when the C&I ESS is connected. You can set this
parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC550 and later versions.
Parameter Description

Scheduling Mode The default value is Maximize energy.

– Maximize energy. If ESSs with different rates are
used together in C&I scenarios, the power is
allocated based on the minimum rate.
– Maximize power. If ESSs with different rates are
used together in C&I scenarios, the power is
allocated based on the maximum power.

● Set the automatic calibration functions.

Parameter Description

Automatic SOC calibration – If this parameter is set to Enable,

automatic charge and discharge
calibration is allowed for battery
racks. The ESS periodically
calibrates the SOC rack by rack.
During the calibration, the end-
of-charge SOC and end-of-
discharge SOC settings will be
overridden so that the ESS can be
fully charged or discharged.
– If this parameter is set to
Disable, automatic charge and
discharge calibration is not
allowed for battery racks.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Automatic SOC calibration Set the automatic SOC calibration

interval[1] interval. This parameter is displayed
when Automatic SOC calibration is
set to Enable.
If the battery SOC stays in the range
of 10% to 99% most of the time, for
example, in the microgrid scenario,
the recommended online calibration
interval is less than or equal to 7
days.
If the battery SOC stays in the range
of 40% to 60% most of the time, for
example, in the frequency regulation
scenario, the recommended online
calibration interval is less than or
equal to 30 days.
If the battery SOC stays below 10%
or at 100% most of the time, for
example, in the peak shaving
scenario, the recommended online
calibration interval is less than or
equal to 180 days.

Automatic SOH calibration – If this parameter is set to Enable,

the ESS periodically calibrates the
SOH rack by rack. During the
calibration, the end-of-charge
SOC and end-of-discharge SOC
settings will be overridden so that
the ESS can be fully charged and
discharged. Then, the battery
capacity will be calculated. The
charge and discharge response
will be affected during the
calibration. Suggestion: During
SOH calibration, after the system
is fully charged, maintain the
charge command for 30 to 60
minutes. After the discharge is
complete, maintain the discharge
command for 30 to 60 minutes.
– If this parameter is set to
Disable, automatic SOH
calibration is not allowed for
battery racks.

Note [1]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC172

and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

● Set the array end-of-charge SOC and end-of-discharge SOC. You can set these
parameters in SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC500 and later versions.

Parameter Description

Array end-of- The default value is 100%. The default value is

charge SOC recommended. Set this parameter as required.

Array end-of- The default value is 5%. The default value is

discharge SOC recommended. Set this parameter as required.

● Configure INV/PCS communication exception protection.

Parameter Description

Protection against communication Specifies whether to enable

disconnection protection against communication
disconnection.

● Set PCS insulation resistance detection.

Table 6-6 Setting parameters related to PCS insulation resistance detection

Parameter Description

Detection start Specifies the start time for the PCS insulation resistance
time[1] detection function.

Note [1]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC153

and later versions.

Step 6 Configure the management system.

Figure 6-23 Management system

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 113

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Step 7 For third-party NMS access, select a protocol based on the actual third-party NMS
protocol.
● If the SmartLogger connects to a third-party management system over
Modbus TCP, set Modbus TCP parameters and click Next.

Figure 6-24 Setting Modbus TCP parameters

Param Description Remarks

eter

Link To use this function, set this parameter to -

setting Enable(Limited) or Enable(Unlimited).
– If this parameter is set to
Enable(Limited), the SmartLogger can
connect to a maximum of five preset
third-party management systems.
– If this parameter is set to
Enable(Unlimited), the SmartLogger
can connect to a maximum of five third-
party management systems with valid
IP addresses.

Client Set this parameter based on the IP address – This parameter is

N IP of the third-party management system. displayed when
Addres Link setting is
s set to
Enable(Limited)
.
– N is 1, 2, 3, 4, or
5.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Param Description Remarks

eter

Addres The value can be Communication address – This parameter is

s mode or Logical address. displayed when
If the communications address of the Link setting is
device connected to the SmartLogger is set to
unique, you are advised to select Enable(Limited)
Communication address. In other cases, or
you must select Logical address. Enable(Unlimite
d).
Logger Set this parameter to the communications – The fast
address address of the SmartLogger. scheduling
Fast – Set this parameter to Enable to enable function of the
schedul the fast scheduling function of the Modbus TCP
ing SmartLogger Modbus TCP interface. interface is
mutually
– Set this parameter to Disable to disable exclusive with
the fast scheduling function of the the GOOSE fast
SmartLogger Modbus TCP interface. scheduling
function. The fast
scheduling
function of only
one protocol
takes effect at a
time.

● If the SmartLogger connects to a third-party management system over

Modbus RTU, set Modbus RTU parameters and click Next.

Figure 6-25 Setting Modbus RTU parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Port Set the connected COM port based on the actual cable
connections.

Baud rate Set this parameter based on the baud rate of the connected
device.
The value can be 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 115200.

Parity Set this parameter based on the parity mode of the

connected device.
The value can be None, Odd parity, or Even parity.

Stop Bit Set this parameter based on the stop bit of the connected
device.
The value can be 1 or 2.

NOTE

If IEC104 or GOOSE needs to be used to connect to a third-party management system,

choose Settings > Comm. Param. > IEC104 or GOOSE after completing the
deployment wizard.

Step 8 Connect to third-party devices.

Figure 6-26 Third-party devices

Step 9 If the microgrid control function is implemented by the SmartLogger, perform this
step. Otherwise, skip this step.
1. Select Yes or No in the Do you want to connect the relay protection
device? dialog box based on the actual situation. If a relay protection device
is connected, set Yes and set the relay protection device parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-7 Relay protection device parameters

Parameter Description

Port Set the COM port connected to

Relay protection device based on
the actual cable connections.

Baud rate Set the baud rate, parity, stop bit,

and address of Relay protection
Parity device to be consistent with the
Stop Bit communications parameters of the
relay protection device.
Address

Device Type Set this parameter to Relay

protection device.

Device model Set this parameter to Easergy

P3U30.

2. Set microgrid parameters.

Figure 6-27 Microgrid

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-8 Microgrid parameters

Parameter Description Remarks

MGCC Mode The default value is Disable. When MGCC Mode

under – Enable: The MGCC mode is is enabled, Modbus
Microgrid enabled. TCP, IEC 104, and
GOOSE settings are
– Disable: The MGCC mode is disabled and the
disabled. SmartLogger does
not respond to
scheduling
commands from the
EMS. (Set Working
mode to Charge/
Discharge based on
grid dispatch on the
Battery Control tab
page and set Active
power control mode
to Remote
communication
scheduling on the
Power Adjustment
tab page.) Enable
this function only
when the EMS is not
required. If you
forcibly enable both
the MGCC mode and
the Modbus TCP, IEC
104, and GOOSE
settings, the
microgrid may be
unstable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 118

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Microgrid – Off-grid: In the off-grid This parameter is

scenario under scenario, set this parameter to displayed when
Microgrid Off-grid. MGCC Mode is set to
– On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG): Enable.
In the on/off-grid (PQ/VSG) – If Microgrid
scenario, set this parameter to scenario is set to
On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG). Off-grid, Scenario
– On-grid/Off-grid (VSG): In under Arrays
the on/off-grid (VSG) scenario, Operation
set this parameter to On-grid/ Scenario shall be
Off-grid (VSG) only after the set to Off-grid.
relay protection device is – If Microgrid
successfully connected. scenario is set to
On-grid/Off-grid
(PQ/VSG) or On-
grid/Off-grid
(VSG), Scenario
under Arrays
Operation
Scenario shall be
set to On/Off-
grid.

– If Microgrid scenario is set to On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG), refer to the

following parameter description.

Parameter Description

Switch status Set these parameters based on the actual cable

port under On/ connections.
Off-grid switch DI port status can be set to Open or Close. If the
DI port status actual status of the on/off-grid switch is
under On/Off-grid inconsistent with the displayed status, change the
switch setting of DI port status.

Switch-off control Set the DO port for turning off the on/off-grid
port under On/ switch.
Off-grid switch

Switch-on control Set the DO port for turning on the on/off-grid

port under On/ switch.
Off-grid switch

DI port under Grid Set the DI port to which the the grid failure
Failure Detection detection device is connected and the DI port
status.
DI port status
under Grid Failure
Detection

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 119

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

On/Off-grid
switching mode
▪ No control: All the operations involved in the
on/off-grid switching are manually performed.
under On/Off-grid
If the customer needs to repair the equipment,
switching
you are advised to set this parameter to No
control.

▪ Auto: The on/off-grid switching will be

performed automatically based on the status
of the mains power. When you set On/Off-grid
switching mode to this mode, an immediate
on/off-grid switching may be triggered,
depending on the status of the mains power.

▪ Manual: You need to manually turn on or off

the on/off-grid switch at the grid connection
point.

– If Microgrid scenario is set to On-grid/Off-grid (VSG), refer to the

following parameter description.
Parameter Description

Genset start/stop control

port under Genset
▪ If the genset is controlled by the
SmartLogger, set the DO port that
controls genset startup and shutdown
based on the actual cable connections.

▪ If the genset is controlled by the ATS,

set this parameter to No.

Auto switching to on-

grid under Automatic
▪ Enable: Enable the function of
automatic switching from off-grid to
Off-grid to On-grid
on-grid state.
Switching
▪ Disable: Disable the function of
automatic switching from off-grid to
on-grid.

– If Microgrid scenario is set to Off-grid, refer to the following parameter

description.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Switch status Set these parameters based on the actual cable

port under connections. If you need to modify the parameters
Load Switch after the settings are submitted, the automatic
control function of the load switch may fail. This
DI port status function can be restored only after the SmartLogger
under Load is restarted or the black start is successful in the off-
Switch grid scenario.
DI port status can be set to Open or Close. If the
actual status of the load switch is inconsistent with
Status, change the setting of DI port status.

Switch-off Set the DO port for turning off the load switch.
control port
under Load
Switch

Switch-on Set the DO port for turning on the load switch.

control port
under Load
Switch

– After the microgrid parameter settings are complete, click Submit.

Step 10 Set Array startup/shutdown based on the site requirements. The configuration is
complete.

Figure 6-28 Completing the configuration

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 121

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3 Parameter Settings

NOTICE

● If the parameters listed in this section have been set in Deployment Wizard,
ignore the corresponding settings.
● If the PV and energy storage plants do not contain certain devices, such as
power meters, EMIs, IEC 103 devices, custom devices, and IEC 104 devices,
ignore the corresponding settings.

6.3.1 Setting User Parameters

Set user parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-29 Setting user parameters

Date&Time
Parameter Description

Local time zone Select a time zone based on the region where the
plant is located.

DST enable Set this parameter as required.

NOTE
This parameter is unavailable for zones without DST.

Date Set this parameter to the local date.

Time Set this parameter to the local time.

Clock source ● Set this parameter as required.

● The value can be NTP, Management System,
IEC104, or Modbus TCP. If there is no
management system, ignore the corresponding
setting.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTICE

● After the date and time are set, the date and time of all the inverters
connected to the SmartLogger are updated accordingly. Ensure that the settings
are correct.
● Changing the date and time affects the recording of system energy yield and
performance data. Do not change the time zone or system time unless
necessary.

Plant
Parameter Description

Plant name Set this parameter as required.

NOTE
Plant address In the English half-width status, you cannot enter any of the
following characters: <>:,`'?()#&\$|%+;~^"
Plant owner

Plant owner address

Country/Region Select a country/region based on the region where the

PV plant is located.

Revenue
NOTE

This parameter can be set only in the PV scenario.

Parameter Description

Currency Set this parameter as required.

The value can be EUR, GBP, USD, CNY, or JPY.

Electricity price/kWh Set this parameter to the local electricity price, which
is used to calculate the converted revenue of the
energy yield.

CO2 emission Set this parameter based on the local standard.

reduction coefficient

Save Period
Parameter Description

Performance data save Set this parameter to the save period of performance
period data. After the setting, the data will be displayed
accordingly on the performance data page.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 123

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.2 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management

System (V300R001C00)

Procedure
Step 1 Set up a network connection.
● Method 1: When the SmartLogger connects to the management system over
the 4G/3G/2G network, set mobile data parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-30 Setting mobile data parameters

Parameter Description

Monthly traffic Set this parameter based on the SIM card traffic
package package.

Network mode Set this parameter based on the SIM card network
mode.

APN mode The default value is Automatic. Set this parameter to

Manual if the dial-up connection cannot be set up in
Automatic mode.

Authentication type When APN mode is set to Manual, you need to set
the parameters related to the SIM card. Obtain the
APN information about the parameters from the SIM card
APN dialup number operator.

APN user name

APN user password

● Method 2: When the SmartLogger connects to the management system over

a wired network, set the wired network parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 124

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-31 Setting wired network parameters

Parameter Description

WAN/LAN port Three working modes are supported: WAN+LAN, LAN

working mode +LAN, and WAN+WAN.
● If WAN+LAN is selected, the functions and IP
addresses of the SmartLogger WAN and LAN ports
remain unchanged.
● If LAN+LAN is selected, the SmartLogger WAN and
LAN ports function as LAN ports, and the
SmartLogger WAN and LAN ports share a LAN IP
address.
● If WAN+WAN is selected, the SmartLogger WAN
and LAN ports function as WAN ports, and the
SmartLogger WAN and LAN ports share a WAN IP
address.
NOTICE
When the working mode of the WAN/LAN port is switched,
the web page may be interrupted or the SmartModule may
be powered off.

DHCP The WAN port of the SmartLogger supports IP address

obtaining using DHCP and automatic registration.
NOTE
After the SmartLogger connects to the SUN2000 app or
FusionSolar app, choose More > Settings > Comm. Param. >
Ethernet to access the Ethernet parameter setting screen
and set DHCP to Enable.

IP address Set this parameter based on the plant plan.

NOTE
If the IP address is changed, use the new IP address to log in
again.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Subnet mask Set this parameter based on the actual subnet mask
of the LAN where the SmartLogger is located.

Default gateway Set this parameter based on the actual gateway of the
LAN where the SmartLogger is located.

Primary DNS server ● You can ignore this parameter if the SmartLogger
connects to the LAN.
● Set this parameter to the IP address of the LAN
router when the SmartLogger connects to the
public network (for example, connecting to the
FusionSolar SmartPVMS, email server, or third-
party FTP server).

Secondary DNS server ● In normal cases, you can ignore this parameter.
● If the primary DNS server cannot resolve the
domain name, the secondary DNS server is used.

Step 2 Set management system parameters.

● Method 1: When the SmartLogger connects to a Huawei or third-party
management system using the encrypted Modbus TCP protocol, set
management system parameters and click Submit.
NOTE

After a Huawei NMS or a third-party NMS is connected to the SmartLogger in

Management System, another third-party NMS can be connected through
Management System-1 to obtain data from the SmartLogger and configure the
SmartLogger.

Figure 6-32 Setting management system parameters

Table 6-9 Management System

Parameter Description

Server Set this parameter to the IP address or domain name

of the Management System.

Port Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 126

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Address mode The value can be Communication address or Logical

address.
If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Communication address. In other
cases, you must select Logical address.

SSL encryption Retain the default value Enable.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disable, data exchange between
the SmartLogger and the management system will not be
encrypted, which poses security risks.

Second challenge Set this parameter based on the connected

authentication management system.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disable, the second challenge
authentication result is not checked, and user data may be
stolen. Therefore, exercise caution when setting this
parameter.

Security Certificate Optional. Set this parameter only when the certificate
has expired or the customer needs to use their own
certificate.

Figure 6-33 Setting management system-1 parameters

Table 6-10 Management system-1 parameters

Parameter Description

Server Set this parameter to the IP address or domain name

of Management System-1.

Port Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System-1.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Address mode The value can be Communication address or Logical

address.
If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Communication address. In other
cases, you must select Logical address.

TLS encryption Retain the default value Enable.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disable, data exchange between
the SmartLogger and the management system will not be
encrypted, which poses security risks.

TLS version Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System-1. TLS1.2 or a later version is
recommended.

Remote permission Monitoring only, Management (permanent

authorization), and Management (temporary
authorization) are supported.
When the remaining authorization time becomes 0,
the system automatically switches to the monitoring-
only mode.

Authorization time Set this parameter based on the actual authorization

time.

● Method 2: When the SmartLogger connects to a third-party management

system using the unencrypted Modbus TCP protocol, set Modbus TCP
parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-34 Setting Modbus TCP parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 128

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Link setting Modbus TCP is a universal standard protocol used to

connect to a third-party management system. Because
there is no security authentication mechanism, data
transmitted over this protocol is not encrypted. To
reduce network security risks, the function of
connecting to a third-party management system using
Modbus TCP is disabled by default. This protocol can
transmit the running data and control commands of
plants, which may cause user data breach and control
permission theft. Therefore, exercise caution when
using this protocol. Users are liable for any loss caused
by connecting to a third-party management system
(non-secure protocol) using this protocol. Users are
advised to take measures at the plant level to reduce
security risks, or use Huawei management system to
mitigate the risks.
To use this function, set this parameter to
Enable(Limited) or Enable(Unlimited).
● If this parameter is set to Enable(Limited), the
SmartLogger can connect to a maximum of five
preset third-party management systems.
● If this parameter is set to Enable(Unlimited), the
SmartLogger can connect to a maximum of five
third-party management systems with valid IP
addresses.

Client N IP Address If Link setting is set to Enable(Limited), set this

NOTE parameter based on the IP address of the third-party
N is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. management system.

Address mode The value can be Communication address or Logical

address.
If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Communication address. In other
cases, you must select Logical address.

SmartLogger address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the SmartLogger.

● Method 3: When the SmartLogger connects to a third-party management

system over IEC 104, set IEC 104 parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-35 Setting IEC 104 parameters

Tab Parameter Description

Basic parameters Link setting IEC 104 is a universal standard protocol

used to connect to a third-party
management system. Because there is
no security authentication mechanism,
data transmitted over this protocol is not
encrypted. To reduce network security
risks, the function of connecting to a
third-party management system using
IEC 104 is disabled by default. This
protocol can transmit the running data
and control commands of plants, which
may cause user data breach and control
permission theft. Therefore, exercise
caution when using this protocol. Users
are liable for any loss caused by
connecting to a third-party management
system (non-secure protocol) using this
protocol. Users are advised to take
measures at the plant level to reduce
security risks, or use Huawei
management system to mitigate the
risks.
To use this function, set this parameter
to Enable(Limited) or
Enable(Unlimited).
● If this parameter is set to
Enable(Limited), the SmartLogger
can connect to preset third-party
management systems.
● If this parameter is set to
Enable(Unlimited), the SmartLogger
can connect to third-party
management systems with a valid IP
address.

Common address Set this parameter as required.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

IEC104-N IEC104-N IP If Link setting is set to

NOTE Enable(Limited), set this parameter
N is 1, 2, 3, 4, or based on the IP address of the third-
5. party management system.

Teleindication Set these parameters as required.

default segment NOTE
After the IEC 104 configuration file exported
Telemetry from the SmartLogger and the IEC 104
default segment information files of various device types
provided together with the software version
Forwarding Table are correctly configured in a third-party
management system, the third-party
management system will be able to monitor
devices connected to the SmartLogger over
IEC 104.

Common Teleindication If Link setting is set to

Configuration default segment Enable(Unlimited), set these
parameters as required.
Telemetry
NOTE
default segment After the IEC 104 configuration file exported
from the SmartLogger and the IEC 104
Forwarding Table information files of various device types
provided together with the software version
are correctly configured in a third-party
management system, the third-party
management system will be able to monitor
devices connected to the SmartLogger over
IEC 104.

NOTE

Choose Settings > Other Parameters, and set IEC104 Push Data Period to specify the
interval for the SmartLogger to push data to a third-party management system over IEC
104. If IEC104 Push Data Period is set to 0s, there is no limit on the interval at which the
SmartLogger sends IEC 104 data.

----End

6.3.3 Setting Parameters for Connecting to the Management

System
Procedure
Step 1 Set up a network connection.
● Method 1: If the SmartLogger connects to the management system over a
4G/3G/2G network, choose Settings > Comm. Param. > Wireless Network,
set mobile data parameters, and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 131

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Monthly traffic Set this parameter based on the SIM card traffic
package package.

Network mode Set this parameter based on the SIM card network
mode.

APN mode The default value is Automatic. Set this parameter to

Manual if the dial-up connection cannot be set up in
Automatic mode.

Authentication type When APN mode is set to Manual, you need to set
the parameters related to the SIM card. Obtain the
APN information about the parameters from the SIM card
APN dialup number operator.

APN user name

APN user password

● Method 2: If the SmartLogger connects to the management system over a

wired network, choose Settings > Comm. Param. > Wired Network, set the
parameters for wired network ports, and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

WAN/LAN/ The quantity of Ethernets for the For example, if this

SFP1/SFP2 SmartLogger is determined by the parameter is set to
settings of WAN/LAN/SFP1/SFP2 Ethernet1/Ethernet2/
network ports, and the network Ethernet3/Ethernet3, the
ports are allocated to network is divided into
corresponding Ethernets. three independent
Ethernet 1, Ethernet 3, and Ethernets: Ethernet 1,
Ethernet 4 are northbound Ethernet 2, and Ethernet
networks, and Ethernet 2 is the 3. Ethernet 1 and Ethernet
southbound network. Cable 3 are northbound
connections to physical ports on networks. Ethernet 1
the SmartLogger must match the corresponds to the WAN
parameter settings to ensure port, and Ethernet 3
normal southbound and corresponds to the SFP1
northbound communication. and SFP2 ports. They can
connect to the
The parameter settings are as management system and
follows: other northbound devices.
● Ethernet1/Ethernet2/Ethernet1/ Ethernet 2 is the
Ethernet1 southbound network and
● Ethernet2/Ethernet2/Ethernet1/ corresponds to the LAN
Ethernet1 port. It can connect to
southbound devices such
● Ethernet1/Ethernet1/Ethernet1/ as the inverter, ESS, and
Ethernet1 PCS.
● Ethernet1/Ethernet2/Ethernet2/
Ethernet2
● Ethernet1/Ethernet2/Ethernet3/
Ethernet3
● Ethernet1/Ethernet2/Ethernet3/
Ethernet4

DHCP The WAN port of the SmartLogger ● Only Ethernet 1

supports IP address obtaining using supports DHCP.
DHCP and automatic registration. ● After the SmartLogger
connects to the
SUN2000 app or
FusionSolar app,
choose More >
Settings > Comm.
Param. > Ethernet to
access the Ethernet
parameter setting
screen and set DHCP to
Enable.

IP Address Set this parameter based on the If the IP address is

plant plan. changed, use the new IP
address to log in again.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 133

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Subnet mask Set this parameter based on the -

actual subnet mask of the LAN
where the SmartLogger is located.

Default Set this parameter based on the -

gateway actual gateway of the LAN where
the SmartLogger is located.

Primary DNS You can ignore this parameter if Only Ethernet 1 supports
server the SmartLogger connects to the the DNS server.
LAN.
Set this parameter to the IP
address of the LAN router when
the SmartLogger connects to the
public network (for example,
connecting to the FusionSolar
SmartPVMS, email server, or third-
party FTP server).

Secondary In normal cases, you can ignore

DNS server this parameter.
If the primary DNS server cannot
resolve the domain name, the
secondary DNS server is used.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Comm. Param. > Management System and set management
system parameters.
● Method 1: When the SmartLogger connects to a Huawei or third-party
management system using the encrypted Modbus TCP protocol, set
management system parameters and click Submit.
NOTE

After a Huawei NMS or a third-party NMS is connected to the SmartLogger in

Management System, another third-party NMS can be connected through
Management System-1 to obtain data from the SmartLogger and configure the
SmartLogger.

Figure 6-36 Setting management system parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-11 Management system parameters

Parameter Description

Server Set this parameter to the IP address or domain name

of the Management System.

Port Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System.

Address mode The value can be Communication address or Logical

address.
If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Communication address. In other
cases, you must select Logical address.

TLS encryption Retain the default value Enable.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disable, data exchange between
the SmartLogger and the management system will not be
encrypted, which poses security risks.

TLS version Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System. TLS1.2 or a later version is
recommended.

Second challenge Set this parameter based on the connected

authentication management system.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disable, the second challenge
authentication result is not checked, and user data may be
stolen. Therefore, exercise caution when setting this
parameter.

Security Certificate Optional. Set this parameter only when the certificate
has expired or the customer needs to use their own
certificate.

Figure 6-37 Setting management system-1 parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-12 Management system-1 parameters

Parameter Description

Server Set this parameter to the IP address or domain name

of Management System-1.

Port Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System-1.

Address mode The value can be Communication address or Logical

address.
If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Communication address. In other
cases, you must select Logical address.

TLS encryption Retain the default value Enable.

NOTE
If this parameter is set to Disable, data exchange between
the SmartLogger and the management system will not be
encrypted, which poses security risks.

TLS version Set this parameter based on the connected

Management System-1. TLS1.2 or a later version is
recommended.

Remote permission Monitoring only, Management (permanent

authorization), and Management (temporary
authorization) are supported.
When the remaining authorization time becomes 0,
the system automatically switches to the monitoring-
only mode.

● Method 2: When the SmartLogger connects to a third-party management

system using the unencrypted Modbus TCP protocol, set Modbus TCP
parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-38 Setting Modbus TCP parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 136

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Link setting Modbus TCP is a universal standard protocol used to

connect to a third-party management system. Because
there is no security authentication mechanism, data
transmitted over this protocol is not encrypted. To
reduce network security risks, the function of
connecting to a third-party management system using
Modbus TCP is disabled by default. This protocol can
transmit the running data and control commands of
plants, which may cause user data breach and control
permission theft. Therefore, exercise caution when
using this protocol. Users are liable for any loss caused
by connecting to a third-party management system
(non-secure protocol) using this protocol. Users are
advised to take measures at the plant level to reduce
security risks, or use Huawei management system to
mitigate the risks.
To use this function, set this parameter to
Enable(Limited) or Enable(Unlimited).
● If this parameter is set to Enable(Limited), the
SmartLogger can connect to a maximum of five
preset third-party management systems.
● If this parameter is set to Enable(Unlimited), the
SmartLogger can connect to a maximum of five
third-party management systems with a valid IP
address.

Client N IP Address If Link setting is set to Enable(Limited), set this

NOTE parameter based on the IP address of the third-party
N is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. management system.

Address mode The value can be Communication address or Logical

address.
If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Communication address. In other
cases, you must select Logical address.

SmartLogger address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the SmartLogger.

● Method 3: When the SmartLogger connects to a third-party management

system over IEC 104, set IEC 104 parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 137

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-39 Setting IEC 104 parameters

Tab Parameter Description

Basic Link setting IEC 104 is a universal standard protocol

parameters used to connect to a third-party
management system. Because there is
no security authentication mechanism,
data transmitted over this protocol is not
encrypted. To reduce network security
risks, the function of connecting to a
third-party management system using
IEC 104 is disabled by default. This
protocol can transmit the running data
and control commands of plants, which
may cause user data breach and control
permission theft. Therefore, exercise
caution when using this protocol. Users
are liable for any loss caused by
connecting to a third-party management
system (non-secure protocol) using this
protocol. Users are advised to take
measures at the plant level to reduce
security risks, or use Huawei
management system to mitigate the
risks.
To use this function, set this parameter
to Enable(Limited) or
Enable(Unlimited).
● If this parameter is set to
Enable(Limited), the SmartLogger
communicates with the management
system of the specified IP address,
that is, using a whitelist.
● If this parameter is set to
Enable(Unlimited), the SmartLogger
sets the segments and common
forwarding tables of teleindication
and telemetering through Common
Configuration.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Common address Set this parameter as required.

IEC104-N IEC104-N IP If Link setting is set to

NOTE Enable(Limited), set this parameter
● In based on the IP address of the third-
SmartLogger party management system.
V300R023C00
SPC120 and Teleindication Set this parameter as required.
later versions, default segment NOTE
IEC104-1 to After the IEC 104 configuration file exported
IEC104-10 are Telemetry from the SmartLogger and the IEC 104
displayed. default segment information files of various device types
● In versions provided together with the software version
earlier than Forwarding Table are correctly configured in a third-party
SmartLogger management system, the third-party
V300R023C00 management system will be able to monitor
SPC120, devices connected to the SmartLogger over
IEC104-1 to IEC 104.
IEC104-5 are
displayed.

Common Teleindication If Link setting is set to

Configuration default segment Enable(Unlimited), set these
parameters as required.
Telemetry
NOTE
default segment After the IEC 104 configuration file exported
from the SmartLogger and the IEC 104
Forwarding Table information files of various device types
provided together with the software version
are correctly configured in a third-party
management system, the third-party
management system will be able to monitor
devices connected to the SmartLogger over
IEC 104.

NOTE

Choose Settings > Other Parameters, and set IEC104 Push Data Period to specify the
interval for the SmartLogger to push data to a third-party management system over
IEC104. If IEC104 Push Data Period is set to 0s, there is no limit on the interval at which
the SmartLogger sends IEC104 data.

----End

6.3.4 Setting RS485 Communications Parameters

Set RS485 parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 139

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-40 Setting RS485 parameters

NOTE

When the SmartModule is connected to the SmartLogger, the device name of the
SmartModule is Module(M1), and the corresponding port is M1.COM.

RS485
Protocol, Baud rate, Parity, and Stop Bit must be set to the same values for the
devices connected to the same COM port.

Parameter Description

Protocol Set this parameter based on the protocol type of the

connected device.
The value can be Modbus, IEC103, DL/T645,
Modbus-Slave, or Modbus-Control.
NOTE
● When the SmartLogger serves as a slave node to
interconnect with a third-party device over Modbus-RTU,
set Protocol to Modbus-Slave.
● When the connected inverter performs rapid power grid
scheduling using both MBUS and RS485, set Protocol to
Modbus-Control.

Baud rate Set this parameter based on the baud rate of the
connected device.
The value can be 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or
115200.

Parity Set this parameter based on the parity mode of the

connected device.
The value can be None, Odd parity, or Even parity.

Stop Bit Set this parameter based on the stop bit of the
connected device.
The value can be 1 or 2.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 140

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Start address 1 ≤ Start address ≤ Communication address of the

connected device ≤ End address ≤ 247
End address
The address segments of COM ports can overlap.
NOTE
The start and end addresses have no impact on the devices
that have been connected.

Night Communication Settings

If device information query is not required at night, enable Night silent.

Parameter Description

Night silent Specifies whether the night silent mode is enabled.

Enter time Specifies the time for entering the night silent mode.

Exit time Specifies the time for exiting the night silent mode.

Wakeup period Specifies the wakeup period for the night silent mode.

6.3.5 Setting SPPC Communications Parameters

NOTE

The parameters can be configured only for V300R023C10 and later versions.

Choose Settings > Comm. Param. > SPPC, set the SPPC parameters, and click
Submit.

Parameter Description

SPPC SPPC IP IP address of the SPPC. If the SPPC address is not

configured, the SmartLogger obtains the SPPC
address through the automatic discovery process.
You can set the IP address to 0.0.0.0 and the port
number to 65535 to manually start automatic
device discovery.

SPPC port Port number used by the SmartLogger to connect

number to the SPPC.

Connection Status of the SPPC connection.

Status

Security Upload CA Update the CA certificate file. A CA certificate is a

Certificate certificate root certificate obtained from a CA. It is also called
file a trust certificate and is used to verify the identity
certificate of the peer end.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Upload local Update the local certificate file. This is an identity

certificate certificate obtained from a CA. It is also called a
file device certificate and contains the public key of a
device. During the establishment of a link with the
peer end, the peer end uses its CA certificate to
verify the validity and parses the certificate to
obtain the public key of the local end.

Upload key Update the key file. The secret key file is a
file certificate private key and is used by itself. After a
link is established with the peer end, the secret key
file is used to encrypt and send data.

Enable key Whether to encrypt the key file. If this function is

password enabled, set Key password and Confirm key
password.

6.3.6 Setting Parameters for the Slave SmartLogger

Step 1 Log in to the slave SmartLogger WebUI, set Modbus TCP parameters, and click
Submit.

Figure 6-41 Setting Modbus TCP parameters

Parameter Description

Link setting Set this parameter to Enable(Limited).

Client N IP Address Set this parameter to the IP address of the master

SmartLogger.

Address mode The value can be Comm. Address or Logical address.

If the communications address of the device
connected to the SmartLogger is unique, you are
advised to select Comm. Address. In other cases, you
must select Logical address.

SmartLogger address Set this parameter to the communications address of

the slave SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Fast scheduling[1] The default value is Enable.

● Set this parameter to Enable to enable the fast
scheduling function of the SmartLogger Modbus
TCP interface.
● Set this parameter to Disable to disable the fast
scheduling function of the SmartLogger Modbus
TCP interface.

Note [1]: This parameter can be set only for V300R023C00 and later versions.
The fast scheduling function of the Modbus TCP interface is mutually exclusive
with the GOOSE fast scheduling function. The fast scheduling function of only
one protocol takes effect at a time.

Step 2 Log in to the WebUI of the master SmartLogger, set access parameters for the
slave SmartLogger, and click Add Devices.

Figure 6-42 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to SmartLogger.

IP address Set this parameter to the IP address of the slave

SmartLogger.

----End

6.3.7 Setting GOOSE Communications Parameters

NOTE

The GOOSE parameters can be configured only for V300R023C00 and later versions.

Choose Settings > Comm. Param. > GOOSE, set the GOOSE parameters, and click
Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 143

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Basic Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Connection The default value is Disable. -

● Set this parameter to Enable to
enable GOOSE communication for
the SmartLogger.
● Set this parameter to Disable to
disable GOOSE communication for
the SmartLogger.

Data reporting The default value is Disable. This

● Set this parameter to Enable to parameter is
enable the function of reporting displayed
GOOSE messages from the when
SmartLogger to the peer device. Connection is
set to Enable.
● Set this parameter to Disable to
disable the function of reporting
GOOSE messages from the
SmartLogger to the peer device.

Data receiving The default value is Disable.

● Set this parameter to Enable to
enable the GOOSE message
receiving function of the
SmartLogger.
● Set this parameter to Disable to
disable the GOOSE message
receiving function of the
SmartLogger.

Network port WAN or SPF is supported. The default

value is WAN. This parameter specifies
the type of the network port used by
the SmartLogger to send and receive
GOOSE messages. Set this parameter
based on the actual networking
scenario.

Fast scheduling[1] The default value is Disable.

● Set this parameter to Enable to
enable the fast scheduling function
of the SmartLogger GOOSE
interface.
● Set this parameter to Disable to
disable the fast scheduling function
of the SmartLogger GOOSE
interface.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Note [1]: The GOOSE fast scheduling function is mutually exclusive with the fast
scheduling function of the Modbus TCP interface. The fast scheduling function
of only one protocol takes effect at a time.

Configuration File Import/Export

● This parameter is displayed when Connection is set to Enable.
● You can contact the vendor to obtain the CID files of the SmartLogger and
the peer controller. Compress the CID files of the SmartLogger and the peer
controller into a .zip configuration package, and click Import Config. Import
the configuration package. After the configuration is parsed successfully, the
Device name, Controller type, Controller name, Configuration status, and
Last import time are displayed. For details about GOOSE interconnection and
interfaces, see the SmartLogger IEC61850 GOOSE Protocol Interface
Description.
If the configuration file is imported and parsed successfully, the configuration
status is Configured. If the configuration file import fails, contact the vendor
of the peer controller to obtain the correct CID file.

Message Description Suggestion

Indicating
Failed
Configuration

Import failed. The CID file of the Contact the vendor of the peer
The local or peer controller to obtain the correct CID
configuration device is missing. file.
file is
incomplete.

Import failed. The file does not

The match the vendor
configuration or the device type.
file is not for
this device.

Import failed. The CID file

Unable to format is
parse the incorrect. Parsing
configuration failed or no
file. matching signal is
found.

● Click Export Config. to obtain the CID file of the current SmartLogger version.
The CID file is exported at the same time if it has been imported successfully.

6.3.8 Setting MBUS Parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 145

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.8.1 Setting Parameters for a Built-in MBUS Module

Procedure
1. Set access parameters.

Figure 6-43 Setting parameters for a built-in MBUS module

Parameter Description

Built-in MBUS ● When the SmartLogger communicates with the

inverter using a built-in MBUS module, set this
parameter to Enable.
● When the SmartLogger communicates with the
inverter and third-party device only over RS485,
set this parameter to Disable.

Device disconnection Specifies the device disconnection time.

time

2. Set networking parameters.

Figure 6-44 Setting built-in MBUS networking

Tab Parameter Description

Running Param. Anti-crosstalk Set this parameter to Enable. When the

transformer station number and winding
number of the inverter are the same as
those of the MBUS, or the inverter SN is
in the SN list, the inverter can connect to
the SmartLogger over an MBUS network.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 146

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Network Set this parameter based on site

frequency band requirements.

Box-type Set this parameter based on the number

transformer of the transformer station connected to
No. the SmartLogger.

Winding No. In the scenario of multi-split transformer

stations, set this parameter based on the
winding number of the transformer
station connected to the SmartLogger.

Networking ● When the SmartLogger communicates

with the inverter over MBUS, set
Networking to Enable.
● When the SmartLogger communicates
with the inverter only over RS485, set
Networking to Disable.

Power settings This parameter is used to adjust the

transmit power of MBUS signals. A larger
value indicates higher transmit power
and better networking capabilities. The
default value is 8 (NA is displayed). You
can set this parameter based on actual
requirements.

Transmit ● Set this parameter to Single-phase in

mode[1] the rapid power grid scheduling
scenario and to Three-phase in other
scenarios.
● If this parameter is set to Single-
phase, ensure that the MBUS three-
phase AC power cable connection of
the SmartLogger is the same as that of
the inverter. Otherwise, the inverter
communication may be disconnected
or some commands may be lost.

Fast control ● This parameter specifies the frame

frame type[2] type used by the MBUS module for
rapid power grid scheduling.
● The MBUS module adaptively selects
FC frame or Common frame.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Fast Set this parameter based on the actual

scheduling[3] networking.
● If the fast scheduling function is
required, set this parameter to Enable.
● If the fast scheduling function is not
required, set this parameter to
Disable.

SN List - ● Maintain the inverter SN list.

● You can click Synchronize to
synchronize the transformer station
number and winding number of the
MBUS module to the inverters in the
SN list.
NOTICE
● If MBUS networking is used, an SN list,
that is, a whitelist, must be set for
inverters.
● The inverter whitelist can be set one by
one or in batches.
● One by one: Click Add, enter the SN
of the corresponding inverter, and
click Submit.
● In batches:
Method 1: If the whitelist is set for
the first time, click Template,
download the .zip package to the
local PC, decompress it, and enter
the SNs of multiple inverters in
the .csv file by referring to the
format of the template. Click
Import to import the modified .csv
file, and then click Submit.
Method 2: If the whitelist is not set
for the first time, click Export,
download the .zip package to the
local PC, decompress it, and add the
SNs of multiple inverters to the .csv
file based on the format of the
exported .csv file. Click Import to
import the modified .csv file, and
then click Submit.

Note [1]: This parameter can be set only in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC212

and later versions.
Note [2]: This parameter can be set only in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC212
and later versions, but has been deleted in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC220
and later versions.
Note [3]: This parameter can be set only in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC220
and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 148

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.8.2 Setting Parameters for an External MBUS Module

Set parameters for an external MBUS module based on the model of the
connected device. The models of external MBUS modules include SmartMBUS
CCO01A and SmartMBUS CCO01B.

6.3.8.2.1 Setting SmartMBUS CCO01A Parameters

Procedure
1. Set access parameters.
– Method 1: Click Auto. Search to connect to the MBUS module.
– Method 2: Click Add Devices, set access parameters, and click Add
Devices.

Figure 6-45 Setting access parameters for an external MBUS module

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to MBUS.

Port number Set this parameter to the COM port connected to

the MBUS module.

2. Set networking parameters.

Figure 6-46 Setting external MBUS networking

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Running Param. Baud rate Retain the default value 115200 to

achieve better communication
performance.

Anti-crosstalk Set this parameter to Enable. When the

transformer station number and winding
number of the inverter are the same as
those of the MBUS, or the inverter SN is
in the SN list, the inverter can connect to
the SmartLogger over an MBUS
network.

Network Set this parameter based on site

frequency band requirements.

Box-type Set this parameter based on the number

transformer No. of the transformer station connected to
the SmartLogger.

Winding No. In the scenario of multi-split transformer

stations, set this parameter based on the
winding number of the transformer
station connected to the SmartLogger.

Networking ● When the SmartLogger

communicates with the inverter over
MBUS, set Networking to Enable.
● When the SmartLogger
communicates with the inverter only
over RS485, set Networking to
Disable.

Power settings This parameter is used to adjust the

transmit power of MBUS signals. A
larger value indicates higher transmit
power and better networking
capabilities. The default value is 8 (NA is
displayed). You can set this parameter
based on actual requirements.

Transmit ● Set this parameter to Single-phase in

mode[1] the rapid power grid scheduling
scenario and to Three-phase in other
scenarios.
● If this parameter is set to Single-
phase, ensure that the MBUS three-
phase AC power cable connection of
the SmartLogger is the same as that
of the inverter. Otherwise, the
inverter communication may be
disconnected or some commands
may be lost.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 150

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Network ● This parameter is used to enable

interface[1] communication between the MBUS
module and the SmartLogger
network interface.
● The default value is Disable. Set this
parameter to Enable only in the
power grid fast scheduling scenario.
Ensure that the LAN interface on the
SmartLogger or SmartModule is
connected to the network interface
on the MBUS module.

IP address[1] IP address of the MBUS module. The

default value is 192.168.8.249. Change
the value only when an IP address
conflict occurs.

Fast control ● This parameter specifies the frame

frame type[2] type used by the MBUS module for
rapid power grid scheduling.
● The MBUS module adaptively selects
FC frame or Common frame.

Fast Set this parameter based on the actual

scheduling[3] networking.
● If the fast scheduling function is
required, set this parameter to
Enable.
● If the fast scheduling function is not
required, set this parameter to
Disable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

SN List - ● Maintain the inverter SN list.

● You can click Synchronize to
synchronize the transformer station
number and winding number of the
MBUS module to the inverters in the
SN list.
NOTICE
● If MBUS networking is used, an SN
list, that is, a whitelist, must be set for
inverters.
● The inverter whitelist can be set one
by one or in batches.
● One by one: Click Add, enter the
SN of the corresponding inverter,
and click Submit.
● In batches:
Method 1: If the whitelist is set for
the first time, click Template,
download the .zip package to the
local PC, decompress it, and enter
the SNs of multiple inverters in
the .csv file by referring to the
format of the template. Click
Import to import the modified .csv
file, and then click Submit.
Method 2: If the whitelist is not set
for the first time, click Export,
download the .zip package to the
local PC, decompress it, and add
the SNs of multiple inverters to
the .csv file based on the format of
the exported .csv file. Click Import
to import the modified .csv file,
and then click Submit.

Note [1]: This parameter can be set only in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC212

and later versions.
Note [2]: This parameter can be set only in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC212
and later versions, but has been deleted in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC220
and later versions.
Note [3]: This parameter can be set only in SmartMBUS V100R001C00SPC220
and later versions.

6.3.8.2.2 Setting SmartMBUS CCO01B Parameters

The SmartLogger3000 software versions of V300R023C00SPC110 and later support
FE access.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 152

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Procedure
1. (Optional) If the SmartMBUS CCO01B is installed in the STS, set Built-in
MBUS to Disable on the SmartLogger3000, as shown in Figure 6-47. If the
SACU model is SmartACU2000D-D-02 or SmartACU2000D-D-03, remove the
power supply to disable the CCO module installed in the SACU to prevent
communications interference between the two CCO modules. If the preceding
conditions are not met, skip this step.

Figure 6-47 Setting parameters for a built-in MBUS module

2. Set access parameters.

– If FE communication is selected for the SmartMBUS CCO01B, the
SmartMBUS CCO01B is automatically added.
– If RS485 communication is selected for the SmartMBUS CCO01B, you
have two methods to add a device.
Method 1: Click Auto. Search to connect to the MBUS module.
Method 2: Click Add Devices, set access parameters, and click Add
Devices.

Figure 6-48 Setting access parameters for an external MBUS module

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to MBUS.

Port number Set this parameter to the COM port connected

to the MBUS module.

3. Set networking parameters.

Table 6-13 Setting parameters for external MBUS networking

Tab Parameter Description

Running Baud rate Retain the default value 115200 to achieve

Param. better communication performance. This
parameter is set only when the SmartMBUS
CCO communication mode is set to RS485.

Anti-crosstalk Set this parameter to Enable. When the

transformer station number and winding
number of the inverter are the same as
those of the MBUS, or the inverter SN is in
the SN list, the inverter can connect to the
SmartLogger over an MBUS network.

Box-type Set this parameter based on the number of

transformer No. the transformer station connected to the
SmartLogger.

Winding No. In the scenario of multi-split transformer

stations, set this parameter based on the
winding number of the transformer station
connected to the SmartLogger.

Networking ● When the SmartLogger communicates

with the inverter over MBUS, set
Networking to Enable.
● When the SmartLogger communicates
with the inverter only over RS485, set
Networking to Disable.

Power settings This parameter is used to adjust the transmit

power of MBUS signals. A larger value
indicates higher transmit power and better
networking capabilities. The default value is
8 (NA is displayed). You can set this
parameter based on actual requirements.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 154

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Fast scheduling Set this parameter based on the actual

networking.
● If the fast scheduling function is required,
set this parameter to Enable.
● If the fast scheduling function is not
required, set this parameter to Disable.

Network frequency Retain the default value. If you have any

band questions, contact the supplier or technical
support.

SN List - ● Maintain the inverter SN list.

● You can click Synchronize to synchronize
the transformer station number and
winding number of the MBUS module to
the inverters in the SN list.
NOTICE
● If MBUS networking is used, an SN list,
that is, a whitelist, must be set for
inverters.
● The inverter whitelist can be set one by
one or in batches.
● One by one: Click Add, enter the SN of
the corresponding inverter, and click
Submit.
● In batches:
Method 1: If the whitelist is set for the
first time, click Template, download
the .zip package to the local PC,
decompress it, and enter the SNs of
multiple inverters in the .csv file by
referring to the format of the template.
Click Import to import the
modified .csv file, and then click
Submit.
Method 2: If the whitelist is not set for
the first time, click Export, download
the .zip package to the local PC,
decompress it, and add the SNs of
multiple inverters to the .csv file based
on the format of the exported .csv file.
Click Import to import the
modified .csv file, and then click
Submit.

6.3.9 Setting Inverter Parameters

SUN2000 is displayed for V300R001C00.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 155

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Connect Device and set access parameters.
● Method 1: Click Auto. Search to connect to the SUN2000.
● Method 2: Click Add Devices, set access parameters, and click Add Devices.

Figure 6-49 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to SUN2000.

Connection mode ● If the SUN2000 uses the MBUS for communication,

set this parameter to MBUS.
● If the SUN2000 uses RS485 for communication, set
this parameter to the COM port connected to the
SUN2000.

Address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the SUN2000.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Inverter > Running Param., set running parameters, and
click Submit.

NOTICE

Before setting the running parameters of the SUN2000, ensure that the DC side of
the SUN2000 is energized.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.9.1 Running Parameters

Grid Parameters
Parameter Description

Grid Code Set this parameter based on the grid code of the country or region
where the inverter is used and the inverter application scenario.

Isolation settings Set the working mode of the inverter based on the grounding
status at DC side and the connection to the power grid.

Output mode Specifies whether the inverter output has a neutral wire based on
the application scenario.

V-phase grounded The default value is Disable. Set this parameter to Enable when
the phase wire from the transformer to the inverter is grounded.

PQ mode If this parameter is set to PQ mode 1, the maximum AC output

power equals the maximum apparent power. If this parameter is
set to PQ mode 2, the maximum AC output power equals the
rated output power.

Automatically start upon Specifies whether to allow the inverter to automatically start after
grid recovery the power grid recovers.
● Enable: The inverter automatically starts when the power grid
recovers from a fault or outage.
● Disable: The inverter does not automatically start when the
power grid recovers from a fault or outage. The inverter starts
only after a startup command is delivered.

Grid connected recovery Specifies the time after which the inverter begins restarting after
time from grid faults (s) the power grid recovers.

Grid reconnection voltage The standards of certain countries and regions require that after
upper limit (V) the inverter shuts down for protection due to a fault, if the power
grid voltage is higher than Grid reconnection voltage upper
limit, the inverter is not allowed to reconnect to the grid.

Grid reconnection voltage The standards of certain countries and regions require that after
lower limit (V) the inverter shuts down for protection due to a fault, if the power
grid voltage is lower than Grid reconnection voltage lower limit,
the inverter is not allowed to reconnect to the grid.

Grid reconnection frequency The standards of certain countries and regions require that after
upper limit (Hz) the inverter shuts down for protection due to a fault, if the power
grid frequency is higher than Grid reconnection frequency upper
limit, the inverter is not allowed to reconnect to the grid.

Grid reconnection frequency The standards of certain countries and regions require that after
lower limit (Hz) the inverter shuts down for protection due to a fault, if the power
grid frequency is lower than Grid reconnection frequency lower
limit, the inverter is not allowed to reconnect to the grid.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Reactive power Specifies the voltage threshold for triggering reactive power
compensation (cosφ-P) compensation based on the cosφ-P curve.
trigger voltage (%)

Reactive power Specifies the voltage threshold for exiting reactive power
compensation (cosφ-P) exit compensation based on the cosφ-P curve.
voltage (%)

Protection Parameters
Parameter Description

Insulation resistance To ensure device safety, the inverter detects the insulation
protection threshold (MΩ) resistance of the input side with respect to ground when it starts a
self-check. If the detected value is less than the preset value, the
inverter does not connect to the grid.

Voltage unbalance Specifies the inverter protection threshold when the power grid
protection threshold (%) voltage is unbalanced.

Phase protection point (º) The Japanese standard requires that during passive islanding
detection, protection should be triggered if an abrupt voltage
phase change is detected.

Phase angle offset The standards of certain countries and regions require that the
protection inverter needs to be protected when the phase angle offset of the
power grid three phases exceeds a certain value.

10-min overvoltage Specifies the 10-minute overvoltage protection threshold.

protection threshold (V)

10-min overvoltage Specifies the 10-minute overvoltage protection duration.

protection duration (ms)

Level-N OV protection (V) Specifies the level-N grid overvoltage protection threshold.

Level-N OV protection time Specifies the level-N grid overvoltage protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N UV protection (V) Specifies the level-N grid undervoltage protection threshold.

Level-N UV protection time Specifies the level-N grid undervoltage protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N OF protection (Hz) Specifies the level-N grid overfrequency protection threshold.

Level-N OF protection time Specifies the level-N grid overfrequency protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N UF protection (Hz) Specifies the level-N grid underfrequency protection threshold.

Level-N UF protection time Specifies the level-N grid underfrequency protection duration.
(ms)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 158

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

N is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

Feature Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

MPPT multi-peak When the inverter is used in scenarios -

scanning where PV strings are greatly shaded, set
this parameter to Enable, and then the
inverter will perform MPPT scanning at
regular intervals to locate the maximum
power.

MPPT multi-peak Specifies the MPPT scanning interval. This parameter is displayed
scan interval when MPPT multi-peak
(min) scanning is set to Enable.

RCD RCD refers to the residual current of the -

enhancement inverter to the ground. To ensure device
and personal safety, RCD should be limited
to the specified value in the standard. If an
AC switch with a residual current detection
function is installed outside the inverter,
set this function to Enable to reduce the
residual current generated when the
inverter is running, thereby preventing the
AC switch from misoperations.

Night-time In some specific application scenarios, a This parameter is displayed

reactive power power grid company requires that the when Isolation is set to Input
output inverter can perform reactive power ungrounded (with TF).
compensation at night to ensure that the
power factor of the local power grid meets
requirements.

PID protection at When the inverter outputs reactive power -

night at night and this parameter is set to
Enable, the inverter will shut down
automatically if it detects abnormal status
of the PID voltage compensation.

Strong If the power grid short-circuit capacity or -

adaptability PV plant installed capacity is less than 3,
the power grid quality will be affected if
the power grid impedance is too high,
which may cause the inverter to
malfunction. In this case, if the inverter is
required to work properly, set this
parameter to Enable.

Power quality If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

optimization inverter output current harmonics will be
mode optimized.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

PV module type This parameter can be set to different ● If this parameter is set to
types of PV modules, especially Crystalline silicon or Film,
concentrating PV (CPV) modules. You can the inverter automatically
configure CPV modules to determine the detects the power of PV
shutdown duration of the inverter. If the modules when they are
CPV modules are shaded, the power drops shaded and shuts down if the
drastically to 0 and the inverter shuts power is too low.
down. The energy yield would be affected ● When CPV modules are used:
since it takes too long for the power to
resume and inverter to restart. The – If this parameter is set to
parameter does not need to be set for CPV 1, the inverter can
crystalline silicon and thin film PV quickly restart in 60
modules. minutes if the input power
of PV modules drops
drastically due to shading.
– If this parameter is set to
CPV 2, the inverter can
quickly restart in 10
minutes if the input power
of PV modules drops
drastically due to shading.

PID When the external PID module PID compensation direction

compensation compensates the PID voltage for the PV must be consistent with PV
direction system, set PID compensation direction module compensation voltage
to the actual compensation direction of direction of the PID module.
the PID module so that the inverter can
output reactive power at night.

Built-in PID Specifies the operation mode of the -

running mode inverter built-in PID.

PID nighttime Specifies whether to enable the PID If PID running mode is not set
off-grid repair nighttime off-grid repair. to Disable, the parameter can
be set.
PID daytime off- Specifies whether to enable the PID
grid repair daytime off-grid repair.

String connection Specifies the connection mode of PV ● When PV strings connect to

mode strings. the inverter separately (All PV
strings separated), there is no
need to set this parameter.
The inverter can
automatically detect the
connection mode of the PV
strings.
● When the inverter is
connected to all parallel PV
strings (connected to each
other in parallel outside the
inverter), set this parameter
to All PV strings connected.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 160

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Automatic OFF The standards of certain countries and If Automatic OFF due to
due to regions require that the inverter must shut communication interrupted is
communication down after the communication is set to Enable and the inverter
interrupted interrupted for a certain time. communication is interrupted for
a specified time (set by
Communication interruption
duration), the inverter will
automatically shut down.

Communication Specifies the duration for determining -

interruption communication interruption. Used for
duration (min) automatic shutdown for protection in case
of communication interruption.

Automatic ON If this parameter is set to Enable, the This parameter is displayed

due to inverter automatically starts after when Automatic OFF due to
communication communication recovers. If this parameter communication interrupted is
resumed is set to Disable, the inverter needs to be set to Enable.
started manually after communication
recovers.

Soft start/boot Specifies the duration for the power to -

time (s) gradually increase when the inverter starts.

Shutdown Specifies the power change speed when -

gradient (%/s) the inverter shuts down.

AFCI The North American standard requires that -

the inverter should have DC arc detection
function.

AFCI detection Adjusts the sensitivity of arc detection. This parameter is displayed only
adaptive mode when AFCI is set to Enable.

AFCI self-test Send the AFCI self-check command -

manually.

Current error To prevent inaccurate I-V curve scanning -

during the scan of PV strings caused by sunlight change,
(A) the current change of PV strings that
operate properly should be monitored.
When the current exceeds the specified
value, it is determined that the sunlight
changes. Perform I-V curve scanning again.

OVGR associated If this parameter is set to Enable, the This parameter is displayed if the
shutdown inverter shuts down after receiving the Japanese grid code is selected.
OVGR signal. If this parameter is set to
Disable, the inverter does not shut down
after receiving the OVGR signal.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Dry contact Identifies the dry contact signals from the Set this parameter to OVGR for
function SmartLogger. OVGR signals, and set it to NC
for other signals.
This parameter is displayed if the
Japanese grid code is selected.

Commanded The standards of certain countries and -

shutdown hold regions require that if the inverter is shut
after power down after receiving a command and
recovery powered on again after power recovers, it
should still be in commanded shutdown
state.

Night-time The inverter monitors PV strings at night. -

hibernation If this parameter is set to Enable, the
monitoring function of the inverter will
hibernate at night to reduce power
consumption.

MBUS For inverters that support RS485 -

communication communication and MBUS
communication, you are advised to set this
parameter to Disable to reduce power
consumption.

RS485-2 If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

communication RS485-2 port can be used. If the port is
not used, you are advised to set this
parameter to Disable to reduce power
consumption.

Delay upgrade This parameter is mainly used in the After the inverter starts to
upgrade scenarios where the PV power upgrade, if Delay upgrade is set
supply is disconnected at night due to no to Enable, the upgrade package
sunlight or unstable at dawn or dusk due is loaded first. After the PV
to poor sunlight. power supply recovers and the
activation conditions are met,
the inverter automatically
activates the upgrade.

String monitor The inverter monitors PV strings in real If PV strings are often shaded,
time. If any PV string is abnormal (such as you are advised to set String
the PV string is shaded or the electric monitor to Disable to prevent
energy yield decreases), the inverter false alarms.
generates an alarm to remind
maintenance personnel to maintain the PV
string in a timely manner.

String detection Specifies the threshold for determining PV This parameter is displayed
reference string exception. The false alarms caused when String monitor is set to
asymmetric by fixed shadow shading can be controlled Enable.
coefficient by changing this parameter.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 162

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

String detection Specifies the threshold for starting PV

starting power string exception detection. The false
percentage (%) alarms caused by fixed shadow shading
can be controlled by changing this
parameter.

OFF at 0% power If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

limit inverter shuts down after receiving the 0%
power limit command. If this parameter is
set to Disable, the inverter does not shut
down after receiving the 0% power limit
command.

Maximum Specifies the output upper threshold for If the maximum active power
apparent power the maximum apparent power to adapt to equals the value of Smax_limit,
(kVA) the capacity requirements of standard and this parameter is not displayed.
customized inverters.

Maximum active Specifies the output upper threshold for For 1000 V inverters, this
power (kW) the maximum active power to adapt to parameter is configurable only
different market requirements. for the SUN2000-25KTL-US, and
the maximum value is 27.5 kW.

Tracker controller Selects a controller vendor. -

Adjust total Specifies the initial energy yield of the -

energy yield inverter. This parameter is used in inverter
(kWh) replacement scenarios. Set the initial
energy yield of the new inverter to the
total energy yield of the old inverter to
ensure continuous statistics of cumulative
energy yield.

Duration for The standards of certain countries and -

determining regions require that the inverter should
short-time grid not disconnect from the power grid if the
disconnection power grid experiences a short-time
(ms) failure. After the fault is rectified, the
inverter output power needs to be quickly
restored.

Buzzer If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

buzzer sounds when the DC input cable is
incorrectly connected. If this parameter is
set to Disable, the buzzer does not sound
when the DC input cable is incorrectly
connected.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

LVRT LVRT is short for low voltage ride-through. -

When the grid voltage is abnormally low
for a short time, the inverter cannot
disconnect from the power grid
immediately and has to work for some
time.

Threshold for Specifies the threshold for triggering LVRT. This parameter is displayed
triggering LVRT The threshold settings should meet the when LVRT is set to Enable.
(V) local grid standard.

LVRT During LVRT, the inverter needs to

compensation generate positive-sequence reactive power
power factor of to support the power grid. This parameter
reactive power in is used to set the positive-sequence
positive sequence reactive power generated by the inverter.
For example, if you set LVRT
compensation power factor of reactive
power in positive sequence to 2, the
increment of positive-sequence reactive
current generated by the inverter is 20% of
the rated current when the AC voltage
decreases by 10% during LVRT. If you set
LVRT compensation power factor of
reactive power in positive sequence to 0,
the increment of positive-sequence
reactive current generated by the inverter
is 0 regardless of how much the AC
voltage decreases during LVRT.

LVRT During LVRT, the solar inverter needs to

compensation generate negative-sequence reactive
power factor of power to support the power grid. This
reactive power in parameter is used to set the negative-
negative sequence reactive power generated by the
sequence solar inverter.
For example, if you set LVRT
compensation power factor of reactive
power in negative sequence to 2, the
increment of negative-sequence reactive
current generated by the inverter is 20% of
the rated current when the AC voltage
decreases by 10% during LVRT. If you set
LVRT compensation power factor of
reactive power in negative sequence to
0, the increment of negative-sequence
reactive current generated by the inverter
is 0 regardless of how much the AC
voltage decreases during LVRT.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 164

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Percentage of During LVRT, the device needs to limit the

LVRT reactive reactive current.
current limiting For example, if you set Percentage of
LVRT reactive current limiting to 50, the
reactive current upper limit of the device is
50% of the rated current during LVRT.

Threshold of When Zero current due to power grid

LVRT zero- fault is set to Enable, if the power grid
current mode voltage is less than the value of Threshold
of LVRT zero-current mode during LVRT,
the zero current mode is used. Otherwise,
the mode configured in LVRT mode is
used.

LVRT mode Sets LVRT mode. The options are Zero-

current mode, Constant current mode,
Reactive power priority mode, and
Active power priority mode.

HVRT HVRT is short for high voltage ride- -

through. When the grid voltage is
abnormally high for a short time, the
inverter cannot disconnect from the power
grid immediately and has to work for
some time.

Threshold for Specifies the threshold for triggering HVRT. This parameter is displayed
triggering HVRT The threshold settings should meet the when HVRT is set to Enable.
(V) local grid standard.

HVRT During HVRT, the inverter needs to

compensation generate positive-sequence reactive power
power factor of to support the power grid. This parameter
reactive power in is used to set the positive-sequence
positive sequence reactive power generated by the inverter.
For example, if you set HVRT
compensation power factor of reactive
power in positive sequence to 2, the
increment of positive-sequence reactive
current generated by the inverter is 20% of
the rated current when the AC voltage
increases by 10% during HVRT.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

HVRT During HVRT, the inverter needs to

compensation generate negative-sequence reactive
power factor of power to support the power grid. This
reactive power in parameter is used to set the negative-
negative sequence reactive power generated by the
sequence inverter.
For example, if you set HVRT
compensation power factor of reactive
power in negative sequence to 2, the
increment of negative-sequence reactive
current generated by the inverter is 20% of
the rated current when the AC voltage
increases by 10% during HVRT.

VRT exit Specifies the LVRT/HVRT recovery ● This parameter is displayed

hysteresis threshold. when LVRT or HVRT is set to
threshold Enable.
● LVRT recovery threshold =
LVRT threshold + VRT exit
hysteresis threshold
● HVRT recovery threshold =
HVRT threshold – VRT exit
hysteresis threshold

LVRT Specifies whether to shield the This parameter is displayed

undervoltage undervoltage protection function during when LVRT is set to Enable.
protection shield LVRT.

Grid voltage Specifies whether to shield the This parameter is displayed

protection shield undervoltage protection function during when LVRT or HVRT is set to
during VRT LVRT or HVRT. Enable.

VRT active Specifies the percentage of the maximum -

current limiting active current to the rated current during
(%) fault ride-through (FRT).

VRT active power Specifies the recovery rate when the active -
recovery gradient current recovers to the value at the
moment before FRT.

Grid voltage trip Specifies the LVRT or HVRT threshold for This parameter is available when
triggering triggering a transient voltage jump of a Grid code is set to VDE 4120.
threshold (%) power grid. A transient voltage jump
indicates that the inverter cannot
immediately disconnect from the power
grid when the power grid is abnormal due
to transient changes.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 166

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Zero current due Certain countries and regions have This parameter is displayed
to power grid requirements on the output current during when LVRT or HVRT is set to
fault high/low voltage ride-through. In this case, Enable.
set this parameter to Enable. After this
parameter is set to Enable, the output
current is less than 10% of the rated
current during high/low voltage ride-
through.

Active islanding Specifies whether to enable the active -

protection islanding protection function.

Passive islanding Specifies whether to enable the passive This parameter is displayed if the
protection islanding protection function. Japanese grid code is selected.

Voltage rise The standards of certain countries and -

suppression regions require that when the output
voltage exceeds a certain value, the
inverter must suppress voltage rise by
outputting reactive power and reducing
active power.

Voltage rise The standards of certain countries and ● This parameter is displayed
suppressing regions require that the inverter generate when Voltage rise
reactive power a certain amount of reactive power when suppression is set to Enable.
adjustment point the output voltage exceeds a certain value. ● The value of Voltage rise
(%) suppressing active power
Voltage rise The standards of certain countries and derating point must be
suppressing regions require that the active power of greater than that of Voltage
active power the inverter be derated according to a rise suppressing reactive
derating point certain slope when the output voltage power adjustment point.
(%) exceeds a certain value.

Voltage rise The standards of certain countries and This parameter is displayed
suppression P-U regions require that the P-U curve be set. when Voltage rise suppression
curve is set to Enable.

Voltage rise The standards of certain countries and

suppression Q-U regions require that the Q-U curve be set.
curve

Frequency Set this parameter to Enable to protect -

change rate the inverter when the grid frequency
protection changes too fast.

Frequency Specifies the frequency change rate This parameter is displayed

change rate protection threshold. when Frequency change rate
protection protection is set to Enable.
threshold (Hz/s)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 167

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Frequency Specifies the frequency change rate

change rate protection duration.
protection
duration (s)

Soft start time Specifies the time for the power to -

after grid failure gradually increase when the inverter
(s) restarts after the power grid recovers.

CT anomaly If this parameter is set to Enable, the This parameter is displayed only
detection inverter automatically checks whether CT for the SUN2000-4.95KTL-JPL1.
cables are disconnected or connected in
reverse polarity and reports an alarm to
the SmartLogger.

Churn mode If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

BackupBox switches to this mode (off-grid
mode) when the grid fails.

Reserved backup When Churn mode (off-grid mode) is set The association is displayed
capacity to Enable and the battery SOC reaches when Churn mode (off-grid
this value, the battery stops discharging to mode) is set to Enable.
ensure that the SOC is above this value.

Grid-tied/Off- If this parameter is set to Automatic, the

grid switching system switches to the off-grid mode
mode when the grid fails, and switches to the
grid-tied mode when the grid recovers.

Switch to off-grid This parameter is displayed only when

Grid-tied/Off-grid switching mode is set
to Manual. To manually switch to off-grid
mode, select the box on the left and click
Submit.

Voltage in AC operating voltage level of the inverter

independent in off-grid mode can be 101 V or 202 V.
operation

Auto recovery ● If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

from string-to- String Short-Circuited to Ground
ground short- alarm is automatically cleared after
circuit protection fault recovery.
● If this parameter is set to Disable, the
String Short-Circuited to Ground
alarm cannot be automatically cleared.
You need to manually clear the alarm.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Microgrid The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set

compatibility If the inverter and diesel generator run in incorrectly, the inverter may run
parallel, set this parameter to Enable. abnormally.
When Microgrid compatibility is set to
Enable, the grid-connected current source
inverter supports a higher ratio of PV to
energy storage in addition to the feature
of the original country grid code.

Grid phase loss This function is used to keep the inverter This parameter applies only to
adaptability operating in on-grid mode when an open some models. The actual display
phase fault occurs. By default, this may vary.
function is enabled for China's national ● Positive-sequence reactive
standards and disabled for other current limit during
standards. asymmetric LVRT (%) and
Positive- During asymmetric LVRT, the device needs Compensation angle during
sequence to limit the positive-sequence reactive ZVRT are displayed only
reactive current current. when LVRT is set to Enable.
limit during ● Reactive current limit
asymmetric LVRT during HVRT (%) is
(%) displayed only when HVRT is
set to Enable.
Negative- During asymmetric LVRT, the device needs
sequence to limit the negative-sequence reactive
reactive current current.
limit during VRT
(%)

Reactive current During HVRT, the device needs to limit the

limit during reactive current.
HVRT (%)

Min. active During VRT, the device needs to limit the

current during min. active current.
VRT (%)

Compensation By default, this function is enabled for

angle during China's national standards and disabled
ZVRT for other standards.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Reactive current Specifies the percentage of the reactive This parameter applies only to
compensation compensation current in the rated current some models. The actual display
bias during LVRT during LVRT. The default value is 0.0, and may vary.
the value range is [–100.0, 100.0]. ● Reactive current
Reactive current Specifies the percentage of the reactive compensation bias during
compensation compensation current in the rated current LVRT and Power dispatching
bias during HVRT during HVRT. The default value is 0.0, and hold time after LVRT are
the value range is [–100.0, 100.0]. displayed only when LVRT is
set to Enable.
Power Specifies the delay for the device to stop ● Reactive current
dispatching hold the power dispatching response after LVRT. compensation bias during
time after LVRT After the stopping state ends, the device HVRT and Power
starts to respond to the dispatching dispatching hold time after
command. The default value is 5000, and HVRT are displayed only
the value range is [0, 60000]. when HVRT is set to Enable.
Power Specifies the delay for the device to stop
dispatching hold the power dispatching response after
time after HVRT HVRT. After the stopping state ends, the
device starts to respond to the dispatching
command. The default value is 5000, and
the value range is [0, 60000].

Anti-rollback The default setting is Enable. ● This parameter applies only

● Enable: Enable the anti-rollback to some models. The actual
function. display may vary.
● Disable: Disable the anti-rollback ● If the parameter is set to
function. Enable, the software cannot
be rolled back to the source
version during the software
upgrade to prevent
vulnerabilities in the source
version from being exploited.

PV module short- The value ranges from 8.0 A to 20.0 A, -

circuit current with one decimal place reserved. The
single-side short-circuit current of the
connected PV module under STC is
available in the PV module parameters.

PV module The value ranges from 1.0 to 1.1, with one -

bifaciality factor decimal place reserved. Select 1.0 for
monofacial PV modules and 1.1 for bifacial
PV modules.

DC switch quick- The value ranges from –10.0 to –30.0. -

break protection When the inverter detects that the
threshold backfeed current exceeds the setting, it
immediately triggers disconnection.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 170

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Power Adjustment
Parameter Description Remarks

Remote power If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

schedule inverter responds to the scheduling
command from the remote port. If this
parameter is set to Disable, the
inverter does not respond to the
scheduling command from the remote
port.

Schedule instruction Specifies the validity period of the When this parameter is set to
valid duration (s) scheduling instruction. 0, the scheduling instruction
When this parameter is set to 0, the takes effect permanently.
scheduling instruction takes effect
permanently.

Maximum apparent Specifies the output upper threshold If the maximum active power
power (kVA) for the maximum apparent power to equals the value of
adapt to the capacity requirements of Smax_limit, this parameter is
standard and customized inverters. not displayed.

Maximum active power Specifies the output upper threshold -

(kW) for the maximum active power to
adapt to different market
requirements.

Shutdown at 0% power If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

limit inverter shuts down after receiving the
0% power limit command. If this
parameter is set to Disable, the
inverter does not shut down after
receiving the 0% power limit
command.

Active power change Specifies the change rate of the -

gradient (%/s) inverter active power.

Fixed active power Specifies the active power output of This parameter is displayed
derated (kW) the inverter by fixed value. when Remote power
schedule is set to Enable.
This parameter can be set to
27.5 kW at most for the
SUN2000-25KTL-US.

Active power Adjusts the active output power of the This parameter is displayed
percentage derating inverter by percentage. when Remote power
(%) If this parameter is set to 100, the schedule is set to Enable.
inverter provides the maximum output If this parameter is set to 100,
power. the inverter provides the
maximum output power.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Reactive power change Specifies the change rate of the -

gradient (%/s) inverter reactive power.

Plant active power Specifies the rate of active power rise -

gradient (min/100%) due to irradiance changes.

Filter duration for Specifies the period of active power -

average active power rise due to irradiance changes. This
(ms) parameter is used with Plant active
power gradient.

PF(U) voltage detection Specifies the time for filtering the grid -
filter time (s) voltage in the PF-U curve.

Reactive power Specifies the adjustment time for the -

adjustment time (s) reactive power to reach the target
value during reactive power
adjustment.

Power factor Specifies the power factor of the This parameter is displayed
inverter. when Remote power
schedule is set to Enable.
Reactive power Specifies the reactive power output by
compensation (Q/S) the inverter.

Reactive power During the reactive power -

compensation at night compensation at night, the reactive
(Q/S) power is scheduled by percentage.

Night-time reactive In some specific application scenarios, This parameter is displayed

power output a power grid company requires that when Isolation is set to Input
the inverter can perform reactive ungrounded (with TF).
power compensation at night to
ensure that the power factor of the
local power grid meets requirements.

Apply nighttime If this parameter is set to Enable, the This parameter is displayed
reactive power inverter outputs reactive power based when Reactive power output
parameters on the setting of Reactive power at night is set to Enable.
output at night. Otherwise, the
inverter executes the remote
scheduling command.

Reactive power During the reactive power This parameter is displayed

compensation at night compensation at night, the reactive when Reactive power output
(kVar) power is scheduled by fixed value. at night and Apply nighttime
reactive power parameters
are set to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 172

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Overfrequency-caused If this parameter is set to Enable, -

power derating when the power grid frequency
exceeds the frequency threshold for
triggering overfrequency-caused
power derating, the active power of
the inverter is derated based on a
certain gradient.

Frequency threshold for The standards of certain countries and ● This parameter is displayed
triggering regions require that the output active when Overfrequency
overfrequency-caused power of the inverter be derated when derating is set to Enable.
power derating (Hz) the power grid frequency exceeds a ● When setting this
certain value. parameter, ensure that the
Frequency threshold for Specifies the frequency threshold for following condition is met:
exiting overfrequency- exiting overfrequency-caused power Frequency for exiting
caused power derating derating. overfrequency derating ≤
(Hz) Frequency for triggering
overfrequency derating <
Frequency threshold for Specifies the frequency threshold for Cutoff frequency of
stopping stopping overfrequency-caused power overfrequency derating.
overfrequency-caused derating.
power derating (Hz)

Power threshold for Specifies the power threshold for

stopping stopping overfrequency-caused power
overfrequency-caused derating.
power derating (%)

Frequency detection Specifies the frequency detection filter

filter time (ms) time.

Gradient of Specifies the rate of overfrequency-

overfrequency-caused caused power derating.
power derating (%/s)

Gradient of power Specifies the power recovery rate for

recovery from overfrequency-caused power derating.
overfrequency-caused
derating (%/min)

Voltage derating If this parameter is set to Enable, -

when the grid voltage exceeds the
voltage derating start point, the active
power of the inverter is derated based
on a certain gradient.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Voltage derating start Specifies the start point for voltage ● This parameter is displayed
point (V) derating. when Voltage derating is
set to Enable.
Voltage derating stop Specifies the stop point for voltage
point (V) derating. ● When setting this
parameter, ensure that the
Voltage derating cut- Specifies the cut-off power for voltage following condition is met:
off power (V) derating. Voltage derating start
point < Voltage derating
stop point.

Protection upon In the inverter export limitation -

communication failure scenario, if this parameter is set to
Enable, the inverter will derate
according to the active power derating
percentage when the communication
between the inverter and the
SmartLogger or Smart Dongle is
disconnected for a period longer than
Communication disconnection
detection time.

Communication Specifies the detection time for This parameter is displayed

disconnection detection protection upon a communication when Communication
time (s) failure between the inverter and the disconnection fail-safe is set
SmartLogger or Smart Dongle. to Enable.

Active power output Specifies the derating value of the

limit for fail-safe (%) inverter active power by percentage.

Apparent power Adjusts the apparent output baseline The apparent power baseline
baseline (kVA) of the inverter. must be greater than or equal
to the active power baseline.

Active power baseline Adjusts the active output baseline of -

(kW) the inverter.

Frequency-based The standards of certain countries and -

control regions require that if the power grid
frequency fluctuates around the rated
value, the inverter needs to fine-tune
the active power output based on
Frequency-based adjustment ratio to
help stabilize the power grid
frequency. In this case, set this
parameter to Enable.

Frequency-based Specifies the adjustment ratio of the This parameter is displayed

adjustment ratio active power output. when Frequency-based
control is set to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 174

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Underfrequency-caused The standards of certain countries and -

power raising regions require that if the power grid
frequency is lower than Frequency
threshold for triggering
underfrequency-caused power
raising, the inverter needs to increase
the active power output to increase
the power grid frequency. In this case,
set this parameter to Enable.

Frequency threshold for Specifies the frequency threshold for This parameter is displayed
triggering triggering underfrequency-caused when Underfrequency rise
underfrequency-caused power raising. power is set to Enable.
power raising (Hz)

Gradient of Specifies the power recovery rate for

underfrequency-caused underfrequency-caused power raising.
power raising (%/min)

Frequency threshold for Specifies the frequency threshold for

stopping stopping underfrequency-caused
underfrequency-caused power raising.
power raising (Hz)

Power threshold for Specifies the power threshold for

stopping stopping underfrequency-caused
underfrequency-caused power raising.
power raising (%)

Frequency threshold for Specifies the frequency threshold for

exiting underfrequency- exiting underfrequency-caused power
caused power raising raising.
(Hz)

Insulation resistance ● Enable: Enable the function of ● This parameter applies only
inspection during insulation resistance inspection to some models. The actual
reactive power output during reactive power output at display may vary.
at night night. ● This parameter is displayed
● Disable: Disable the function of when Reactive power
insulation resistance inspection output at night is set to
during reactive power output at Enable.
night. ● If this parameter is set to
Enable, the device
automatically detects the
status every night. During
the detection, the device
automatically resets.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 175

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

PV String Access Detection

● PV string access detection applies to large-scale commercial ground PV plants
with PV strings facing the same direction.
● In AC or DC power limiting scenarios:
– If the PV string access type has not been identified, PV string N access
status will be displayed as Disconnection. The PV string access type can
be identified only when the solar inverters restore to the non-power
limiting state and the current of all connected PV strings reaches the
startup current.
– If the PV string access type has been identified, when a certain PV string
connected to the 2-in-1 terminals is lost, no alarm will be generated. If a
certain PV string connected to the 2-in-1 terminals is restored, the access
type cannot be identified. You can determine whether both 2-in-1 PV
strings are restored only when the PV string current reaches Startup
current for 2-in-1 detection.
● After setting the parameters, you can go to the Running Info. tab page to
check whether the PV string connection status is normal.

Table 6-14 Parameter description

Parameter Description

PV String Access Detection PV String Access Detection is set to Disable by default. After solar
inverters are connected to the power grid, set PV String Access
Detection to Enable.

Startup current When the current of all connected PV strings reaches the preset
value, the PV string access detection function is enabled.
NOTE
Startup current setting rules:
● Startup current = Isc (Stc) x 0.6 (rounded up). For details about Isc (Stc), see
the PV module nameplate.
● Default startup current (5 A): applicable to the scenarios where the short-
circuit current Isc (Stc) is greater than 8 A for the monocrystalline and
polycrystalline PV modules.

Startup current for 2-in-1 When the current of a PV string reaches Startup current for 2-in-1
detection detection, the PV string is automatically identified as 2-in-1.
You are advised to retain the default settings.

PV string N access type Set this parameter based on the type of the PV string connected to
NOTE DC input terminal N of the solar inverter. Currently, the options are
N is the DC input terminal as follows: Automatic identification (default value), Disconnection,
number of the solar inverter. Single PV string, and 2-in-1.
You are advised to retain the default value. If the value is incorrectly
set, the PV string access type may be incorrectly identified and
alarms may be generated by mistake for the PV string access status.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.9.2 Tracking System

● The web software versions corresponding to the WebUI screenshots in this
document are V300R001C00SPC050. The screenshots are for reference only.
● If a PV string uses a tracking system with a controller, set tracking system
parameters on the Tracking System tab page.

Procedure
1. Before setting the tracking system parameters, you need to set Tracker
controller in Feature Parameters on the Running Param. tab page. Select
the corresponding vendor based on the information about the tracker
controller. If the vendor is not in the list, select Other vendors.
NOTE

This section uses Other vendors as an example.

Figure 6-50 Setting tracking system controller

2. On the Tracking System tab page, select Configure Para.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-51 Setting configuration parameters (tracking system)

Parameter Description

Working mode Six working modes are supported: Automatic

control, Manual control, Maintenance mode,
Wind mode, Snow mode, and Rain mode.
Set Working mode based on the actual operating
status of the inverter.

Support system type Four types of trackers are supported: Tilted single
axis, Horizontal single axis, Vertical single axis,
and Dual axis.
NOTE
The tracker type can be set only when Tonking or Crystal
Growing Technology is selected. For other vendors, the
tracker type is automatically selected based on the
inverter configuration.

Controller time This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable.

synchronization After this parameter is set to Enable, the time is
synchronized with the tracking system every 15
minutes.

Protocol version of When Crystal Growing Technology is selected,

Crystal Growing you can set this parameter to New protocol or Old
Technology protocol based on the site requirements.

Southbound RS485 This parameter can be set to None, Odd parity, or

check Even parity.

Southbound RS485 This parameter can be set to 4800, 9600, 19200, or

baud rate 115200.

Southbound RS485 This parameter can be set to 1-bit stop bit or 2-bit
stop bit stop bit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 178

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Control period When Tonking is selected, you can set the period
for refreshing the target angle.

Installation longitude The longitude and latitude can be set.

Installation latitude

Total number of The inverter obtains the number of supports under

supports each control box based on the configured number
and addresses of the control boxes, and calculates
and obtains the total number of supports.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Tonking or Crystal
Growing Technology is selected.

Max. concurrently When Tonking is selected, this parameter can be

controlled motors set.

Time zone The time zone can be set.

Sensor measurement When Tonking is selected, this parameter can be

range set.

Control precision When Tonking is selected, this parameter can be

set.

Tilt angle control These parameters can be set only when Work
upper limit mode is set to Manual control.

Tilt angle control

lower limit

Azimuth control
upper limit

Azimuth control lower

limit

Number of control Set this parameter based on the number of control

boxes boxes connected to the inverter.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Other vendors is
selected.

Control address 1–16 Set this parameter based on the communication

address of the control box.
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Other vendors is
selected.

3. On the Tracking System tab page, check Total number of supports under
Support System and check whether Access Status and System Status are
normal.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

● Check whether the value of Total number of supports is the same as that in
Configure Para.
● If Working mode in Configure Para is set to Manual control, you can manually
set parameters such as Starting, Stop, Clr Fault, and Azimuth under Support
System.

Figure 6-52 Support system (tracking system)

6.3.9.3 Characteristic Curves

The web software versions corresponding to the WebUI screenshots in this
document are V300R001C00SPC050. The screenshots are for reference only.

Step 1 Set characteristic curve parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-53 Characteristic curves

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 180

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Characteristic Curve Description Remarks

Name

LVRT Characteristic Curve Configure this characteristic The SmartLogger

curve based on the power grid supports only the
standard. characteristic
curve
configuration for
LVRT that lasts no
more than 60s. If
the power grid
standard requires
that the duration
of LVRT be
greater than 60s,
LVRT
Characteristic
Curve is not
displayed for the
grid code.

[Voltage Rise 1. Set Voltage Rise -

Suppression]Q-U curve Suppression to Enable.
2. Configure this characteristic
curve based on the power
grid standard.

[Voltage Rise 1. Set Voltage Rise -

Suppression]P-U curve Suppression to Enable.
2. Configure this characteristic
curve based on the power
grid standard.

HVRT characteristic curve Set the high voltage ride- ● This parameter
through capability of the applies only to
device. some models.
The actual
display may
vary.
● This parameter
is displayed
only when
HVRT is set to
Enable.

----End

6.3.9.4 Battery
This section describes how to query or set battery parameters when the inverter is
connected to a battery.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 181

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Battery Information
Parameter Description

Working status Indicates the current working status of the

battery, which can be Offline, Idle, Running,
Faulty, or Hibernating.

Working mode Indicates the current working mode of the

inverter battery control.

Charge/Discharge power Total charge and discharge power of all

batteries connected to the inverter.

SOC Indicates the power status of all batteries

connected to the inverter.

Bus voltage Indicates the voltage on the DC bus of the

battery.

Bus current Indicates the current on the DC bus of the

battery.

Rated capacity Total rated capacity of all batteries connected

to the inverter. The rated capacity refers to the
total amount of energy discharged by the
batteries in normal conditions.

Current-day charge capacity Total energy charged into the batteries on the
current day.

Current-day discharge capacity Total energy discharged from the batteries on

the current day.

Total charge Total energy charged into the batteries.

Total discharge Total energy discharged from the batteries.

Energy Storage Unit

Parameter Description

Firmware version Software version of the DC/DC module.

SN Serial number of the DC/DC module.

Working status Indicates the current working status of the energy

storage unit, which can be Offline, Idle, Running,
Faulty, or Hibernating.

Rated capacity Total amount of energy discharged by the energy

storage unit in normal conditions.

Voltage Voltage of the energy storage unit.

Current Current of the energy storage unit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Internal temperature Temperature inside the energy storage unit.

SOC Indicates the power status of the energy storage

unit.

Charge/Discharge power Indicates the charge or discharge power of the

energy storage unit.

Current-day charge Total energy charged into the energy storage unit
capacity on the current day.

Current-day discharge Total energy discharged from the energy storage

capacity unit on the current day.

Total charge Total energy charged into the energy storage unit.

Total discharge Total energy discharged from the energy storage

unit.

Battery model Models of the energy storage unit, including LG-

RESU and LUNA2000.

Battery Firmware Software version of the battery pack.

pack version

SN Serial number of the battery pack.

Working Indicates the current working status of the

status battery pack, which can be Offline, Idle,
Running, Faulty, or Hibernating.

Voltage Voltage of the battery pack.

Charge/ Indicates the charge or discharge power of the

Discharge energy storage unit.
power

Highest Indicates the highest temperature detected in the

temperature battery pack.

Lowest Indicates the lowest temperature detected in the

temperature battery pack.

SOC Power status of the battery pack.

Total Total energy discharged from the battery pack.

discharge

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 183

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Configurable Parameters
Parameter Description

Energy Storage Unit Displays or sets the battery model. The system
automatically identifies and displays the
correct model. Generally, you do not need to
manually modify the information.

Maximum charge power Sets the maximum power for battery charging.

Maximum discharge power Sets the maximum power for battery

discharging.

Charge from AC If this parameter is set to Enable, the batteries

can be charged from the power grid.

Maximum charge power of Sets the maximum power for charging the
grid batteries from the power grid.

Charge cutoff capacity When the SOC of the battery reaches this
value, charging stops.

Max. depth of discharge When the SOC of the battery reaches this
value, discharging stops.

Grid charge cutoff SOC When the SOC of the battery reaches this
value, the grid stops charging the battery.

Charge/Discharge
Parameter Description

Charge/Discharge Forced charge/discharge operation, which can

be Charge, Discharge, or Stop.

Mode Settings To enter the forced charge/discharge mode, set

Duration or Target SOC.

Duration Sets the duration of forced charge/discharge.

When the time is reached, the forced charge/
discharge stops automatically. This parameter
is displayed when Mode Settings is set to
Duration.

Target SOC Sets the target SOC for forced charge/

discharge. When the SOC reaches this value,
the forced charge/discharge stops
automatically. This parameter is displayed
when Mode Settings is set to Target SOC.

Charged energy Charged energy in this forced charge/discharge

Discharged energy Discharged energy in this forced charge/

discharge

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.10 Setting PCS Parameters (100KTL and 200KTL Series)

This section describes how to set PCS parameters for the LUNA2000-100KTL and
LUNA2000-200KTL series. This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Monitoring > PCS > Running Param., set running parameters, and click
Submit.

NOTICE

● Before setting the running parameters of the Smart PCS, ensure that the DC
side of the Smart PCS is powered on.
● The parameter list provided in this document includes all configurable
parameters, which may vary depending on the device model. The actual display
may vary.

----End

6.3.10.1 Running Parameters

Grid Parameters
Parameter Description

Grid code Set this parameter based on the grid code of the country or region
where the device is used.

Output mode Specifies the supported power grid types.

Isolation settings Specifies the device grounding status on the DC side and the
connection to the power grid.

Auto start upon grid Specifies whether to allow the device to automatically start after the
recovery power grid recovers.

On-grid recovery time Specifies the time after which the device begins restarting after the
(s) power grid recovers.

Quick startup for short- Specifies whether to allow the device to quickly start after the power
time grid disconnection grid recovers from a short-time failure.

Duration for determining The standards of certain countries and regions require that the device
short-time grid should not disconnect from the power grid if the power grid
disconnection (ms) experiences a short-time failure. After the fault is rectified, the device
output power needs to be quickly restored.

Soft start time after grid Specifies the time for the power to gradually increase when the device
failure (s) restarts after the power grid recovers.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 185

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Upper voltage threshold According to the standards of certain countries and regions, initial grid
(V) for grid connection connection is not allowed when the grid voltage is higher than the
maximum voltage for grid connection.

Lower voltage threshold According to the standards of certain countries and regions, initial grid
(V) for grid connection connection is not allowed when the grid voltage is lower than the
minimum voltage for grid connection.

Upper frequency According to the standards of certain countries and regions, initial grid
threshold (Hz) for grid connection is not allowed when the grid frequency is higher than the
connection maximum frequency for grid connection.

Lower frequency According to the standards of certain countries and regions, initial grid
threshold (Hz) for grid connection is not allowed when the grid frequency is lower than the
connection minimum frequency for grid connection.

Grid reconnection According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
voltage upper limit (V) reconnection is not allowed when the grid voltage is higher than the
maximum voltage for grid reconnection.

Grid reconnection According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
voltage lower limit (V) reconnection is not allowed when the grid voltage is lower than the
minimum grid voltage for grid reconnection.

Grid reconnection According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
frequency upper limit reconnection is not allowed when the grid frequency is higher than
(Hz) the maximum grid frequency for grid reconnection.

Grid reconnection According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
frequency lower limit reconnection is not allowed when the grid frequency is lower than the
(Hz) minimum grid frequency for grid reconnection.

Grid automatic Specifies the time after which the device begins restarting after the
reconnection time power grid recovers.

Protection Parameters
Parameter Description

Insulation resistance protection To ensure device safety, the device detects the insulation
threshold (MΩ) resistance of the DC side to the ground when it starts a self-
check. If the detected value is less than the preset value, the
device does not connect to the grid nor start.

Active islanding protection Specifies whether to enable the active islanding protection
function.

Passive islanding protection Specifies whether to enable the passive islanding protection
function.

Unbalance voltage protection Specifies the device protection threshold when the power grid
(%) voltage is unbalanced.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 186

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Phase protection threshold (°) The Japanese standard requires that during passive islanding
detection, the protection should be triggered if an abrupt
voltage phase change is detected.

Phase angle offset protection The standards of certain countries and regions require that the
device needs to be protected when the phase angle offset of
the power grid three phases exceeds a certain value.

10-minute UV protection Specifies the 10-minute undervoltage protection threshold.

10-minute UV protection time Specifies the 10-minute undervoltage protection duration.

10 minute OV protection (V) Specifies the 10-minute overvoltage protection threshold.

10 minute OV protection time Specifies the 10-minute overvoltage protection duration.

(ms)

Level-N OV protection (V) Specifies the level-N grid overvoltage protection threshold.

Level-N OV protection time Specifies the level-N grid overvoltage protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N UV protection (V) Specifies the level-N grid undervoltage protection threshold.

Level-N UV protection time Specifies the level-N grid undervoltage protection duration.
(ms)

Frequency change rate If this parameter is set to Enable, the device is protected when
protection the power grid frequency changes too fast.

Frequency change rate Specifies the frequency change rate protection threshold.
protection threshold (Hz/s)

Duration threshold (s) for The device is protected when the grid frequency change
frequency change rate duration exceeds the value.
protection

Level-N OF protection (Hz) Specifies the level-N grid overfrequency protection threshold.

Level-N OF protection time Specifies the level-N grid overfrequency protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N UF protection (Hz) Specifies the level-N grid underfrequency protection threshold.

Level-N UF protection time Specifies the level-N grid underfrequency protection duration.
(ms)

NOTE

N can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 187

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Feature Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Communication Specifies the duration for determining -

interruption communication interruption between the device and
duration the SmartLogger.

Shutdown on The standards of certain countries and regions If this parameter is set
communication require that the device shut down after the to Enable, the device
failure communication is interrupted for a certain time. automatically shuts
down after the
Communication
interruption duration is
reached.

Automatic If this parameter is set to Enable, the device This parameter is

startup upon automatically starts after communication recovers. displayed when the
communication If this parameter is set to Disable, the device needs Shutdown on
recovery to be started manually after communication communication failure
recovers. is set to Enable.

Protection upon If this parameter is set to Enable, the device -

communication performs protection based on the preset power
failure when its communication with the SmartLogger is
interrupted for a period longer than
Communication disconnection detection time.

Communication Specifies the detection time for protection upon a This parameter is
disconnection communication failure between the device and the displayed when
detection time SmartLogger or Smart Dongle. Protection upon
(s) communication failure
is set to Enable.

Active power Specifies the protection mode of the active power This parameter is
mode when after the communication is interrupted. The value displayed when
communication can be Percentage or Fixed value. Protection upon
fails communication failure
is set to Enable.

Active power Specifies the active power threshold in percentage. This parameter is
limit when displayed when
communication Protection in the case
fails of communication
(%) failure is set to Enable
and Active power
threshold when
communication fails is
set to a percentage.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Active power Specifies the active power threshold as a fixed value. This parameter is
limit when displayed when
communication Protection upon
fails communication failure
(kW) is set to Enable and
Active power mode
when communication
fails is set to Fixed
value.

Reactive power Specifies the protection mode of the reactive power This parameter is
mode when after the communication is interrupted. The value displayed when
communication can be Q/S or Power factor. Protection upon
fails communication failure
is set to Enable.

Reactive power Specifies the Q/S threshold (%) of the reactive This parameter is
limit when power. displayed when
communication Protection upon
fails (%) communication failure
is set to Enable and
Reactive power mode
when communication
fails is set to Power
factor.

Reactive power Specifies the power factor threshold of the reactive This parameter is
limit when power. displayed when the
communication Protection in the case
fails of communication
failure is set to Enable
and Reactive power
mode when
communication fails is
set to Q/S.

Soft start time Specifies the duration for the power to gradually -
(s) increase until the device starts.

Shutdown Specifies the power change rate until the device -

gradient (%/s) shuts down.

Shutdown at If this parameter is set to Enable, the device shuts -

0% power limit down after receiving the 0% power limit command.
If this parameter is set to Disable, the device does
not shut down after receiving the 0% power limit
command.

Hibernate at The device performs the monitoring function at -

night night. If this parameter is set to Enable, the
monitoring function of the device will hibernate at
night to reduce power consumption.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 189

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Delayed This parameter is mainly used in the upgrade After the upgrade starts,
upgrade scenarios where the power supply on the DC side is if Delayed upgrade is
disconnected. set to Enable, the
upgrade package is
loaded first. After the DC
side power supply
recovers and the
activation conditions are
met, the device
automatically activates
the upgrade.

HVRT HVRT is short for high voltage ride-through. When -

the grid voltage is abnormally high for a short time,
the device cannot disconnect from the power grid
immediately and has to work for some time.

HVRT threshold Specifies the threshold for triggering HVRT. The This parameter is
(V) threshold settings should meet the local grid displayed when HVRT is
standard. set to Enable.

Positive- During HVRT, the device needs to generate positive-

sequence sequence reactive power to support the power grid.
reactive power This parameter is used to set the positive-sequence
compensation reactive power generated by the device.
factor in HVRT For example, if you set this parameter to 2, the
increment of positive-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of the rated current
when the AC voltage increases by 10% during HVRT.

Negative- During HVRT, the device needs to generate

sequence negative-sequence reactive power to support the
reactive power power grid. This parameter is used to set the
compensation negative-sequence reactive power generated by the
factor in HVRT device.
For example, if you set this parameter to 2, the
increment of negative-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of the rated current
when the AC voltage increases by 10% during HVRT.

LVRT LVRT is short for low voltage ride-through. When -

the grid voltage is abnormally low for a short time,
the device cannot disconnect from the power grid
immediately and has to work for some time.

LVRT threshold Specifies the threshold for triggering LVRT. The This parameter is
(V) threshold settings should meet the local grid displayed when LVRT is
standard. set to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Positive- During LVRT, the device needs to generate positive-

sequence sequence reactive power to support the power grid.
reactive power This parameter is used to set the positive-sequence
compensation reactive power generated by the device.
factor in LVRT For example, if you set this parameter to 2, the
increment of positive-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of the rated current
when the AC voltage decreases by 10% during LVRT.

Negative- During LVRT, the device needs to generate negative-

sequence sequence reactive power to support the power grid.
reactive power This parameter is used to set the negative-sequence
compensation reactive power generated by the device.
factor in LVRT For example, if you set this parameter to 2, the
increment of negative-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of the rated current
when the AC voltage decreases by 10% during LVRT.

LVRT active Specifies the active current proportional coefficient

current before and during LVRT.
maintenance
coefficient

LVRT reactive During LVRT, the device needs to limit the reactive
current limiting current.
(%) For example, if you set this parameter to 50, the
reactive current upper limit of the device is 50% of
the rated current during LVRT.

Threshold of If Zero-current mode on power grid fault is

LVRT zero- enabled and the power grid voltage is less than
current mode Threshold of LVRT zero-current mode during LVRT,
the zero-current mode is used. Otherwise, the mode
set in LVRT mode is used.

LVRT mode Specifies the LVRT mode. The options are Zero-
current mode, Constant current mode, Reactive
power priority mode, and Active power priority
mode.

LVRT Specifies the LVRT capability of the device. -

characteristic
curve

Deactivate grid Specifies whether to shield the voltage protection This parameter is
voltage function during LVRT or HVRT. displayed when LVRT or
protection HVRT is set to Enable.
during HVRT/
LVRT

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 191

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

VRT exit Specifies the LVRT/HVRT recovery threshold. ● This parameter is

hysteresis displayed when LVRT
threshold or HVRT is set to
Enable.
● LVRT recovery
threshold = LVRT
threshold + VRT exit
hysteresis threshold
● HVRT recovery
threshold = HVRT
threshold – VRT exit
hysteresis threshold

VRT active Specifies the percentage of the maximum active -

current limiting current to the rated current during fault ride-
(%) through (FRT).

VRT active Specifies the recovery rate when the active current is -
power recovery restored to the value at the moment before fault
gradient ride-through.

Zero current Specifies whether to enable the function of working -

due to power in zero-current mode upon a power grid fault.
grid fault

Grid voltage This parameter can be set only for the VDE4120. -
trip triggering
threshold

Voltage rise The standards of certain countries and regions -

suppression require that the device suppress voltage rise by
outputting reactive power and reducing active
power when the output voltage exceeds a certain
value.

Reactive power The standards of certain countries and regions ● This parameter is
adjustment require that the device generate a certain amount of displayed when
threshold (%) reactive power when the output voltage exceeds a Voltage rise
for voltage rise certain value. suppression is set to
suppression Enable.
● The value of Active
power derating
threshold for
voltage rise
suppression must be
greater than that of
Reactive power
adjustment
threshold for
voltage rise
suppression.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Active power The standards of certain countries and regions -

derating require that the active power of the device be
threshold (%) derated based on a certain gradient when the
for voltage rise output voltage exceeds a certain value.
suppression

P-U The device adjusts P/Pn (the ratio of the active -

characteristic power to the rated power) in real time based on U/
curve Un(%) (the ratio of the actual power grid voltage
to the rated power grid voltage).

P-U Specifies the time from the response to the end of -

characteristic the adjustment based on the P-U curve.
curve
adjustment
time

Frequency- The standards of certain countries and regions -

based control require that if the power grid frequency fluctuates
around the rated value, the device needs to fine-
tune the active power output based on Frequency-
based adjustment ratio to help stabilize the power
grid frequency. In this case, set this parameter to
Enable.

Frequency- Specifies the adjustment ratio of the active power This parameter is
based output. displayed when
adjustment Frequency-based
ratio control is set to Enable.

Response Specifies the threshold for triggering frequency- -

deadband of based control. For example, if this parameter is set
frequency- to 0.1 Hz, the frequency-based control is not
based control triggered when the frequency is within reference
frequency±0.1 Hz.

Power change Specifies the active power change gradient of -

gradient of frequency-based control.
frequency-
based control

Power change Specifies the upper limit for active power -

limit of adjustment in frequency-based control.
frequency-
based control

Delay response Specifies the delay response time of frequency- -

time of based control.
frequency-
based control

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 193

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Overfrequency- If this parameter is set to Enable, when the power -

caused power grid frequency exceeds the frequency threshold for
derating triggering overfrequency-caused power derating, the
active power of the device is derated based on a
certain gradient.

Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for stopping ● This parameter is

threshold for overfrequency-caused power derating. displayed when
stopping Overfrequency-
overfrequency- caused power
caused power derating is set to
derating (Hz) Enable.

Power Specifies the power threshold for stopping ● When setting this
threshold for overfrequency-caused power derating. parameter, ensure
stopping that the following
overfrequency- condition is met:
caused power Frequency threshold
derating (%) for exiting
overfrequency-
Frequency The standards of certain countries and regions caused power
threshold for require that the output active power of the device derating ≤
triggering be derated when the power grid frequency exceeds Frequency threshold
overfrequency- a certain value. for triggering
caused power overfrequency-
derating (Hz) caused power
derating <
Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for exiting Frequency threshold
threshold for overfrequency derating. for stopping
exiting overfrequency-
overfrequency- caused power
caused power derating.
derating (Hz)

Power drop Specifies the rate of overfrequency-caused power

gradient of derating.
overfrequency
derating (%/s)

Gradient of Specifies the power recovery rate for overfrequency-

power recovery caused power derating.
from
overfrequency-
caused derating
(%/min)

Frequency Specifies the frequency detection filter time. -

detection filter
time (ms)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 194

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Recovery delay Specifies the exit delay time after the frequency -
of frequency- reaches the frequency threshold for exiting
based active overfrequency-caused power derating.
power derating

Execution delay Specifies the execution delay time of overfrequency- -

of frequency- caused power derating after the frequency reaches
based active the frequency threshold for triggering
power derating overfrequency-caused power derating.

Hysteresis of Specifies whether to enable the hysteresis of -

frequency- overfrequency-caused power derating.
based active
power derating

Underfrequency The standards of certain countries and regions -

-caused power require that the device need to increase the active
raising power output to increase the power grid frequency
if the power grid frequency is lower than Frequency
threshold for triggering underfrequency-caused
power raising. In this case, set this parameter to
Enable.

Gradient of Specifies the power recovery rate for This parameter is

underfrequency underfrequency-caused power raising. displayed when
-caused power Underfrequency-caused
raising (%/min) power raising is set to
Enable.
Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for stopping
threshold for underfrequency-caused power raising.
stopping
underfrequency
-caused power
raising (Hz)

Power Specifies the power threshold for stopping

threshold for underfrequency-caused power raising.
stopping
underfrequency
-caused power
raising (%)

Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for triggering

threshold for underfrequency-caused power raising.
triggering
underfrequency
-caused power
raising (Hz)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 195

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for exiting

threshold for underfrequency-caused power raising.
exiting
underfrequency
-caused power
raising (Hz)

O&M via USB Specifies the USB O&M port status: Always on, Off -
connection in idle state, or Always off.

USB wakeup Used to remotely wake up the USB O&M port. After -
being idle for 4 hours, the port is automatically
disabled.

Quick startup The default value is Disable. Specifies whether to -

for short-time allow the device to quickly start after the power grid
grid recovers from a short-time failure.
disconnection

Microgrid The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set

compatibility If the PCS and diesel generator run in parallel and incorrectly, the Smart
the PCS works in PQ mode, set this parameter to PCS may run abnormally.
Enable. When Microgrid compatibility is set to
Enable, the grid-connected current source PCS
supports a higher ratio of PV to energy storage in
addition to the feature of the original grid code.

Working mode The default value is PQ. You need to set the working After this parameter is
mode during deployment. Set Working mode to set, the device shuts
VSG in off-grid scenarios and PQ in grid-tied down.
scenarios.

Per unit The default value is 2. Specifies the resistance per This parameter is
armature unit value for armature windings of the virtual displayed when
resistance synchronous generator. Working mode is set to
VSG.
Per unit The default value is 1. Specifies the inductive
NOTE
armature reactance per unit value for armature windings of This parameter must be
inductive the virtual synchronous generator. set by professional
reactance personnel. Improper
settings may cause device
Off-grid VSG The default value is 0.9. Specifies the time required exceptions.
Inertia Time for the virtual rotor of the virtual synchronous
Constant generator to reach the rated speed from the static
state under the rated torque.

P-F adjustment The default value is 1. Specifies the frequency

coefficient deviation corresponding to the rated active power of
the virtual synchronous generator.

Q-V adjustment The default value is 3. Specifies the voltage

coefficient deviation corresponding to the rated reactive power
of the virtual synchronous generator.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 196

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

P-V adjustment The default value is 0. Specifies the voltage

coefficient deviation corresponding to the rated active power of
the virtual synchronous generator.

Q-F adjustment The default value is 0. Specifies the frequency

coefficient deviation corresponding to the rated reactive power
of the virtual synchronous generator.

VSG output The default value is 100. Corrects the deviation

voltage caused by the transformer ratio error.
correction
coefficient

VSG output The default value is 100. Corrects the PCS output
frequency frequency deviation.
correction
coefficient

VSG frequency The default value is 7.2. Specifies the power factor
damping that prevents the frequency change of the virtual
coefficient synchronous generator.

VSG excitation The default value is 0. Specifies the time required

time constant for the excitation of the virtual synchronous
generator to reach the rated voltage.

VSG excitation The default value is 0. Specifies the power factor

damping that prevents the voltage change of the virtual
coefficient synchronous generator.

Wired carrier Enables or disables wired carrier synchronization. -

synchronization The default value is Disable.

Delay The default value is 0. Specifies the value of delay This parameter is
compensation compensation for wired carrier synchronization. displayed when Wired
for wired carrier synchronization
carrier is set to Enable.
synchronization

Wired power Enables or disables wired power frequency -

frequency synchronization. The default value is Disable.
synchronization

Delay The default value is 0. Specifies the value of delay This parameter is
compensation compensation for wired power frequency displayed when Wired
for wired power synchronization. power frequency
frequency synchronization is set to
synchronization Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 197

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Voltage The default value is 0. Specifies the adjustment ● Value range: [–10.0,
adjustment value of the PCS control output voltage in VSG 10.0]
value for VSG mode. ● The value is adjusted
synchronous based on the offset
control (%) per unit value. For
example, if the rated
output voltage is 800
V and the output
voltage needs to be
adjusted to 805 V, the
adjustment value is
5/800 x 100%.

Frequency The default value is 0. Specifies the adjustment ● Value range: [–10.0,
adjustment value of the PCS output frequency in VSG mode. 10.0]
value for VSG ● The value is adjusted
synchronous based on the offset
control (%) per unit value. For
example, if the rated
output frequency is
50 Hz and the output
frequency needs to be
adjusted to 50.5 Hz,
the adjustment value
is 0.5/50 x 100%.

Scenario[1] Specifies the on-grid/off-grid scenario. The default Before submitting new
value is On-grid. settings, you need to
enter the login password
for authentication.

Harmonic Specifies harmonic voltage or harmonic current as Before submitting new

Optimization the object of power quality optimization. The settings, you need to
Type[1] default value is Harmonic voltage. enter the login password
for authentication.

Auto switching The default value is Disable. -

between Disable: On/Off-grid switching can be performed
working and the PCS must be shut down before the
modes[1] switching.
Enable: On/Off-grid switching can be performed
automatically and the PCS does not need to be shut
down before the switching.

Working mode The default value is 60. Time for other instructions -
switching to take effect during PCS working mode switching.
delay[1] The value range is [10, 300] (unit: s).

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Reactive Specifies the percentage of the reactive This parameter applies

current compensation current in the rated current during only to some models.
compensation LVRT. The default value is 0.0, and the value range is The actual display may
bias during [–100.0, 100.0]. vary.
LVRT ● Reactive current
Reactive Specifies the percentage of the reactive compensation bias
current compensation current in the rated current during during LVRT and
compensation HVRT. The default value is 0.0, and the value range Power dispatching
bias during is [–100.0, 100.0]. hold time after LVRT
HVRT are displayed only
when LVRT is set to
Power Specifies the delay for the device to stop the power Enable.
dispatching dispatching response after LVRT. After the stopping ● Reactive current
hold time after state ends, the device starts to respond to the compensation bias
LVRT dispatching command. The default value is 5000, during HVRT and
and the value range is [0, 60000]. Power dispatching
hold time after
Power Specifies the delay for the device to stop the power
HVRT are displayed
dispatching dispatching response after HVRT. After the stopping
only when HVRT is
hold time after state ends, the device starts to respond to the
set to Enable.
HVRT dispatching command. The default value is 5000,
and the value range is [0, 60000].

Anti-rollback The default setting is Enable. ● This parameter

● Enable: Enable the anti-rollback function. applies only to some
models. The actual
● Disable: Disable the anti-rollback function. display may vary.
● If the parameter is set
to Enable, the
software cannot be
rolled back to the
source version during
the software upgrade
to prevent
vulnerabilities in the
source version from
being exploited.

Note [1]: This parameter can be set only in SmartLogger V300R023C10 and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 199

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Power Adjustment
Parameter Description Remarks

Remote power If this parameter is set to Enable, the -

scheduling device responds to the scheduling
instruction from the remote port. If this
parameter is set to Disable, the device
does not respond to the scheduling
instruction from the remote port.

Schedule instruction Specifies the validity period of the When this parameter is set to 0,
valid duration (s) scheduling instruction. the scheduling instruction takes
effect permanently.

Active power change Specifies the change rate of the device This parameter is displayed
gradient (%/s) active power. when Remote power
scheduling is set to Enable.
Active power (kW) Adjusts the active power output of the
device by fixed value.

Active power (%) Adjusts the active power output of the

device by percentage.

Reactive power Specifies the change rate of the device

change gradient reactive power.
(%/s)

Power factor Specifies the power factor of the

device.

Reactive power Specifies the reactive power of the

compensation (Q/S) device.

Reactive power at In some specific application scenarios, This parameter is displayed

night a power grid company requires that when Isolation is set to Input
the device can perform reactive power ungrounded (with TF).
compensation at night to ensure that
the power factor of the local power
grid meets requirements.

Enable reactive If this parameter is set to Enable, the This parameter is displayed
power parameters at device outputs reactive power based on when Reactive power at night
night the setting of Reactive power output is set to Enable.
at night. Otherwise, the device
executes the remote scheduling
command.

Fixed nighttime The device outputs reactive power -

reactive power based on this value if there is no
remote scheduling command, Reactive
power at night is set to Enable, and
the DC input is disconnected.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Q-U characteristic The device adjusts Q/S (the ratio of the -

curve output reactive power to apparent
power) in real time based on U/Un(%)
(the ratio of the actual power grid
voltage to the rated power grid
voltage).

Q-U characteristic Specifies the reactive power -

curve mode compensation mode of the device
output.

Delay for Q-U Specifies the delay time for Q-U -

characteristic curve adjustment.
to take effect

Power percentage Specifies the reference apparent power -

for triggering Q-U in percentage. When the actual
scheduling apparent power of the device is greater
than the value of this parameter, the
Q-U characteristic curve scheduling
function is enabled.

Power percentage Specifies the P/Pn when the device

for exiting Q-U exits the Q-U scheduling. -
scheduling

Minimum PF of Q-U Specifies the minimum power factor

-
characteristic curve for Q-U adjustment.

Q-P characteristic The device adjusts Q/Pmax (the ratio -

curve of the reactive power to the maximum
active power) in real time based on P/
Pmax (the ratio of the active power to
the maximum active power).

PF-U characteristic The device adjusts the power factor in -

curve real time based on U/Un(%) (the ratio
of the actual power grid voltage to the
rated power grid voltage).

PF-U voltage Specifies the time for filtering the grid -

detection filter time voltage in the PF-U curve.

cosφ-P/Pn The device adjusts the output power -

characteristic curve factor cosφ in real time based on P/
Pn(%).

cosφ-P/Pn trigger Specifies the voltage threshold for -

voltage triggering reactive power
compensation based on the cosφ-P
curve.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 201

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

cosφ-P/Pn exit Specifies the voltage threshold for -

voltage exiting reactive power compensation
based on the cosφ-P curve.

Reactive power Specifies the adjustment time for the -

adjustment time reactive power to reach the target
value during reactive power
adjustment.

Active Power Specifies the preset frequency of the -

Frequency frequency regulation deadband.
Regulation
Coefficient in Grid
Forming Mode

Reactive Power Specifies the preset voltage of the -

Voltage Regulation voltage regulation deadband.
Deadband in Grid
Forming Mode

Active Power Specifies the ratio of the per unit value -

Frequency of the active power variation to the per
Regulation unit value of the frequency variation
Coefficient in Grid for the frequency regulation. Value
Forming Mode range: [0.0, 200.0].

Reactive Power Specifies the ratio of the per unit value -

Voltage Regulation of the reactive power variation to the
Coefficient in Grid per unit value of the root mean square
Forming Mode voltage variation for the voltage
regulation. Value range: [0.0, 50.0].

Upper limit of active Specifies the maximum percentage of -

power variation for the active power variation for the
frequency regulation frequency regulation. The upper limit
in grid forming can be set to the per unit value of
mode (%) Active Power Baseline. The default
value is 25, and the value range is [0.0,
100.0].

Upper limit of Specifies maximum percentage of the -

reactive power reactive power variation for the voltage
variation for voltage regulation. The upper limit can be set
regulation in grid to three times the per unit value of
forming mode (%) Apparent Power Baseline. The default
value is 150, and the value range is
[0.0, 300.0].

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 202

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

On-grid VSG Inertia Specifies the time required for the -

Time Constant virtual rotor of the GFM-related virtual
synchronous generator to reach the
rated speed from the static state under
the rated torque. The default value is
12, and the value range is [0.0, 20.0].

Lower limit of active Specifies the minimum percentage of -

power variation for the active power variation for the
frequency regulation frequency regulation. The lower limit
in grid forming can be set to the per unit value of
mode (%) Active Power Baseline. The default
value is -25, and the value range is
[-100.0, 0.0].

Lower limit of Specifies the minimum percentage of -

reactive power the reactive power variation for the
variation for voltage frequency regulation. The lower limit
regulation in grid can be set to three times the per unit
forming mode (%) value of Apparent Power Baseline.
The default value is -150, and the
value range is [-300.0, 0.0].

Power Baseline
Parameter Description

Apparent power Specifies the apparent power baseline for power scheduling. The value
baseline cannot be greater than the maximum apparent power.

Active power baseline Specifies the active power baseline for power scheduling. The value
cannot be greater than the maximum active power.

Adjustment
Parameter Description

Total energy yield A calibrating coefficient for the total energy yield to ensure that the
adjustment reported energy yield is consistent with the actual energy yield at the
grid connection point

Adjusted total power A calibrating coefficient for the total power supply from the grid to
supply from grid ensure that the reported amount of power supplied from the grid is
consistent with the actual power supply at the grid connection point

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 203

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.10.2 Characteristic Curve

Choose Monitoring > PCS > Characteristic Curve, set characteristic curve
parameters, and click Submit.

Characteristic Curve Setting Description

Name

LVRT characteristic curve Configure this characteristic curve based on the

power grid standard.
NOTE
The SmartLogger supports only the curve configuration
for LVRT that lasts no more than 60s. If a power grid
standard requires that LVRT be longer than 60s, LVRT
characteristic curve is not displayed for the grid code.

Voltage rise suppression P- 1. This parameter is displayed when Voltage rise

U curve suppression is set to Enable.
2. Configure this characteristic curve based on the
power grid standard.

6.3.11 Setting PCS Parameters (213KTL-H0)

PCS parameter settings in this section apply to the LUNA2000-213KTL-H0.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > PCS > Running Param, set running parameters, and click
Submit.

NOTICE

● Before setting the running parameters of the Smart PCS, ensure that the DC
side of the Smart PCS is powered on.
● The parameter list provided in this document includes all configurable
parameters which may vary depending on scenarios. The actual display may
vary.

Grid Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Grid code Set this parameter based on the grid code of After this parameter is set,
the country or region where the device is used. the device restarts.

Voltage level Set the voltage level of the power grid. -

Frequency level Set the frequency level of the power grid. -

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Output mode Specifies the supported power grid types. After this parameter is set,
the device restarts.
Isolation settings Specifies the device grounding status on the DC
side and the connection to the power grid.

Auto start upon Specifies whether to allow the device to -

grid recovery automatically start after the power grid
recovers.

On-grid recovery Specifies the time after which the device begins -
time (s) restarting after the power grid recovers.

Quick startup for Specifies whether to allow the device to quickly -

short-time grid start after the power grid recovers from a short-
disconnection time failure.

Duration for The standards of certain countries and regions This parameter is displayed
determining require that the device should not disconnect when Quick startup after
short-time grid from the power grid if the power grid short-time grid
disconnection experiences a short-time failure. After the fault disconnection is set to
(ms) is rectified, the device output power needs to be Enable.
quickly restored.

Soft start time Specifies the time for the power to gradually -
after grid failure increase when the device restarts after the
(s) power grid recovers.

Grid According to the standards of certain countries -

reconnection and regions, grid reconnection is not allowed
voltage upper when the grid voltage is higher than the
limit (V) maximum voltage for grid reconnection.

Grid According to the standards of certain countries -

reconnection and regions, grid reconnection is not allowed
voltage lower when the grid voltage is lower than the
limit (V) minimum grid voltage for grid reconnection.

Grid According to the standards of certain countries -

reconnection and regions, grid reconnection is not allowed
frequency upper when the grid frequency is higher than the
limit (Hz) maximum grid frequency for grid reconnection.

Grid According to the standards of certain countries -

reconnection and regions, grid reconnection is not allowed
frequency lower when the grid frequency is lower than the
limit (Hz) minimum grid frequency for grid reconnection.

Upper voltage According to the standards of certain countries -

threshold (V) for and regions, initial grid connection is not
grid connection allowed when the grid voltage is higher than
the maximum voltage for grid connection.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Lower voltage According to the standards of certain countries -

threshold (V) for and regions, initial grid connection is not
grid connection allowed when the grid voltage is lower than the
minimum voltage for grid connection.

Upper frequency According to the standards of certain countries -

threshold (Hz) and regions, initial grid connection is not
for grid allowed when the grid frequency is higher than
connection the maximum frequency for grid connection.

Lower frequency According to the standards of certain countries -

threshold (Hz) and regions, initial grid connection is not
for grid allowed when the grid frequency is lower than
connection the minimum frequency for grid connection.

Grid automatic Specifies the time after which the device begins -
reconnection restarting after the power grid recovers.
time

Protection Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Insulation To ensure device safety, the device detects the -

resistance insulation resistance of the DC side to the
protection ground when it starts a self-check. If the
threshold (MΩ) detected value is less than the preset value, the
device does not connect to the grid nor start.

Active islanding Specifies whether to enable the active islanding -

protection protection function.

Passive islanding Specifies whether to enable the passive -

protection islanding protection function.

Unbalance Specifies the device protection threshold when -

voltage the power grid voltage is unbalanced.
protection (%)

Phase protection The Japanese standard requires that during -

threshold (°) passive islanding detection, the protection
should be triggered if an abrupt voltage phase
change is detected.

Phase angle The standards of certain countries and regions -

offset protection require that the device needs to be protected
when the phase angle offset of the power grid
three phases exceeds a certain value.

10-minute UV Specifies the 10-minute undervoltage -

protection protection threshold.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

10-minute UV Specifies the 10-minute undervoltage -

protection time protection duration.

10 minute OV Specifies the 10-minute overvoltage protection -

protection (V) threshold.

10 minute OV Specifies the 10-minute overvoltage protection -

protection time duration.
(ms)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 207

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Level-N OV Specifies the level-N grid overvoltage ● N can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or

protection (V) protection threshold. 6.

Level-N OV Specifies the level-N grid overvoltage ● Level-1 overvoltage

protection time protection duration. protection threshold ≤
(ms) Level-2 overvoltage
protection threshold ≤
Level-N UV Specifies the level-N grid undervoltage Level-3 overvoltage
protection (V) protection threshold. protection threshold ≤
Level-4 overvoltage
Level-N UV Specifies the level-N grid undervoltage protection threshold ≤
protection time protection duration. Level-5 overvoltage
(ms) protection threshold ≤
Level-6 overvoltage
protection threshold
● Duration threshold for
level-1 overvoltage
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-2
overvoltage protection ≥
Duration threshold for
level-3 overvoltage
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-4
overvoltage protection ≥
Duration threshold for
level-5 overvoltage
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-6
overvoltage protection
● Level-1 undervoltage
protection threshold ≥
Level-2 undervoltage
protection threshold ≥
Level-3 undervoltage
protection threshold ≥
Level-4 undervoltage
protection threshold ≥
Level-5 undervoltage
protection threshold ≥
Level-6 undervoltage
protection threshold
● Duration threshold for
level-1 undervoltage
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-2
undervoltage protection
≥ Duration threshold for
level-3 undervoltage
protection ≥ Duration

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 208

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

threshold for level-4

undervoltage protection
≥ Duration threshold for
level-5 undervoltage
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-6
undervoltage protection

Frequency If this parameter is set to Enable, the device is -

change rate protected when the power grid frequency
protection changes too fast.

Frequency Specifies the frequency change rate protection This parameter is displayed
change rate threshold. when Frequency change
protection rate protection is set to
threshold (Hz/s) Enable.

Duration The device is protected when the grid frequency

threshold (s) for change duration exceeds the value.
frequency change
rate protection

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Level-N OF Specifies the level-N grid overfrequency ● N can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or

protection (Hz) protection threshold. 6.

Level-N OF Specifies the level-N grid overfrequency ● Level-1 overfrequency

protection time protection duration. protection threshold ≤
(ms) Level-2 overfrequency
protection threshold ≤
Level-N UF Specifies the level-N grid underfrequency Level-3 overfrequency
protection (Hz) protection threshold. protection threshold ≤
Level-4 overfrequency
Level-N UF Specifies the level-N grid underfrequency protection threshold ≤
protection time protection duration. Level-5 overfrequency
(ms) protection threshold ≤
Level-6 overfrequency
protection threshold
● Duration threshold for
level-1 overfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-2
overfrequency protection
≥ Duration threshold for
level-3 overfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-4
overfrequency protection
≥ Duration threshold for
level-5 overfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-6
overfrequency protection
● Level-1 underfrequency
protection threshold ≥
Level-2 underfrequency
protection threshold ≥
Level-3 underfrequency
protection threshold ≥
Level-4 underfrequency
protection threshold ≥
Level-5 underfrequency
protection threshold ≥
Level-6 underfrequency
protection threshold
● Duration threshold for
level-1 underfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-2
underfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-3
underfrequency

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 210

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-4
underfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-5
underfrequency
protection ≥ Duration
threshold for level-6
underfrequency
protection

Feature Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Working mode The default value is PQ. ● After this parameter

● If Scenario is set to On-grid, set is set, the device
this parameter to PQ. shuts down.
● If Scenario is set to Off-grid, set ● The parameter
this parameter to VSG. setting can be
modified only in the
● If Scenario is set to On/Off-grid, deployment wizard.
set this parameter to PQ or VSG.

Working mode Specifies the delay time for online -

switching delay switching between VSG and PQ.

Microgrid The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set

compatibility If the PCS and diesel generator run incorrectly, the Smart
in parallel and the PCS works in PQ PCS may run
mode, set this parameter to Enable. abnormally.
When Microgrid compatibility is
set to Enable, the grid-connected
current source PCS supports a higher
ratio of PV to energy storage in
addition to the feature of the
original grid code.

Output After Output impedance -

impedance enhancement is enabled, you can
enhancement set Frequency to which output
impedance enhancement applies
to increase the output impedance at
this frequency.

Frequency to Specifies the frequency to which This parameter is

which output output impedance enhancement displayed when
impedance applies. Output impedance
enhancement enhancement is set to
applies Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 211

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Insulation Set this parameter to Enable or -

resistance Disable.
detection
mode

Power control ● If this parameter is set to Active -

priority power first, the device
preferentially ensures active
power output.
● If this parameter is set to
Reactive power first, the device
preferentially ensures reactive
power output.

Overload The default value is Disable. -

Enhanced If this parameter is set to Enable,
Mode the power overload capability will be
enabled for a short period of time.

Soft start time Specifies the duration for the power -

(s) to gradually increase until the device
starts.

Shutdown Specifies the power change rate -

gradient (%/s) until the device shuts down.

Shutdown at ● If this parameter is set to Enable, -

0% power limit the device shuts down after
receiving the 0% power limit
command.
● If this parameter is set to
Disable, the device does not shut
down after receiving the 0%
power limit command.

Anti-rollback The default setting is Enable. ● This parameter

● Enable: Enable the anti-rollback applies only to
function. some models. The
actual display may
● Disable: Disable the anti-rollback vary.
function.
● If the parameter is
set to Enable, the
software cannot be
rolled back to the
source version
during the software
upgrade to prevent
vulnerabilities in the
source version from
being exploited.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 212

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Delayed ● Enable: The upgrade can be -

upgrade delayed.
● Disable: The upgrade can be
performed immediately. The
upgrade may fail if the update
conditions are not met.

O&M via USB Specifies the USB O&M port status: -

connection Always on, Off in idle state, or
Always off.

USB wakeup Used to remotely wake up the USB -

O&M port. After being idle for 4
hours, the port is automatically
disabled.

Safety mode Set this parameter to On or Exit. -

Communicatio Specifies the duration for -

n interruption determining communication
duration interruption between the device and
the SmartLogger.

Protection If this parameter is set to Enable, -

upon the device performs protection
communication based on the preset power when its
failure communication with the
SmartLogger is interrupted for a
period longer than Communication
disconnection detection time.

Communicatio Specifies the detection time for This parameter is

n protection upon a communication displayed when
disconnection failure between the device and the Protection upon
detection time SmartLogger or Smart Dongle. communication
(s) failure is set to
Enable.
Active power Specifies the protection mode of the
mode when active power after the
communication communication is interrupted. The
fails value can be Percentage or Fixed
value.

Active power Specifies the active power threshold This parameter is

threshold (%) in percentage (high precision). displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication
fails [high failure is set to Enable
precision] and Active power
mode when
communication fails
is set to Percentage.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Active power Specifies the active power threshold This parameter is

threshold (kW) as a fixed value (high precision). displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication
fails [high failure is set to Enable
precision] and Active power
mode when
communication fails
is set to Fixed value.

Reactive power Specifies the protection mode of the This parameter is

mode when reactive power after the displayed when
communication communication is interrupted. The Protection upon
fails value can be Q/S or Power factor. communication
failure is set to
Enable.

Reactive power Specifies the Q/S threshold (%) of This parameter is

threshold (PF) the reactive power. displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication
fails failure is set to Enable
and Reactive power
mode when
communication fails
is set to Power factor.

Reactive power Specifies the power factor threshold This parameter is

threshold of the reactive power (high displayed when
(Q/S) when precision). Protection upon
communication communication
fails [high failure is set to Enable
precision] and Reactive power
mode when
communication fails
is set to Q/S.

Harmonic Specifies harmonic voltage or This parameter is

optimization harmonic current as the object of displayed when
type power quality optimization. The Scenario is set to On-
default value is Harmonic voltage. grid and Working
mode is set to VSG.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 214

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Standby mode When there is no scheduling, the Set this parameter as

Smart PCS enters the hot standby required.
mode based on the battery status to
reduce system loss.
● Zero-power operation: no hot
standby
● Seam hot standby: After the
Smart PCS enters the hot standby
mode, the relay on the AC side
will be disconnected.
● Seamless hot standby: After the
Smart PCS enters the hot standby
mode, the relay on the AC side
will not be disconnected. The
reactive power of the ports needs
to be supplemented.

Per unit The default value is 2. Specifies the This parameter is

armature resistance per unit value for displayed when
resistance armature windings of the virtual Working mode is set
synchronous generator. to VSG.
NOTE
Per unit The default value is 1. Specifies the This parameter must be
armature inductive reactance per unit value set by professional
inductive for armature windings of the virtual personnel. Improper
reactance synchronous generator. settings may cause
device exceptions.
Off-grid VSG The default value is 0.9. Specifies the
inertia time time required for the virtual rotor of
constant the virtual synchronous generator to
reach the rated speed from the
static state under the rated torque.

P-F adjustment The default value is 1.8. Specifies the

coefficient frequency deviation corresponding
to the rated active power of the
virtual synchronous generator.

Q-V The default value is 1.2. Specifies the

adjustment voltage deviation corresponding to
coefficient the rated reactive power of the
virtual synchronous generator.

P-V adjustment The default value is 0. Specifies the

coefficient voltage deviation corresponding to
the rated active power of the virtual
synchronous generator.

Q-F The default value is 1. Specifies the

adjustment frequency deviation corresponding
coefficient to the rated reactive power of the
virtual synchronous generator.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

VSG output The default value is 100. Corrects

voltage the deviation caused by the
correction transformer ratio error.
coefficient

VSG output The default value is 100. Corrects

frequency the PCS output frequency deviation.
correction
coefficient

VSG frequency The default value is 7.2. Specifies the

damping power factor that prevents the
coefficient frequency change of the virtual
synchronous generator.

VSG excitation The default value is 0. Specifies the

time constant time required for the excitation of
the virtual synchronous generator to
reach the rated voltage.

VSG excitation The default value is 0. Specifies the

damping power factor that prevents the
coefficient voltage change of the virtual
synchronous generator.

Wired carrier Enables or disables wired carrier -

synchronizatio synchronization. The default value is
n Disable.

Delay The default value is 0.5. Specifies the This parameter is

compensation value of delay compensation for displayed when Wired
for wired wired carrier synchronization. carrier
carrier synchronization is set
synchronizatio to Enable.
n

Wired power Enables or disables wired power -

frequency frequency synchronization. The
synchronizatio default value is Disable.
n

Delay The default value is 0.5. Specifies the This parameter is

compensation value of delay compensation for displayed when Wired
for wired wired power frequency power frequency
power synchronization. synchronization is set
frequency to Enable.
synchronizatio
n

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 216

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

LVRT LVRT is short for low voltage ride- -

through. When the grid voltage is
abnormally low for a short time, the
device cannot disconnect from the
power grid immediately and has to
work for some time.

LVRT triggering Specifies the threshold for triggering This parameter is

threshold (V) LVRT. The threshold settings should displayed when LVRT is
meet the local grid standard. set to Enable.

Positive- During LVRT, the device needs to

sequence generate positive-sequence reactive
reactive power power to support the power grid.
compensation This parameter is used to set the
factor in LVRT positive-sequence reactive power
generated by the device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
positive-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of
the rated current when the AC
voltage decreases by 10% during
LVRT.

Negative- During LVRT, the device needs to

sequence generate negative-sequence reactive
reactive power power to support the power grid.
compensation This parameter is used to set the
factor in LVRT negative-sequence reactive power
generated by the device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
negative-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of
the rated current when the AC
voltage decreases by 10% during
LVRT.

LVRT active Specifies the active current

current proportional coefficient before and
maintenance during LVRT.
coefficient

LVRT reactive During LVRT, the device needs to

current limiting limit the reactive current.
(%) For example, if you set this
parameter to 50, the reactive current
upper limit of the device is 50% of
the rated current during LVRT.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Threshold of If Zero-current mode on power

LVRT zero- grid fault is enabled and the power
current mode grid voltage is less than Threshold
of LVRT zero-current mode during
LVRT, the zero-current mode is used.
Otherwise, the mode set in LVRT
mode is used.

LVRT mode Specifies the LVRT mode. The

options are Zero-current mode,
Constant current mode, Reactive
power priority mode, and Active
power priority mode.

Positive- During asymmetric LVRT, the device

sequence needs to limit the positive-sequence
reactive current reactive current.
limit during
asymmetric
LVRT (%)

Compensation By default, this function is enabled

angle during for China's national standards and
ZVRT disabled for other standards.

Reactive Specifies the percentage of the

current reactive compensation current in the
compensation rated current during LVRT.
bias during
LVRT

Power Specifies the delay for the device to

dispatching stop the power dispatching response
hold time after after LVRT. After the stopping state
LVRT ends, the device starts to respond to
the dispatching command.

LVRT Specifies the LVRT capability of the -

characteristic device.
curve

Negative- During asymmetric LVRT, the device This parameter is

sequence needs to limit the negative-sequence displayed when LVRT
reactive current reactive current. or HVRT is set to
limit during Enable.
VRT (%)

Min. active During voltage ride-through (VRT),

current during the device needs to limit the min.
VRT (%) active current.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 218

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Deactivate grid Specifies whether to shield the

voltage voltage protection function during
protection LVRT or HVRT.
during HVRT/
LVRT

VRT exit Specifies the LVRT/HVRT recovery

hysteresis threshold.
threshold ● LVRT recovery threshold = LVRT
threshold + VRT exit hysteresis
threshold
● HVRT recovery threshold = HVRT
threshold – VRT exit hysteresis
threshold

VRT active Specifies the percentage of the

current limiting maximum active current to the rated
(%) current during fault ride-through
(FRT).

VRT active Specifies the recovery rate when the

power recovery active current is restored to the
gradient value at the moment before fault
ride-through.

Zero-current Specifies whether to enable the

mode on function of working in zero-current
power grid mode upon a power grid fault.
fault

Grid voltage This parameter can be set only for

trip triggering the VDE4120.
threshold

HVRT HVRT is short for high voltage ride- -

through. When the grid voltage is
abnormally high for a short time,
the device cannot disconnect from
the power grid immediately and has
to work for some time.

HVRT Specifies the threshold for triggering This parameter is

triggering HVRT. The threshold settings should displayed when HVRT
threshold (V) meet the local grid standard. is set to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Positive- During HVRT, the device needs to

sequence generate positive-sequence reactive
reactive power power to support the power grid.
compensation This parameter is used to set the
factor in HVRT positive-sequence reactive power
generated by the device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
positive-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of
the rated current when the AC
voltage increases by 10% during
HVRT.

Negative- During HVRT, the device needs to

sequence generate negative-sequence reactive
reactive power power to support the power grid.
compensation This parameter is used to set the
factor in HVRT negative-sequence reactive power
generated by the device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
negative-sequence reactive current
generated by the device is 20% of
the rated current when the AC
voltage increases by 10% during
HVRT.

Reactive During HVRT, the device needs to

current limit limit the reactive current.
during HVRT
(%)

Reactive Specifies the percentage of the

current reactive compensation current in the
compensation rated current during HVRT.
bias during
HVRT

Power Specifies the delay for the device to

dispatching stop the power dispatching response
hold time after after HVRT. After the stopping state
HVRT ends, the device starts to respond to
the dispatching command.

HVRT Specifies the HVRT capability of the

characteristic device.
curve

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 220

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Grid phase loss This function is used to keep the -

adaptability inverter operating in on-grid mode
when an open phase fault occurs. By
default, this function is enabled for
China's national standards and
disabled for other standards.

Voltage rise The standards of certain countries -

suppression and regions require that the device
suppress voltage rise by outputting
reactive power and reducing active
power when the output voltage
exceeds a certain value.

Reactive power The standards of certain countries ● This parameter is

adjustment and regions require that the device displayed when
threshold (%) generate a certain amount of Voltage rise
for voltage rise reactive power when the output suppression is set
suppression voltage exceeds a certain value. to Enable.

Active power The standards of certain countries ● The value of Active

derating and regions require that the active power derating
threshold (%) power of the device be derated threshold for
for voltage rise based on a certain gradient when voltage rise
suppression the output voltage exceeds a certain suppression must
value. be greater than that
of Reactive power
P-U The device adjusts P/Pn (the ratio of adjustment
characteristic the active power to the rated power) threshold for
curve in real time based on U/Un(%) (the voltage rise
ratio of the actual power grid suppression.
voltage to the rated power grid
voltage).

P-U Specifies the time from the response

characteristic to the end of the adjustment based
curve on the P-U curve.
adjustment
time

Frequency- The standards of certain countries -

based control and regions require that if the power
grid frequency fluctuates around the
rated value, the device needs to fine-
tune the active power output based
on Frequency-based adjustment
ratio to help stabilize the power grid
frequency. In this case, set this
parameter to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Frequency The default value is Disable. If this -

Adaptation parameter is set to Enable, the PCS
should not be in the discharging
state when the power grid frequency
is higher than a certain threshold;
and the PCS should not be in the
charging state when the power grid
frequency is lower than a certain
threshold.

Frequency- Specifies the adjustment ratio of the This parameter is

based active power output. displayed when
adjustment Frequency-based
ratio control is set to
Enable.
Frequency- Specifies the adjustment ratio of the
based active power output.
adjustment
ratio [high
precision]

Response Specifies the threshold for triggering

deadband of frequency-based control. For
frequency- example, if this parameter is set to
based control 0.1 Hz, the frequency-based control
is not triggered when the frequency
is within reference frequency±0.1 Hz.

Power change Specifies the active power change

gradient of gradient of frequency-based control.
frequency-
based control

Power change Specifies the lower and upper limits

limit of for active power adjustment in
frequency- frequency-based control.
based control

Upper power Specifies the upper limit for active

change limit of power adjustment in frequency-
frequency- based control.
based control

Lower power Specifies the lower limit for active

change limit of power adjustment in frequency-
frequency- based control.
based control

Delay response Specifies the delay response time of

time of frequency-based control.
frequency-
based control

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 222

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Overfrequency- If this parameter is set to Enable, -

caused power when the power grid frequency
derating exceeds the frequency threshold for
triggering overfrequency-caused
power derating, the active power of
the device is derated based on a
certain gradient.

Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for ● This parameter is

threshold for stopping overfrequency-caused displayed when
stopping power derating. Overfrequency-
overfrequency- caused power
caused power derating is set to
derating (Hz) Enable.

Power Specifies the power threshold for ● When setting this

threshold for stopping overfrequency-caused parameter, ensure
stopping power derating. that the following
overfrequency- condition is met:
caused power Frequency
derating (%) threshold for
exiting
Frequency The standards of certain countries overfrequency-
threshold for and regions require that the output caused power
triggering active power of the device be derating <
overfrequency- derated when the power grid Frequency
caused power frequency exceeds a certain value. threshold for
derating (Hz) triggering
overfrequency-
Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for caused power
threshold for exiting overfrequency-caused power derating <
exiting derating. Frequency
overfrequency- threshold for
caused power stopping
derating (Hz) overfrequency-
caused power
Gradient of Specifies the rate of overfrequency-
derating.
overfrequency- caused power derating.
caused power
derating (%/s)

Gradient of Specifies the power recovery rate for

power recovery overfrequency-caused power
from derating.
overfrequency-
caused
derating (%/
min)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 223

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Underfrequenc The standards of certain countries -

y-caused and regions require that if the power
power raising grid frequency is lower than
Frequency threshold for triggering
underfrequency-caused power
raising, the device needs to increase
the active power output to increase
the power grid frequency. In this
case, set this parameter to Enable.

Gradient of Specifies the power recovery rate for ● This parameter is

underfrequenc underfrequency-caused power displayed when
y-caused raising. Underfrequency-
power raising caused power
(%/min) raising is set to
Enable.
Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for
threshold for stopping underfrequency-caused ● The setting must
stopping power raising. meet the following
underfrequenc condition:
y-caused Frequency
power raising threshold for
(Hz) stopping
underfrequency-
Power Specifies the power threshold for caused power
threshold for stopping underfrequency-caused raising < Frequency
stopping power raising. threshold for
underfrequenc triggering
y-caused underfrequency-
power raising caused power
(%) raising < Frequency
threshold for
Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for exiting
threshold for triggering underfrequency-caused underfrequency-
triggering power raising. caused power
underfrequenc raising
y-caused
power raising
(Hz)

Frequency Specifies the frequency threshold for

threshold for exiting underfrequency-caused
exiting power raising.
underfrequenc
y-caused
power raising
(Hz)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 224

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Delay of Specifies the delay from the time

underfrequenc when the underfrequency-caused
y-caused power raising function is triggered to
power raising the time when the function takes
effect.

Frequency Specifies the frequency detection This parameter is

detection filter filter time. displayed when
time (ms) Frequency-based
control,
Recovery delay Specifies the exit delay time after Underfrequency-
of frequency- the frequency reaches the frequency caused power raising,
based active threshold for exiting overfrequency- or Overfrequency-
power derating caused power derating. caused power
Execution Specifies the execution delay time of derating is set to
delay of overfrequency-caused power Enable.
frequency- derating after the frequency reaches
based active the frequency threshold for
power derating triggering overfrequency-caused
power derating.

Hysteresis of Specifies whether to enable the

frequency- hysteresis of overfrequency-caused
based active power derating.
power derating

Active power Specifies the ratio of the per unit -

frequency value of the active power variation
regulation to the per unit value of the
coefficient in frequency variation for the
grid forming frequency regulation.
mode

Active power Specifies the preset frequency of the -

frequency frequency regulation deadband.
regulation
deadband in
grid forming
mode

Upper limit of Specifies the maximum percentage -

active power of the active power variation for the
variation for frequency regulation. The upper
frequency limit can be set to the per unit value
regulation in of Active Power Baseline.
grid forming
mode (%)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 225

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Lower limit of Specifies the minimum percentage -

active power of the active power variation for the
variation for frequency regulation. The lower limit
frequency can be set to the per unit value of
regulation in Active Power Baseline.
grid forming
mode (%)

Reactive power Specifies the reactive voltage -

voltage regulation baseline in grid forming
regulation mode, which is used for voltage
baseline in grid regulation command control.
forming mode

Reactive power Set this parameter to the ratio of the -

voltage per unit value of the reactive power
regulation variation to the per unit value of the
coefficient in root mean square voltage variation
grid forming for the voltage regulation.
mode

Reactive power Set Reactive power voltage -

voltage regulation deadband in grid
regulation forming mode.
deadband in
grid forming
mode

Upper limit of Specifies the maximum percentage -

reactive power of the reactive power variation for
variation for the frequency regulation. The upper
voltage limit can be set to three times the
regulation in per unit value of Apparent Power
grid forming Baseline.
mode (%)

Lower limit of Specifies the minimum percentage -

reactive power of the reactive power variation for
variation for the frequency regulation. The lower
voltage limit can be set to three times the
regulation in per unit value of Apparent Power
grid forming Baseline.
mode (%)

Inertia time Specifies the time required for the -

constant in virtual rotor of the GFM-related
grid forming virtual synchronous generator to
mode reach the rated speed from the
static state under the rated torque.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Frequency Specifies the deadband frequency for -

damping the GFM frequency damping
deadband function. The frequency damping
function takes effect only when the
frequency is beyond the specified
range.

Frequency Specifies the damping coefficient for -

damping the GFM frequency damping
coefficient function.

Power Specifies the damping coefficient for -

damping the GFM frequency damping
coefficient function.

GFM Virtual Specifies whether to enable the GFM -

PSS virtual PSS.

Virtual PSS low Specifies the enhanced damping This parameter is

frequency gain required by the virtual PSS to displayed when GFM
oscillation implement low-frequency oscillation Virtual PSS is set to
damping damping. Enable.
enhancement
gain

Virtual PSS low Specifies the center frequency for

frequency phase compensation required by the
oscillation virtual PSS to implement low-
damping phase frequency oscillation damping.
compensation
center
frequency

Virtual PSS Specifies the phase for phase

Low Frequency compensation required by the virtual
Oscillation PSS to implement low-frequency
Damping oscillation damping.
Compensation
Phase

Virtual PSS Specifies the time constant for DC

Low Frequency blocking required by the virtual PSS
Oscillation to implement low-frequency
Damping DC oscillation damping.
Blocking Time
Constant

Virtual PSS Specifies the type of power that

Low Frequency needs to be damped by the virtual
Oscillation PSS to implement low-frequency
Damping oscillation damping.
Output Type

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Virtual PSS Specifies the percentage of the

Low Frequency output power limit to the rated
Oscillation power required by the virtual PSS to
Damping implement low-frequency oscillation
Output Power damping.
Limiting

Virtual PSS Specifies the frequency deadband of

Low Frequency the output damping power triggered
Oscillation by the virtual PPS to implement low-
Damping frequency oscillation damping.
Trigger
Deadband

Virtual Specifies whether to enable Virtual -

impedance impedance excitation control in
excitation grid forming mode.
control in grid
forming mode

Excitation Specifies the per unit impedance of This parameter is

virtual virtual impedance excitation control displayed when Virtual
impedance in in grid forming mode. impedance excitation
grid forming control in grid
mode forming mode is set to
Enable.

GFM wideband Specifies whether to enable GFM -

oscillation wideband oscillation damping.
damping

Broadband Specifies the start frequency for the This parameter is

oscillation wideband oscillation damping displayed when GFM
damping start function. wideband oscillation
frequency damping is set to
Enable.
Wideband Specifies the center frequency for
oscillation phase compensation required for the
damping wideband oscillation damping
compensation function.
phase center
frequency

Wideband Specifies the phase to be

oscillation compensated at the center
damping frequency of phase compensation
compensation required for the wideband oscillation
phase damping function.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 228

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Wideband Specifies the enhanced resistance for

oscillation the wideband oscillation damping
damping function.
enhanced
resistor

Broadband Specifies the cut-off frequency for

oscillation the wideband oscillation damping
damping cut- function.
off frequency

Inertia Specifies whether to enable Inertia -

response in response in grid following mode.
grid following
mode

Inertia time Specifies the time required for the This parameter is
constant in simulated synchronous generator to displayed when Inertia
grid following reach the rated speed from the time constant in grid
mode static state under the rated torque. following mode is set
to Enable.
Inertia When the absolute value of the
frequency current frequency variation is
deadband in greater than the configured
grid following frequency variation deadband, the
mode device outputs the inertia power in
grid following mode.

Inertia When the absolute value of the

frequency current frequency change rate is
change rate greater than the configured
threshold in frequency change rate threshold, the
grid following device outputs the inertia power in
mode grid following mode.

Hysteresis When the absolute value of the

threshold for current frequency change rate is less
inertia than the frequency change rate
frequency threshold minus the frequency
change rate in change rate hysteresis threshold, the
grid following device stops outputting the inertia
mode power in grid following mode.

Upper limit of Specifies the upper limit

inertia active (percentage) of inertia active power
power change variation in grid following mode.
in grid The upper limit can be set to the per
following unit value of the rated power.
mode

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Lower limit of Specifies the lower limit

inertia active (percentage) of inertia active power
power change change in grid following model. The
in grid lower limit can be set to the per unit
following value of the rated power.
mode

Automatic Specifies whether to enable -

voltage control automatic voltage control for
for extremely extremely weak power grids.
weak grids

Power Adjustment
Parameter Description

Schedule instruction valid Specifies the validity period of the scheduling instruction.
duration (s)

Plant active power Specifies the rate of active power rise due to irradiance changes.
gradient

Average active power This parameter is used together with Plant active power gradient.
filtering time When the active power increases due to irradiance changes, the
device increases the active power output in a stepwise pattern. This
parameter is used to adjust the time step of the active power
change.

Active power change Specifies the change rate of the device active power.
gradient (%/s)

Reactive power change Specifies the change rate of the device reactive power.
gradient (%/s)

Power factor Specifies the power factor of the device.

Reactive power Specifies the reactive power of the device.

compensation (Q/S) [high
precision]

Delay for Q-U Specifies the delay time for Q-U adjustment.
characteristic curve to take
effect

PF-U voltage detection Specifies the time for filtering the grid voltage in the PF-U curve.
filter time

cosφ-P/Pn trigger voltage Specifies the voltage threshold for triggering reactive power
compensation based on the cosφ-P curve.

cosφ-P/Pn exit voltage Specifies the voltage threshold for exiting reactive power
compensation based on the cosφ-P curve.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Power Baseline
Parameter Description Remarks

Rated power Set the rated capacity of the device. -

reference

Apparent power Specifies the apparent power baseline for Active power baseline
baseline power scheduling. The value cannot be greater shall be smaller than
than the maximum apparent power. Apparent power baseline.

Active power Specifies the active power baseline for power

baseline scheduling. The value cannot be greater than
the maximum active power.

Maximum Specifies the maximum overload active power -

overload apparent for grid forming.
power

Maximum Specifies the maximum overload apparent -

overload active power for grid forming.
power

Adjustment
Parameter Description

Total energy yield A calibrating coefficient for the total energy yield to ensure that the
adjustment reported energy yield is consistent with the actual energy yield at the
grid connection point

Adjusted total power A calibrating coefficient for the total power supply from the grid to
supply from grid ensure that the reported amount of power supplied from the grid is
consistent with the actual power supply at the grid connection point

6.3.12 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 1)

ESS parameter settings in this section apply to the following models:

● LUNA2000-97KWH-1H1
● LUNA2000-129KWH-2H1
● LUNA2000-161KWH-2H1
● LUNA2000-200KWH-2H0
● LUNA2000-200KWH-2H1
● LUNA2000-1.0MWH-1H1
● LUNA2000-1.0MWH-ES1H1
● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-1H0
● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-1H1

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 231

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-2H0
● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-2H1
● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-4H1
● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-HE2H1
● LUNA2000-2.0MWH-HE1H1

6.3.12.1 Setting CMU Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > CMU > Running Param., set running parameters, and
click Submit.

Temperature and Humidity Control

Parameter Description

Control mode ● Auto (default): The operating status and mode of the air
conditioner are automatically controlled by the temperature
and humidity control module.
● Manual: You can manually set the operating status and mode
of the air conditioner for commissioning. After the
commissioning is complete, switch back to the automatic mode.
Otherwise, the temperature and humidity may be out of
control.

Air conditioner parameter ● Default: The air conditioner works based on the default cooling
setting[1] start/stop temperatures and heating start/stop temperatures in
the system software.
● Custom: You can adjust the cooling start/stop temperatures
and heating start/stop temperatures of the air conditioner as
required.

Forced dehumidification At the first startup after deployment or long-term storage, you are
control advised to start forced dehumidification to reduce the risk of
equipment damage caused by condensation.

Note [1]: This parameter can be set only in V300R023C00 and later versions.

Exhaust Control
Parameter Description

Exhaust fan control module Time when the exhaust function is self-tested every day
self-test time

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Exhaust fan control module After the self-test is started, the exhaust fan will be running for a
self-test period of time to check its exhaust function. If the exhaust fan
does not meet the requirements, the system cannot start.

Exhaust fan control After started, the exhaust fan will automatically stop in at least 1
hour. If a combustible gas alarm is generated, the exhaust fan
cannot be stopped. The exhaust fan cannot be manually started
after the fire response is triggered until the fire alarm is cleared or
24 hours later.

Fire Suppression
NOTE

Only the LUNA2000-2.0MWH series Smart String ESS supports DC output power
distribution.

Parameter Description

DC output distribution ● Starting up: Enable the DC output power distribution to supply
48 V DC power to the battery pack fan, BMU, and ESC
monitoring system.
● Stop: Disable the DC output power distribution to stop
supplying 48 V DC power to the battery pack fan, BMU, and ESC
monitoring system.

NOTE

Only the LUNA2000-200KWH series Smart String ESS supports the temperature alarm
threshold settings.

Parameter Description

Temperature alarm Specifies the temperature threshold for triggering a fire alarm and
threshold processing fire response logic.

Burglar Alarm
The burglar alarm function applies only to the C&I scenario. This function is
supported only in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC172 and later versions and shall
be used together with LUNA2000B V100R023C00SPC120 and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Burglar Alarm The default value is Disable.

Disable: No burglar alarm will be triggered when the ESS door is
open.
Enable: A burglar alarm will be triggered when the ESS door is
open.

6.3.12.2 Setting ESU Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > ESU > Running Param., set running parameters, and
click Submit.

Running Parameters
Parameter Description

Enable delayed update ● When delayed upgrade is set, after the upgrade package is
uploaded, the ESU will perform the upgrade automatically
when the SOC is greater than or equal to 30%, the rack voltage
is greater than or equal to 400 V, and the ESC and ESM
communicate properly.
● If this parameter is set to Disable, the upgrade can be
performed immediately. The upgrade may fail if the upgrade
conditions are not met.

Delete invalid battery packs Delete battery packs that are not connected. This function is used
when replacing battery packs.

Battery pack shutdown delay After this parameter is set, the system can still monitor the battery
for a period of time after power-off.

Shutdown due to ● The default value is Disable.

communication interruption ● If this parameter is set to Enable, the ESS shuts down when the
between the rack controller communication between the PCS and the rack controller is
and PCS interrupted.

6.3.12.3 Setting ESC Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > ESU > ESC > Running Param., set running
parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 234

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Running Parameters
Parameter Setting Description

Insulation resistance To ensure device safety, the device detects the insulation resistance
protection threshold of the DC side to the ground when it starts a self-check. If the
detected value is less than the preset value, the device does not
start.

6.3.12.4 Setting ESR Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > ESU > ESR > Running Param., set running
parameters, and click Submit.

Parameters Settings
Parameter Description Remarks

Battery working mode Set the battery rack to Running or -

Hibernation.

Charging cutoff SOC Set the end-of-charge SOC of battery For SmartLogger
packs in a battery rack. V300R023C10SPC500 and
later versions, Charging
Discharge cutoff SOC Set the end-of-discharge SOC of battery cutoff SOC and
packs in a battery rack. Discharge cutoff SOC do
not take effect.

Quantity of battery packs Set the quantity of battery packs in a -

battery rack. If the quantity is
inconsistent with the actual quantity, the
system cannot start.

Insulation resistance Start or stop the detection for power -

diagnosis insulation resistance of the battery rack.

Battery pack position Start or stop the identification for -

detection battery pack positions in a battery rack.

Energy Yield Calibration

Parameter Description

Total charged energy Calibrate the total charged energy.

calibration

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 235

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Total discharged energy Calibrate the total discharged energy.

calibration

6.3.12.5 Setting HVAC Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > HVAC > Running Param., set running parameters,
and click Submit.

Parameters Settings
Parameter Description Remarks

Working mode The default value is Auto. The air ● The working mode of the air
conditioner working mode can be Auto, conditioner is adjusted
Dry, Heat, or Cool. intelligently. Non-professional
personnel are not allowed to
set the working mode.
● The air conditioner
dehumidification mode is used
for system protection. Do not
set the air conditioner to
dehumidification mode
manually.
● The heating and cooling modes
of the air conditioner are used
only for equipment
commissioning. Do not set
them manually.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 236

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Cooling start Set the target temperature for cooling ● This parameter affects the
temperature when the air conditioner works in system charge/discharge power
automatic mode. and cell lifespan. Non-
professional personnel are not
Cooling stop Set the target temperature when the air allowed to set this parameter.
temperature conditioner stops cooling in automatic
● 280 Ah battery pack: When the
mode.
rate is [0C, 0.25C], refer to the
Heating start Set the target temperature for heating 0.25C temperature control.
temperature when the air conditioner works in When the rate is (0.25C, 0.5C],
automatic mode. refer to the 0.5C temperature
control. When the rate is (0.5C,
Heating stop Set the target temperature when the air 1C], refer to the 1C
temperature conditioner stops heating in automatic temperature control.
mode. ● 320 Ah battery pack: When the
rate is [0C, 0.5C], refer to the
0.5C temperature control. When
the rate is (0.5C, 1C], refer to
the 1C temperature control.
● Choose Monitoring > ESS >
ESU > ESR > ESM > Cell data
to query the quantity of battery
cells. If the quantity of battery
cells is 16, the battery pack is
320 Ah. If the quantity of
battery cells is 18, the battery
pack is 280 Ah.
● If a high-rate system is used in
the low-rate scenario, it is
prone to low efficiency, high
power consumption, and
current limiting.
● The Company is not liable for
any system exception or
underperformance caused by
failure to set the temperatures
as required.
● For special scenarios, contact
the Company's engineers.

High temperature Set the indoor high temperature alarm -

alarm threshold threshold for the air conditioner.

Low temperature Set the indoor low temperature alarm -

alarm threshold threshold for the air conditioner.

AC overvoltage Set the upper threshold for the AC This parameter applies only to air
alarm threshold input voltage of the air conditioner. conditioners in the battery cabin
of the LUNA2000-2.0MWH Series
Smart String ESS.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 237

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

AC undervoltage Set the lower threshold for the AC input This parameter applies only to air
alarm threshold voltage of the air conditioner. conditioners in the battery cabin
of the LUNA2000-2.0MWH Series
Smart String ESS.

DC overvoltage Set the upper threshold for the DC This parameter applies only to in-
alarm threshold input voltage of the air conditioner. cabinet air conditioners of the
LUNA2000-200KWH Series Smart
String ESS and air conditioners in
the control unit cabin of the
LUNA2000-2.0MWH Series Smart
String ESS.

DC undervoltage Set the lower threshold for the DC This parameter applies only to in-
alarm threshold input voltage of the air conditioner. cabinet air conditioners of the
LUNA2000-200KWH Series Smart
String ESS and air conditioners in
the control unit cabin of the
LUNA2000-2.0MWH Series Smart
String ESS.

6.3.13 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 2)

ESS parameter settings in this section apply only to LUNA2000-215-2S10 and
LUNA2000-215-2S12.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > Running Param, set running parameters, and click
Submit.

Basic Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

ESS working mode Set this parameter to Running or This parameter will not be
switch Shutdown. displayed after ESS startup
authorization is completed.

Startup Set the startup authorization code. -

authorization code Otherwise, the ESS cannot be started.
Contact the ESS supplier or installer to
obtain the startup authorization code.

Device Set the name of the ESS. -

Certificate Set the certificate verification interval. -

verification
interval

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 238

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Certificate Set the certificate expiration -

expiration notification period.
notification period

Communication Enable or disable communication using -

using expired an expired certificate.
certificate

Remote black Perform black start. -

start

Display module Set this parameter to Off, Low, -

brightness Moderate, or High. The default value
is Moderate.

Delayed update ● Enable: The update can be delayed. -

● Disable: The update can be
performed immediately. The update
may fail if the update conditions are
not met.

Burglar Alarm The default value is Disable. -

Disable: No burglar alarm will be
triggered when the ESS door is open.
Enable: A burglar alarm will be
triggered when the ESS door is open.

Alarm beacon The default value is Stopped. -

control Stopped: Disable the alarm beacon
output of the ESS.
Start-up: Enable the alarm beacon
output of the ESS.

Forced At the first startup after deployment or -

dehumidification long-term storage, you are advised to
control start forced dehumidification to reduce
the risk of equipment damage caused
by condensation.

Exhaust fan After started, the exhaust fan will This parameter is displayed when
control automatically stop in at least 1 hour. If the number of exhaust fans is
a combustible gas alarm is generated, greater than 0.
the exhaust fan cannot be stopped. The
exhaust fan cannot be manually started
after the fire response is triggered until
the fire alarm is cleared or 24 hours
later.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 239

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Exhaust fan After the self-test is started, the

control module exhaust fan will be running for a period
self-test of time to check its exhaust function. If
the exhaust fan does not meet the
requirements, the system cannot start.

Exhaust fan Time when the exhaust function is self-

control module tested every day
self-test time

Secondary power The thermal runaway suppression This parameter is displayed when
supply for fire device uses lead-acid batteries as the the quantity of backup power
suppression backup power supply. If the primary supplies for the thermal runaway
module power supply is disconnected and suppression device is greater than
switched to the backup power supply, 0.
the energy of the lead-acid batteries
may be exhausted. To reduce the
probability of this risk, an external port
for operating the backup power switch
is added.

Grid Parameters
Parameter Description

Grid code Set this parameter based on the grid code of the country or
region where the device is used.

Isolation settings Specifies the device grounding status on the DC side and the
connection to the power grid.

Output mode Specifies the supported power grid types.

Grid reconnection voltage According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
upper limit (V) reconnection is not allowed when the grid voltage is higher than
the maximum voltage for grid reconnection.

Grid reconnection voltage According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
lower limit (V) reconnection is not allowed when the grid voltage is lower than
the minimum grid voltage for grid reconnection.

Grid reconnection frequency According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
upper limit (Hz) reconnection is not allowed when the grid frequency is higher
than the maximum grid frequency for grid reconnection.

Grid reconnection frequency According to the standards of certain countries and regions, grid
lower limit (Hz) reconnection is not allowed when the grid frequency is lower than
the minimum grid frequency for grid reconnection.

On-grid recovery time (s) Specifies the time after which the device begins restarting after
the power grid recovers.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 240

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Quick startup for short-time Specifies whether to allow the device to quickly start after the
grid disconnection power grid recovers from a short-time failure.

Duration for determining The standards of certain countries and regions require that the
short-time grid disconnection device should not disconnect from the power grid if the power
(ms) grid experiences a short-time failure. After the fault is rectified,
the device output power needs to be quickly restored.

Auto start upon grid recovery Auto start upon grid recovery

Protection Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

PCS insulation To ensure device safety, the -

resistance device detects the insulation
protection resistance of the DC side to the
threshold ground when it starts a self-
check. If the detected value is
less than the preset value, the
device does not connect to the
grid nor start.

Unbalance Specifies the device protection -

voltage threshold when the power grid
protection (%) voltage is unbalanced.

Active islanding Specifies whether to enable the -

protection active islanding protection
function.

10 minute OV Specifies the 10-minute -

protection (V) overvoltage protection threshold.

10 minute OV Specifies the 10-minute -

protection time overvoltage protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N OV Specifies the level-N grid N can be 1, 2, 3, or 4.

protection (V) overvoltage protection threshold. Set this parameter as
required.
Level-N OV Specifies the level-N grid
protection time overvoltage protection duration.
(ms)

Level-N UV Specifies the level-N grid

protection (V) undervoltage protection
threshold.

Level-N UV Specifies the level-N grid

protection time undervoltage protection
(ms) duration.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Level-N OF Specifies the level-N grid

protection (Hz) overfrequency protection
threshold.

Level-N OF Specifies the level-N grid

protection time overfrequency protection
(ms) duration.

Level-N UF Specifies the level-N grid

protection (Hz) underfrequency protection
threshold.

Level-N UF Specifies the level-N grid

protection time underfrequency protection
(ms) duration.

Feature Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Frequency-based The standards of certain -

control countries and regions require
that if the power grid frequency
fluctuates around the rated
value, the device needs to fine-
tune the active power output
based on Frequency-based
adjustment ratio to help
stabilize the power grid
frequency. In this case, set this
parameter to Enable.

Response Specifies the threshold for This parameter is

deadband of triggering frequency-based displayed when
frequency-based control. For example, if this Frequency-based
control parameter is set to 0.1 Hz, the control is set to
frequency-based control is not Enable.
triggered when the frequency is
within reference frequency±0.1
Hz.

Power change Specifies the active power

gradient of change gradient of frequency-
frequency-based based control.
control

Power change Specifies the upper limit for

limit of active power adjustment in
frequency-based frequency-based control.
control

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 242

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Frequency-based Specifies the adjustment ratio of

adjustment ratio the active power output.

Protection upon If this parameter is set to Enable, -

communication the device performs protection
failure based on the preset power when
its communication with the
SmartLogger is interrupted for a
period longer than
Communication disconnection
detection time.

Active power Specifies the protection mode of This parameter is

mode when the active power after the displayed when
communication communication is interrupted. Protection upon
fails The value can be Percentage or communication failure
Fixed value. is set to Enable.

Reactive power Specifies the protection mode of

mode when the reactive power after the
communication communication is interrupted.
fails The value can be Q/S or Power
factor.

Communication Specifies the detection time for

disconnection protection upon a
detection time (s) communication failure between
the device and the SmartLogger
or Smart Dongle.

Active power Specifies the active power This parameter is

threshold (%) threshold in percentage. displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication failure
fails [high is set to Enable and
precision] Active power mode
when communication
fails is set to
Percentage.

Active power Specifies the active power This parameter is

threshold (kW) threshold as a fixed value. displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication failure
fails [high is set to Enable and
precision] Active power mode
when communication
fails is set to Fixed
value.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Reactive power Specifies the Q/S threshold (%) This parameter is

threshold (Q/S) of the reactive power. displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication failure
fails [high is set to Enable and
precision] Reactive power mode
when communication
fails is set to Q/S.

Reactive power Specifies the power factor This parameter is

threshold (PF) threshold of the reactive power. displayed when
when Protection upon
communication communication failure
fails is set to Enable and
Reactive power mode
when communication
fails is set to Power
factor.

Soft start time (s) Specifies the duration for the -

power to gradually increase until
the device starts.

Shutdown Specifies the power change rate -

gradient (%/s) until the device shuts down.

HVRT HVRT is short for high voltage -

ride-through. When the grid
voltage is abnormally high for a
short time, the device cannot
disconnect from the power grid
immediately and has to work for
some time.

HVRT threshold Specifies the threshold for This parameter is

(V) triggering HVRT. The threshold displayed when HVRT
settings should meet the local is set to Enable.
grid standard.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 244

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Positive-sequence During HVRT, the device needs to

reactive power generate positive-sequence
compensation reactive power to support the
factor in HVRT power grid. This parameter is
used to set the positive-sequence
reactive power generated by the
device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
positive-sequence reactive
current generated by the device
is 20% of the rated current when
the AC voltage increases by 10%
during HVRT.

Negative- During HVRT, the device needs to

sequence reactive generate negative-sequence
power reactive power to support the
compensation power grid. This parameter is
factor in HVRT used to set the negative-
sequence reactive power
generated by the device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
negative-sequence reactive
current generated by the device
is 20% of the rated current when
the AC voltage increases by 10%
during HVRT.

Zero current due Specifies whether to enable the

to power grid function of working in zero-
fault current mode upon a power grid
fault.

Deactivate grid Specifies whether to shield the ● This parameter is

voltage protection voltage protection function displayed when
during HVRT/ during LVRT or HVRT. LVRT or HVRT is set
LVRT to Enable.
● LVRT recovery
VRT exit Specifies the LVRT/HVRT
threshold = LVRT
hysteresis recovery threshold.
threshold + VRT exit
threshold
hysteresis threshold
VRT active current Specifies the percentage of the ● HVRT recovery
limiting (%) maximum active current to the threshold = HVRT
rated current during fault ride- threshold – VRT exit
through (FRT). hysteresis threshold

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 245

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

VRT active power Specifies the recovery rate when

recovery gradient the active current is restored to
the value at the moment before
fault ride-through.

LVRT LVRT is short for low voltage -

ride-through. When the grid
voltage is abnormally low for a
short time, the device cannot
disconnect from the power grid
immediately and has to work for
some time.

LVRT threshold Specifies the threshold for This parameter is

(V) triggering LVRT. The threshold displayed when LVRT is
settings should meet the local set to Enable.
grid standard.

LVRT reactive During LVRT, the device needs to

current limiting limit the reactive current.
(%) For example, if you set this
parameter to 50, the reactive
current upper limit of the device
is 50% of the rated current
during LVRT.

Threshold of LVRT If Zero-current mode on power

zero-current grid fault is enabled and the
mode power grid voltage is less than
Threshold of LVRT zero-current
mode during LVRT, the zero-
current mode is used. Otherwise,
the mode set in LVRT mode is
used.

LVRT mode Specifies the LVRT mode. The

options are Zero-current mode,
Constant current mode,
Reactive power priority mode,
and Active power priority
mode.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Positive-sequence During LVRT, the device needs to

reactive power generate positive-sequence
compensation reactive power to support the
factor in LVRT power grid. This parameter is
used to set the positive-sequence
reactive power generated by the
device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
positive-sequence reactive
current generated by the device
is 20% of the rated current when
the AC voltage decreases by 10%
during LVRT.

Negative- During LVRT, the device needs to

sequence reactive generate negative-sequence
power reactive power to support the
compensation power grid. This parameter is
factor in LVRT used to set the negative-
sequence reactive power
generated by the device.
For example, if you set this
parameter to 2, the increment of
negative-sequence reactive
current generated by the device
is 20% of the rated current when
the AC voltage decreases by 10%
during LVRT.

LVRT active Specifies the active current -

current proportional coefficient before
maintenance and during LVRT.
coefficient

Overfrequency- If this parameter is set to Enable, -

caused power when the power grid frequency
derating exceeds the frequency threshold
for triggering overfrequency-
caused power derating, the
active power of the device is
derated based on a certain
gradient.

PCS power Specifies the power threshold for This parameter is

threshold for stopping overfrequency-caused displayed when
stopping power derating. Overfrequency-caused
overfrequency- power derating is set
caused power to Enable.
derating

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 247

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Underfrequency- The standards of certain -

caused power countries and regions require
raising that the device need to increase
the active power output to
increase the power grid
frequency if the power grid
frequency is lower than
Frequency threshold for
triggering underfrequency-
caused power raising. In this
case, set this parameter to
Enable.

PCS power Specifies the power threshold for This parameter is

threshold for stopping underfrequency-caused displayed when
stopping power raising. Underfrequency-
underfrequency- caused power raising
caused power is set to Enable.
raising

Power Regulation
Parameter Description

Active power (%) [high Adjusts the active power output of the device by
precision] percentage.

Active power (kW) Adjusts the active power output of the device by
fixed value.

Q-U characteristic curve Specifies the reactive power compensation mode

mode of the device output.

Power percentage for Specifies the reference apparent power in

triggering Q-U scheduling percentage. When the actual apparent power of
the device is greater than the value of this
parameter, the Q-U characteristic curve
scheduling function is enabled.

Minimum PF of Q-U Specifies the minimum power factor for Q-U

characteristic curve adjustment.

Percentage of apparent Specifies the percentage of apparent power.

power

Power factor Specifies the power factor of the device.

Reactive power change Specifies the change rate of the device reactive
gradient power.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 248

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Active power change Specifies the change rate of the device active
gradient power.

PF-U voltage detection filter Specifies the time for filtering the grid voltage in
time the PF-U curve.

Power control priority Set this parameter to Reactive power first or

Active power first.

Reference Power
Parameter Description

Apparent power baseline Specifies the apparent power baseline

for power scheduling. The value
cannot be greater than the maximum
apparent power.

Active power baseline Specifies the active power baseline for

power scheduling. The value cannot be
greater than the maximum active
power.

Battery Cluster
Parameter Description

Threshold for active balancing When the cell pressure difference

between packs reaches the threshold,
the active balancing management
logic is triggered.

DCDC Insulation resistance protection Set the insulation resistance protection

threshold threshold. If the actual value is less
than the threshold, the device does not
start.

Total charged energy calibration Calibrate the total charged energy.

Total discharged energy calibration Calibrate the total discharged energy.

Location of pack 1 Set the location ID of battery pack 1.

Location of pack 2 Set the location ID of battery pack 2.

Location of pack 3 Set the location ID of battery pack 3.

Location of pack 4 Set the location ID of battery pack 4.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 249

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Temperature Control System

Parameter Description Remarks

Liquid cooling Set this parameter to Automatic, -

mode Diagnostic Mode, or
Maintenance mode.
● Automatic: The liquid thermal
management system (LTMS) is
automatically controlled.
● Diagnostic Mode: The
operating status of the LTMS is
diagnosed.
● Maintenance mode: Choose
this mode when coolant needs
to be refilled or drained.

Silent mode Set this parameter to Off or On. -

If the silent mode is enabled, the
noise of the entire cabinet can be
reduced.

Power limit Set this parameter to Off or On. After this function is
function for liquid If the power limit function for enabled, the
cooling liquid cooling is enabled, the compressor and electric
operating power of the LMTS can heater of the LTMS
be limited. cannot be started at
the same time.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 250

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Maintenance Set this parameter to Standby, ● When you select

mode Refilling, or Draining. The Refilling, the
default value is Standby. following dialog box
● Standby: Wait for refilling is displayed:
coolant into or draining 1. After refilling is
coolant from the liquid cooling started, wait until
pipe system. the refilling process
● Refilling: Refill coolant into is complete so that
the liquid cooling pipe system. the LTMS can run
properly.
● Draining: Drain coolant from
the liquid cooling pipe system. 2. Manual operations
have been
performed according
to the manual. Are
you sure you want
to continue?
● When you select
Draining, the
following dialog box
is displayed:
1. After draining is
started, you need to
drain coolant and
refill coolant so that
the LTMS can run
properly.
2. Manual operations
have been
performed according
to the manual. Are
you sure you want
to continue?

Diagnostic Mode Set this parameter to Manual or -

Auto.
● Manual: Some components of
the LTMS are manually
controlled.
● Auto: The status of the LTMS
is checked automatically.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 251

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Battery Diagnose the functions of the This parameter is

temperature components involved in the displayed only when
control mode for following battery temperature Diagnostic Mode is set
diagnosis control modes: to Manual.
● Self-circulating
● Natural cooling
● Active cooling
● Waste heat recovery
● Heat pump heating
● Mixed heating
● Electric heating
C&I scenario: All modes are
applicable.
Utility scenario: Only Self-
circulating, Natural cooling,
Active cooling, and Electric
heating are applicable.

Internal Set this parameter to Off or On.

environment The dehumidifying control mode
dehumidifying can be enabled to diagnose the
control mode for functions of components involved
diagnosis in the dehumidification function.

Internal Set this parameter to Off, Passive

environment cooling, or Active cooling.
temperature ● Passive cooling: The passive
control mode for cooling function is enabled to
diagnosis diagnose the functions of
components involved in
passive cooling.
● Active cooling: The active
cooling function is enabled to
diagnose the functions of
components involved in active
cooling.

Maximum Set the maximum duration of the -

diagnostic mode diagnostic mode. The value range
duration is [5, 360] min. The system
automatically exits the diagnostic
mode when the specified duration
is reached.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 252

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Coolant Set the interval for coolant -

replacement replacement. The default value is
interval 3832 days (3 years). The value
range is [1095, 10950] days, that
is, 3 to 30 years.

Compressor 1 Set the control speed for This parameter is

setting status compressor 1. displayed when Liquid
cooling mode is set to
Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set
to Manual, and one of
the following
conditions is met:
● Battery
temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
Active cooling,
Heat pump
heating, or Mixed
heating.
● Internal
environment
dehumidifying
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
On.
● Internal
environment
temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
Active cooling.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 253

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Dehumidification Set the control speed for the This parameter is

fan setting status dehumidification fan. displayed when Liquid
cooling mode is set to
Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set
to Manual, and one of
the following
conditions is met:
● Internal
environment
dehumidifying
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
On.
● Internal
environment
temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
Passive cooling or
Active cooling.

Outdoor fan 1 Set the control speed for outdoor This parameter is
setting status fan 1. displayed when Liquid
cooling mode is set to
Outdoor fan 2 Set the control speed for outdoor Diagnostic Mode,
setting status fan 2. Diagnostic Mode is set
to Manual, and
Battery temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to one
of the following values:
● Self-circulating
● Natural cooling
● Active cooling
● Heat pump heating
● Mixed heating

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 254

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Setting status of Set the control speed for This parameter is

circulating pump circulating pump 1. displayed when Liquid
1 cooling mode is set to
Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set
to Manual, and either
of the following
conditions is met:
● C&I scenario: Battery
temperature control
mode for diagnosis is
set to Self-circulating,
Natural cooling,
Active cooling, Heat
pump heating, or
Mixed heating.
● Utility-scale scenario:
Battery temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
Self-circulating,
Natural cooling,
Active cooling, or
Mixed heating.

Setting status of Set the control speed for This parameter is

circulating pump circulating pump 2. displayed when Liquid
2 cooling mode is set to
Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set
to Manual, and
Battery temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to one
of the following values:
● Self-circulating
● Natural cooling
● Active cooling
● Waste heat
recovery
● Heat pump heating
● Mixed heating
● Electric heating

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 255

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Electric heater Set this parameter to Off or On. This parameter is

setting status displayed when Liquid
cooling mode is set to
Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set
to Manual, and
Battery temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
Mixed heating or
Electric heating.

Confirm coolant If the coolant needs to be -

replacement replaced, select this parameter
and click Submit.

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of EEV 1 of EEV 1, select this parameter
and click Submit.

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of EEV 2 of EEV 2, select this parameter
and click Submit.

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of of circulating pump 1, select this
circulating pump parameter and click Submit.
1

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of of circulating pump 2, select this
circulating pump parameter and click Submit.
2

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of of the electric heater, select this
electric heater parameter and click Submit.

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of of the dehumidifying fan, select
dehumidifying this parameter and click Submit.
fan

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of of outdoor fan 1, select this
outdoor fan 1 parameter and click Submit.

Clear total To recalculate the total runtime -

runtime of of outdoor fan 2, select this
outdoor fan 2 parameter and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 256

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Clear total air To recalculate the total usage -

filter usage time time of the air filter, select this
parameter and click Submit.

Clear compressor To recalculate the total runtime -

total runtime of the compressor, select this
parameter and click Submit.

Clear total To recalculate the total switching -

switching times times of multi-way valve, select
of multi-way this parameter and click Submit.
valve

Electricity Revise
Parameter Description

Adjust total energy A calibrating coefficient for the total energy yield to ensure that the
yield reported energy yield is consistent with the actual energy yield at the
grid connection point

Adjusted total power A calibrating coefficient for the total power supply from the grid to
supply from grid ensure that the reported amount of power supplied from the grid is
consistent with the actual power supply at the grid connection point

Historical power Clear the historical amount of electricity, including the total energy
clearing yield and total power supply from the grid.

6.3.14 Setting ESS Parameters (Model 3)

This section describes how to set ESS parameters only for the LUNA2000-4472-2S.

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > Running Param, set running parameters, and click
Submit.

Basic Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Exhaust fan Time when the exhaust function is self- This parameter
control module tested every day is displayed
self-test time when the
number of
exhaust fans is
greater than 0.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Exhaust fan After the self-test is started, the exhaust

control module fan will be running for a period of time
self-test to check its exhaust function. If the
exhaust fan does not meet the
requirements, the system cannot start.

Exhaust fan After started, the exhaust fan will

control automatically stop in at least 1 hour. If a
combustible gas alarm is generated, the
exhaust fan cannot be stopped. The
exhaust fan cannot be manually started
after the fire response is triggered until
the fire alarm is cleared or 24 hours
later.

High-temperature Set High-temperature alarm threshold -

alarm threshold of air conditioner in control unit cabin.
of air conditioner
in control unit
cabin

Low-temperature Set Low-temperature alarm threshold -

alarm threshold of air conditioner in control unit cabin.
of air conditioner
in control unit
cabin

Temperature Specifies whether the air-cooled air -

control mode of conditioner is scheduled by the PCS
control unit cabin (automatic) or manually controlled
(manual).

Running mode of Set Running mode of air conditioner in -

air conditioner in control unit cabin.
control unit cabin

Air conditioner Specifies whether to control the air -

on/off control in conditioner in the control unit cabin.
control unit cabin

DC busbar high Specifies whether to enable DC busbar -

temperature high temperature alarm.
alarm

Power-off upon Specifies whether to enable Power-off -

DC busbar upon DC busbar overtemperature.
overtemperature

DC busbar high Specifies the high temperature alarm -

temperature threshold for external power cables
alarm threshold connected to the container.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Threshold for Specifies the threshold for power-off due -

power-off upon to overtemperature of external power
DC busbar cables connected to the container.
overtemperature

Shutdown due to Specifies whether to enable the function -

Battery Cabin of shutdown when the battery cabin
Door Open door is opened.

Shutdown delay Specifies the delay for shutdown after a -

upon fire TRSD fault occurs.
suppression
system fault

[WLAN] Wake up Specifies whether to wake up the WLAN. -

Power Overload Specifies whether to enable the power -

Mode overload mode.

Power overload Specifies whether to enable the power -

enhancement overload enhancement mode. If this
mode parameter is set to Enable, the power
overload capability is enabled for a short
period of time.

Associate AC Specifies whether to enable the function -

auxiliary power of disconnecting the AC auxiliary power
supply with EPO supply when it is associated with EPO.

Temperature Control System

Parameter Description Remarks

Silent mode Set this parameter to Off or -

On. If the silent mode is
enabled, the noise of the
entire cabinet can be
reduced.

Max. Diagnostic Specifies the maximum -

Mode Duration duration of the diagnostic
mode. The system
automatically exits the
diagnostic mode when the
specified duration is
reached.

Coolant Specifies the interval for -

replacement coolant replacement.
interval

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 259

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Refrigerant system Specifies whether to start -

1 compressor compressor preheating for
preheating refrigerant system 1.

Refrigerant system Specifies whether to start -

2 compressor compressor preheating for
preheating refrigerant system 2.

Clear total To recalculate the total -

switching times of switching times of multi-
multi-way valve way valve, select this
parameter and click Submit.

Dust removal by Set Dust removal by -

reverse rotation reverse rotation based on
the site requirements.

Dust removal Set Dust removal interval -

interval based on the site
requirements.

Recover auxiliary Set Auxiliary power supply -

power supply for recovery for liquid cooling
liquid cooling to restore the power supply
to the liquid thermal
management system
(LTMS) after certain alarms
are generated.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of circulating runtime of the circulating
pump 1 pump, select this parameter
and click Submit.

Clear total air filter To recalculate the total -

usage time usage time of the air filter,
select this parameter and
click Submit.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of outdoor fan 1 runtime of outdoor fan 1,
select this parameter and
click Submit.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of outdoor fan 2 runtime of outdoor fan 2,
select this parameter and
click Submit.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of outdoor fan 3 runtime of outdoor fan 3,
select this parameter and
click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 260

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Clear compressor 1 To recalculate the total -

total runtime runtime of compressor 1,
select this parameter and
click Submit.

Clear compressor 2 To recalculate the total -

total runtime runtime of compressor 2,
select this parameter and
click Submit.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of EEV 1 runtime of EEV 1, select this
parameter and click Submit.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of EEV 2 runtime of EEV 2, select this
parameter and click Submit.

Clear total runtime To recalculate the total -

of electric heater runtime of the electric
heater, select this parameter
and click Submit.

Liquid cooling Set this parameter to -

mode Automatic, Diagnostic
Mode, or Maintenance
mode.
Automatic: The LTMS is
automatically controlled.
Diagnostic Mode: The
operating status of the
LTMS is diagnosed.
Maintenance mode:
Choose this mode when
coolant needs to be refilled
or drained.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 261

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Maintenance mode Set this parameter to When you select Refilling,

Standby, Refilling, or the following dialog box is
Draining. The default value displayed:
is Standby. After refilling is started,
Standby: Wait for refilling wait until the refilling
coolant into or draining process is complete so that
coolant from the liquid the LTMS can run properly.
cooling pipe system. Manual operations have
Refilling: Refill coolant into been performed according
the liquid cooling pipe to the manual. Are you sure
system. you want to continue?
Draining: Drain coolant When you select Draining,
from the liquid cooling pipe the following dialog box is
system. displayed:
After draining is started,
you need to drain all the
coolant and refill coolant so
that the LTMS can run
properly. Manual operations
have been performed
according to the manual.
Are you sure you want to
continue?

Confirm valve Specifies whether to confirm When Coolant

opening valve opening. Replacement Status is set
to Confirm valve opening ,
the app displays the
message "Tap Continue
after confirming that all
exhaust valves and pipe
ball valves have been
opened as required in the
manual." This signal is sent
after you tap Continue.

Confirm coolant If the coolant needs to be -

replacement replaced, select this
parameter and click Submit.

Diagnostic Mode Set this parameter to -

Manual or Auto.
Manual: Some components
of the LTMS are manually
controlled.
Auto: The status of the
LTMS is checked
automatically.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Battery Diagnose the functions of This parameter is displayed

temperature the components involved in only when Diagnostic
control mode for the following battery Mode is set to Manual.
diagnosis temperature control modes:
● Self-circulating
● Natural cooling
● Active cooling
● Waste heat recovery
● Heat pump heating
● Mixed heating
● Electric heating
C&I scenario: All modes are
applicable.
Utility scenario: Only Self-
circulating, Natural
cooling, Active cooling,
and Electric heating are
applicable.

Compressor 1 Specifies the control speed This parameter is displayed

setting status for compressor 1. when Liquid cooling mode
is set to Diagnostic Mode,
Compressor 2 Set the control speed for Diagnostic Mode is set to
setting status compressor 2. Manual, and one of the
following conditions is met:
● Battery temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to
Active cooling, Heat
pump heating, or
Mixed heating.
● Internal environment
dehumidifying control
mode for diagnosis is
set to On.
● Internal environment
temperature control
mode for diagnosis is
set to Active cooling.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 263

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Electric heater Set this parameter to Off or This parameter is displayed

setting status On. when Liquid cooling mode
is set to Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set to
Manual, and Battery
temperature control mode
for diagnosis is set to
Mixed heating or Electric
heating.

Setting status of Specifies the control speed This parameter is displayed

circulating pump 1 for circulating pump 1. when Liquid cooling mode
is set to Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set to
Manual, and either of the
following conditions is met:
● C&I scenario: Battery
temperature control mode
for diagnosis is set to Self-
circulating, Natural
cooling, Active cooling,
Heat pump heating, or
Mixed heating.
● Utility-scale scenario:
Battery temperature
control mode for
diagnosis is set to Self-
circulating, Natural
cooling, Active cooling, or
Mixed heating.

Outdoor fan 1 Specifies the control speed This parameter is displayed

setting status for outdoor fan 1. when Liquid cooling mode
is set to Diagnostic Mode,
Outdoor fan 2 Specifies the control speed Diagnostic Mode is set to
setting status for outdoor fan 2. Manual, and Battery
Outdoor fan 3 Specifies the control speed temperature control mode
setting status for outdoor fan 3. for diagnosis is set to one
of the following values:
● Self-circulating
● Natural cooling
● Active cooling
● Heat pump heating
● Mixed heating

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Setting status of Specifies the status of the This parameter is displayed

liquid refill pump liquid refill pump. when Liquid cooling
working mode is set to
Diagnostic Mode,
Diagnostic Mode is set to
Manual, and Battery
temperature control mode
for diagnosis is set to Self-
circulating.

Setting status of Specifies the status of the -

electric control box mixed-flow fan in the
mixed-flow fan electric control box.

Setting status of Specifies the status of drive -

drive cooling fan 1 cooling fan 1.

Setting status of Specifies the status of drive -

drive cooling fan 2 cooling fan 2.

6.3.14.1 Setting ESR Parameters

Procedure
Choose Monitoring > ESS > ESR > Running Param, set running parameters, and
click Submit.

Basic Parameters
Parameter Description Remarks

Battery cluster insulation Set Battery cluster -

resistance protection insulation resistance
threshold protection threshold.

Threshold for active Set Threshold for active -

balancing balancing.

Activate balancing Set Activate balancing -

module module.

Location information Set Location -

information.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 265

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Adjustment
Parameter Description Remarks

Total charged energy Calibrate the total -

calibration charged energy.

Total discharged energy Calibrate the total -

calibration discharged energy.

6.3.15 Setting PID Module Parameters

Procedure
1. Set access parameters.
Method 1: Click Auto. Search to connect to the PID module.
Method 2: Click Add Devices, set access parameters, and click Add Devices.

Table 6-15 Device access parameters

Parame Description Remarks
ter

Device Set this parameter to PID. -

Type

Port ● If the PID-PVBOX uses MBUS -

number for communication, set this
parameter to MBUS.
● If the PID module uses RS485
for communication, set this
parameter to the COM port
connected to the PID module.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parame Description Remarks

ter

Address Set this parameter to the ● The default baud rate of

communications address of the the PID module is 115200.
PID module. ● The baud rate of the PID
● If the PID module is used as a module shall be the same
standalone component, the as that of the RS485 COM
default communications port on the SmartLogger.
address is 1. If they are inconsistent,
● If the SACU is configured with choose Settings > Comm.
one PID module, the default Param. > RS485 and
communications address is change the baud rate of
199. the COM port connected
to the PID module.
● If the SACU is configured with
two PID modules, the default
communications addresses are
199 and 200.

NOTE

● If no device is found, check whether the RS485 communications cable is securely

connected.
● If no device is found, check whether the baud rate of the PID module is consistent
with that of the RS485 COM port on the SmartLogger. If they are inconsistent,
choose Settings > Comm. Param. > RS485 and change the baud rate of the COM
port connected to the PID module. The default baud rate of the PID module is
115200.
2. (Optional) Apply for and load the PID license. Perform this step if you need to
use the PID module to detect the ground insulation resistance. Otherwise, skip
this step.
a. Choose Maintenance > License Management > License application,
select the PID device for which a license is to be applied, click Export License
Appli File, and purchase a license file from the supplier.
b. Choose Maintenance > License Management > License loading, click
Upload License, select the PID device to which the license file is to be loaded,
and click Load License.
NOTE

SmartPID2000 V100R001SPC112, SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC153, and later

versions support the smart insulation monitoring function of the PID module. You can
check the function in Monitoring > PID > About. If PN is 02350XQD-001, the
function is supported. Otherwise, the function is not supported.
3. Set running parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-54 Setting running parameters

Set PID module running parameters based on the model of the connected device.
The PID device models include PID01 and SmartPID2000.

6.3.15.1 Setting PID01 Parameters

6.3.15.1.1 PID Module Running Parameters

NOTE

The parameter list provided in this document includes all configurable parameters
Configurable parameters vary depending on the device model. The actual display may vary.

Parameter Description

Offset mode Specifies the offset mode of the PID module.

● Select Disabled if the PID module is not required.
● Select N/PE if the PID module is required to use voltage output
from the inductor virtual midpoint.
● Select PV/PE if the PID module is required to use voltage
output from the negative PV terminal. This mode is applicable
only to Huawei SUN8000.
● In the SUN2000 scenario, Automatic indicates the N/PE offset
mode.

Output enabled Specifies whether PID module output is enabled.

PV module type Specifies the type of the PV module used in the power plant. For
details about the PV module type, consult the manufacturer.

PV/PE offset voltage Specifies the DC output voltage when the offset mode is set to
PV/PE.
● If the PV module type is P, set this parameter to P-type. In this
case, the output voltage of the PID module is positive.
● If the PV module type is N, set this parameter to N-type. In this
case, the output voltage of the PID module is negative.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 268

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Operation Mode Specifies the working mode of the PID module.

● Manual mode: If Offset mode is set to N/PE or PV/PE, and
Output enabled is set to Enable, the PID module outputs data
based on Output voltage (manual).
● Automatic mode: After the PID module and inverter
communicate with the SmartLogger properly, the PID module
automatically runs.
NOTE
● Before the first power-on, to check whether the PID functions properly,
it is recommended that Operation Mode be set to Manual.
● After checking that the PID module functions properly, set Operation
Mode to Automatic.

Output voltage (manual) Specifies the output voltage.

NOTE
After this parameter is set and the output from the PID module becomes
stable, use a multimeter that is set to the DC position to measure the
three-phase (A, B, and C) voltages of the power grid to the ground, and
check whether the voltages are the same as the configured values.

Maximum DC voltage Specifies the PV-PE voltage when the normal operation mode is
used.
If the PV module type is P, the parameter value indicates the
highest DC voltage between PV+ and PE. If the PV module type is
N, the parameter value indicates the highest DC voltage between
PV– and PE.

Maximum output voltage Specifies the maximum output voltage of the PID module.
If the offset mode is PV/PE, the parameter value indicates the
highest DC output voltage between PV and PE. If the offset mode
is N/PE, the parameter value indicates the highest DC output
voltage between N and PE.

IMD access Specifies whether the PID module and insulation monitor device
(IMD) can operate in cycle mode.
Only the IMDs of mainstream suppliers such as DOLD and
BENDER are supported, and the IMDs must have enabled dry
contacts.
NOTICE
You can set Periodic PID runtime, Periodic IMD runtime, and IMD control
dry contact only when IMD access is set to Enable.

Periodic PID runtime Specifies the running duration of the PID module when the PID
module and IMD operate in cycle mode.
The IMD is shut down when the PID module is operating.

Periodic IMD runtime Specifies the running duration of the IMD when the PID module
and IMD operate in cycle mode.
The PID module is standby when the IMD is running.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 269

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

IMD control dry contact Specifies the dry contact No. over which the SmartLogger controls
the IMD.
Set appropriate ports based on the cable connections between the
IMD and the SmartLogger.

PV module compensation Specifies the compensation direction of the PID module.

voltage direction ● PV– po: The voltage between the PV– and the ground is
increased to a value greater than 0 V through voltage
compensation.
Select PV– po for P-type PV modules or the N-type PV modules
that comprise the cells whose positive and negative polarities
are on different sides. For example, P-type PV modules, HIT, CIS,
thin-film PV modules, and CdTe PV modules meet the
requirement for PV– positive offset.
● PV+ ne: The voltage between the PV+ and the ground is
decreased to lower than 0 V through voltage compensation.
Select PV+ ne for the N-type PV modules that comprise the
cells whose positive and negative polarities are on the same
side.
NOTE
When designing a PV plant, the design institute and user should confirm
with the PV module vendor about the direction of voltage compensation
for the anti-PID effect of PV modules.

Working mode Specifies the working mode of the PID module.

● Manual: The PID module provides output based on Output
voltage (manual).
● Automatic mode: After the PID module and inverter
communicate with the SmartLogger properly, the PID module
automatically runs.
NOTE
● Before the first power-on, to check whether the PID functions properly,
it is recommended that Operation Mode be set to Manual.
● After checking that the PID module functions properly, set Operation
Mode to Automatic.

Maximum system DC-to- Specifies the voltages between the PV side and the ground and
ground withstand voltage between the AC side and the ground in normal mode.
Specifies the lower threshold of the maximum voltage range
between the inverter DC side (including the inverter, PV module,
cable, SPD, and switch) and the ground.
The default value is 1000 V. For a 1500 V inverter, the
recommended value is 1500 V.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 270

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

AC-to-ground resistance Specifies the alarm threshold for the impedance between the AC
alarm threshold side of the PID module and the ground.
You can set an alarm threshold for the impedance between the AC
grid and the ground for the PID module. If the detected
impedance is below the threshold, the PID module will generate
an alarm.

Compensation offset Specifies the compensation offset voltage between PV and the
voltage ground after the PID module operates stably.
The absolute value ranges from 0 V to 500 V, and the default
value is 50 V.
● If PV module compensation voltage direction is set to PV– po,
this parameter indicates the positive voltage between the PV–
and the ground. The compensation range is 0 V to +500 V.
● If PV module compensation voltage direction is set to PV+ ne,
this parameter indicates the negative voltage between the PV+
and the ground. The compensation range is –500 V to 0 V.
NOTE
● If Compensation offset voltage is set to 500 V, the PID module
provides the maximum output to enhance the voltage compensation
effect. The output voltage amplitude of the PID module is automatically
capped to ensure the safety of a PV plant. The output voltage
amplitude is also related to the maximum system DC-to-ground
withstand voltage and maximum output voltage.
● After this parameter is set, wait until the PID module runs properly and
use a multimeter to measure the voltage between the PV input terminal
of the inverter and the ground. (PV– po: the voltage between the PV–
and the ground is greater than or equal to 0 V; PV+ ne: the voltage
between the PV+ and the ground is less than or equal to 0 V.)

Clear data Clears the active alarms and historical alarms stored on the PID
module.
You can select Clear data to clear active alarms and historical
alarms for the PID module.

6.3.15.1.2 PID-PVBOX Running Parameters

Parameter Description

Operating mode Specifies the current working mode of the PID module.
● Before setting this parameter to Manual, ensure that the
inverters in the PV array have shut down and the DC switches
of the inverters have been turned off. This working mode is
used during startup commissioning or fault locating. In this
condition, the PID-PVBOX delivers the output voltage based on
the value of the commissioned output voltage.
● After checking that the PID module is running properly, set this
parameter to Automatic.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 271

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Output voltage (manual) Specifies the output voltage when the PID module works in
commissioning mode.

Repair time Specifies the recovery time for each day.

Voltage to be repaired Specifies the output voltage when the PID module works in
commissioning mode.

6.3.15.1.3 PID-SSC Running Parameters

Parameter Description

Operating mode Specifies the current working mode of the PID module.
● Set this parameter to Manual during commissioning after
deployment or fault locating. In this case, the PID-SSC delivers
the output voltage based on the value of the commissioned
output voltage.
● After checking that the PID module is running properly, set this
parameter to Automatic.

Output voltage (manual) Specifies the output voltage when the PID module works in
commissioning mode. It is recommended that Output voltage
(manual) be set to a value greater than 250 V.

6.3.15.2 Setting SmartPID2000 Parameters

Table 6-16 Setting PID running parameters

Tab Parameter Description

Running Offset mode Specifies the offset mode of the PID module.
Param. ● Disabled: The PID module is not required.
● N/PE: The PID module is required to output voltage from
the grid.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 272

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

PV module Specifies the compensation direction of the PID module.

compensation ● PV– po: The voltage between the PV– and the ground is
voltage direction increased to a value greater than 0 V through voltage
compensation.
Select PV– po for P-type PV modules or the N-type PV
modules that comprise the cells whose positive and
negative polarities are on different sides. For example, P-
type PV modules, HIT, CIS, thin-film PV modules, and
CdTe PV modules meet the requirement for PV– positive
offset.
● PV+ ne: The voltage between the PV+ and the ground is
decreased to lower than 0 V through voltage
compensation.
Select PV+ ne for the N-type PV modules that comprise
the solar cells whose positive and negative polarities are
on the same side.
NOTE
When designing a PV plant, the design institute and user should
confirm with the PV module vendor about the direction of
voltage compensation for the anti-PID effect of PV modules.

Working mode Specifies the working mode of the PID module.

● Automatic: In normal mode, the PID module operates
automatically after the PID module, inverter, and
SmartLogger communicate with each other properly.
● Manual: In commissioning mode, no inverter needs to be
connected. The PID module can run independently and is
used for commissioning only.
NOTICE
● Compensation offset voltage is displayed and can be set only
when Working mode is set to Automatic.
● Output voltage (manual) is displayed and can be set only
when Working mode is set to Manual.
● Before the first power-on, to check whether the PID module
functions properly, it is recommended that Working mode be
set to Manual. If the PID module functions properly, set
Working mode to Automatic.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 273

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Compensation Specifies the PV-ground compensation offset voltage after

offset voltage the PID module works stably in automatic mode. The
absolute value ranges from 0 V to 500 V, and the default
value is 50 V.
● If PV module compensation voltage direction is set to
PV– po, this parameter indicates the positive voltage
between the PV– and the ground. The compensation
range is 0 V to +500 V.
● If PV module compensation voltage direction is set to PV
+ ne, this parameter indicates the negative voltage
between the PV+ and the ground. The compensation
range is –500 V to 0 V.
● If Compensation offset voltage is set to 500 V, the PID
module provides the maximum output to enhance the
voltage compensation effect. The output voltage
amplitude of the PID module is automatically capped to
ensure the safety of a PV plant. The output voltage
amplitude is also related to the maximum system DC-to-
ground withstand voltage and maximum output voltage.
● After this parameter is set, wait until the PID module
runs properly and use a multimeter to measure the
voltage between the PV input terminal of the inverter
and the ground. (PV– po: the voltage between the PV–
and the ground is greater than or equal to 0 V; PV+ ne:
the voltage between the PV+ and the ground is less than
or equal to 0 V.)

Output voltage Specifies the step-up voltage when the working mode is
(manual) manual. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 V to 800
V.
It is recommended that the commissioning output voltage
for a 1000 V/1100 V inverter be set to a value ranging from
50 V to 400 V, and that the commissioning output voltage
for the 1500 V inverter be set to a value ranging from 50 V
to 600 V.
NOTE
Maximum output voltage can be displayed and set based on the
actual networking if there is no battery in the network.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 274

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Maximum output The value of this parameter ranges from 0 V to 800 V. The
voltage default value is 500 V. For a 1500 V inverter, the
recommended value is 800 V.
● For a 1000 V/1100 V inverter, the value ranges from 0 V
to 550 V. The parameter value indicates the maximum
DC step-up voltage between PV and the ground.
● For a 1500 V inverter, the value ranges from 0 V to 800 V.
The parameter value indicates the maximum DC step-up
voltage between PV and the ground.
NOTICE
Maximum output voltage can be displayed and set based on
the actual networking if there is no battery in the network.

Maximum system Specifies the voltages between the PV side and the ground
DC-to-ground and between the AC side and the ground in automatic
withstand voltage mode. The value of this parameter ranges from 500 V to
1500 V.
Specifies the lower threshold of the maximum voltage range
between the inverter DC side (including the inverter, PV
module, cable, SPD, and switch) and the ground.
The default value is 1000 V. For a 1500 V inverter, the
recommended value is 1500 V.
NOTICE
Maximum system DC-to-ground withstand voltage can be
displayed and set based on the actual networking if there is no
battery in the network.

IMD access Specifies whether the PID module and insulation monitor
device (IMD) can operate in cycle mode.
● Select Enable if you allow the PID module and IMD to
operate in cycle mode.
● Select Disable if you forbid the access of IMDs.
NOTICE
● This parameter can be displayed and set only when Smart
insulation monitoring is set to Disable.
● Periodic PID runtime and Periodic IMD runtime can be
displayed and set only when IMD access is set to Enable.

Periodic PID Specifies the running duration of the PID module when the
runtime PID module and IMD operate in cycle mode. The value of
this parameter ranges from 60 min to 480 min. The IMD is
shut down when the PID module is running.

Periodic IMD Specifies the running duration of the IMD when the PID
runtime module and IMD operate in cycle mode. The value of this
parameter ranges from 15 min to 480 min. The PID module
is standby when the IMD is running.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 275

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Smart insulation If no IMD is configured in the actual networking, you are

monitoring[1] advised to purchase and load the PID license. After the
license is successfully loaded, set Smart insulation
monitoring to Enable to enable the PID-to-ground
insulation resistance detection function. If you do not need
this function, set this parameter to Disable.
NOTICE
● IMD access is shielded only when this parameter is set to
Enable.
● System-to-ground insulation resistance is displayed only when
this parameter is set to Enable.
● System-to-ground resistance alarm threshold, System-to-
ground resistance warning threshold, System-to-ground
impedance detection time, Trigger ACB tripping upon IMD
alarm, and Corresponding transformer winding can be
displayed and set only when Smart insulation monitoring is set
to Enable.
● In the PV-only scenario, if Smart insulation monitoring is set to
Enable:
1. Choose Monitoring > Inverter > Running Param. > Feature
Parameters and check whether PID protection at night is
set to Enable. If it is set to Disable, manually set it to
Enable.
2. Choose Monitoring > Inverter > Running Param. > Feature
Parameters and check whether the setting of PID
compensation direction is consistent with that of PV
module compensation voltage direction in Monitoring >
PID > Running Param.. If the settings are inconsistent,
change the setting of PID compensation direction.

System-to-ground Specifies the alarm threshold for the system-to-ground

resistance alarm resistance of the PID module. When the resistance is less
threshold[1] than this threshold, the PID module will generate an alarm.
The recommended value ranges from 5.0 kΩ to 50.0 kΩ.
The default value is 8.0 kΩ.
System-to-ground resistance alarm threshold < System-to-
ground resistance warning threshold.

System-to-ground Specifies the warning threshold for the system-to-ground

resistance warning resistance of the PID module. When the resistance is less
threshold[1] than this threshold, the PID module will generate a warning.
The recommended value ranges from 5.0 kΩ to 50.0 kΩ.
The default value is 10.0 kΩ.
System-to-ground resistance alarm threshold < System-to-
ground resistance warning threshold.

System-to-ground Specifies the system-to-ground impedance detection time.

impedance When the impedance is lower than the detection point for a
detection time[1] period longer than the detection time, an alarm or warning
is generated. The value of this parameter ranges from 10s
to 1800s. The default value is 100s.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Trigger ACB Specifies whether to trigger ACB tripping for the

tripping upon IMD transformer station when a system-to-ground resistance
alarm[1] alarm is generated. Set this parameter to Disable or Enable
based on the actual application scenario. If this parameter is
set to Enable, the entire system shuts down when a system-
to-ground resistance alarm is generated.

Corresponding Configure the winding number of the transformer station

transformer corresponding to the current PID module. Select Low-
winding[1] voltage cabinet A or Low-voltage cabinet B based on the
actual application scenario.

Running System-to-ground When the system-to-ground insulation resistance is lower

Info. insulation than the system-to-ground resistance alarm threshold and
resistance[2] warning threshold, the system generates an alarm.

Note [1]: This parameter can be displayed and set in SmartPID2000 V100R001SPC112,
SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC153, and later versions.
Note [2]: This parameter can be displayed in SmartPID2000 V100R001SPC112, SmartLogger
V300R023C00SPC153, and later versions.

6.3.16 Setting Meter Parameters

6.3.16.1 Setting DL/T645 Meter Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Set access parameters and click Add Devices.

Figure 6-55 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to Power Meter.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Comm. Protocol Set this parameter to DL/T645.

Port number Set this parameter to the COM port connected to the
meter.

Address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the meter.

Table ID Set this parameter to the meter ID.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Meter > Running Param., set running parameters, and click
Submit.
Parameter Description

Protocol version Select DL/T645-2007 or DL/T645-1997 based on the

protocol version of the meter.

Number of lead bytes Retain the default value unless otherwise specified.

Voltage change ratio ● Set this parameter to 1 if the meter uploads the
primary value.
Current change ratio
● Set this parameter based on the actual transformer
ratio if the meter uploads the secondary value.
NOTE
If both the power meter and the SmartLogger support the
settings of the voltage transformer ratio and current
transformer ratio, you can only set them either on the power
meter or the SmartLogger. You are advised to set these
parameters on the power meter.

Meter usage Meters include export+import meters, production

meters, consumption meters, charger meters, and
external production meters.
● Export+import meter: used for grid-connection
point control. Each array allows only one export
+import meter to be connected.
● Production meter: PV output meter. Multiple
production meters can be connected.
● Consumption meter: load consumption meter.
Multiple consumption meters can be connected.
● Charger meter: charger consumption meter.
Multiple charger meters can be connected. This
parameter can be configured only in
V300R023C00SPC160 and later versions.
● Ext. production meter: third-party PV output
meter. Multiple external production meters can be
connected.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 278

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Meter access This switch is used when the physical wiring of the
direction[1] meter is reversely connected. You can adjust the
software switch to avoid wiring reconstruction of the
meter. Only the following three scenarios are
supported. If Meter access direction is incorrectly set,
data will be incorrectly reported.
● Positive: The default value is Positive, which
applies to the scenario where cables are correctly
connected to the meter.
● Reverse: If the meter is reversely connected and
the NMS does not support reverse connection, set
this parameter to Reverse. The SmartLogger
automatically adjusts the power and other data of
the meter to ensure data accuracy for the plant
and meter.
● Reverse_Report raw data: If the meter is reversely
connected and the NMS supports reverse
connection[2], set this parameter to
Reverse_Report raw data. This parameter is valid
only for Export+import meter. The SmartLogger
reports the original data of the meter to the NMS,
and the NMS adjusts the data such as power.

Note [1]: Meter access direction can be configured only in

V300R001C00SPC609 and later, V800R021C10SPC140 and later, and
V300R023C00 and later.
Note [2]: If cables are reversely connected to the meter and the NMS can
correctly display the real-time data of the meter, it is considered that the NMS
supports reverse connection. That is, the NMS reverses the active power, reactive
power, power factor, phase A active power, phase B active power, and phase C
active power, replaces the total positive active energy and total negative active
energy with each other, and replaces the total positive reactive power and total
negative reactive power with each other.

NOTE

● When Meter access direction is set to Positive or Reverse, Electric meter power
direction must be set to Positive. Electric meter power direction is set in the grid
connection with limited power under active power control and power closed-loop
control under reactive power control.
● When Meter access direction is set to Reverse_Report raw data, Electric meter
power direction must be set to Reverse. Electric meter power direction is set in the
grid connection with limited power under active power control and power closed-loop
control under reactive power control.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.16.2 Setting Modbus-RTU Meter Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Set access parameters and click Add Devices.

Figure 6-56 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to Power Meter.

Comm. Protocol Set this parameter to Modbus-RTU.

Port number Set this parameter to the COM port connected to the
meter.

Address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the meter.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Meter > Running Param., set meter parameters, and click
Submit.
● When the model of the connected meter is in the Intelligent Power Meter
Type drop-down list, set the parameters as follows.
Parameter Description

Intelligent Power Meter Set this parameter to the corresponding meter model.
Type

Voltage change ratio ● Set this parameter to 1 if the meter uploads the
primary value.
Current change ratio
● Set this parameter based on the actual transformer
ratio if the meter uploads the secondary value.
NOTE
If both the power meter and the SmartLogger support the
settings of the voltage transformer ratio and current
transformer ratio, you can only set them either on the power
meter or the SmartLogger. You are advised to set these
parameters on the power meter.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 280

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Meter usage Meters include export+import meters, production

meters, consumption meters, charger meters, and
external production meters.
● Export+import meter: used for grid-connection
point control. Each array allows only one export
+import meter to be connected.
● Production meter: PV output meter. Multiple
production meters can be connected.
● Consumption meter: load consumption meter.
Multiple consumption meters can be connected.
● Charger meter: charger consumption meter.
Multiple charger meters can be connected. This
parameter can be configured only in
V300R023C00SPC160 and later versions.
● Ext. production meter: third-party PV output
meter. Multiple external production meters can be
connected.

Meter access This switch is used when the physical wiring of the
direction[1] meter is reversely connected. You can adjust the
software switch to avoid wiring reconstruction of the
meter. Only the following three scenarios are
supported. If Meter access direction is incorrectly set,
data will be incorrectly reported.
● Positive: The default value is Positive, which
applies to the scenario where cables are correctly
connected to the meter.
● Reverse: If the meter is reversely connected and
the NMS does not support reverse connection, set
this parameter to Reverse. The SmartLogger
automatically adjusts the power and other data of
the meter to ensure data accuracy for the plant
and meter.
● Reverse_Report raw data: If the meter is reversely
connected and the NMS supports reverse
connection[2], set this parameter to
Reverse_Report raw data. This parameter is valid
only for Export+import meter. The SmartLogger
reports the original data of the meter to the NMS,
and the NMS adjusts the data such as power.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Note [1]: Meter access direction can be configured only in

V300R001C00SPC609 and later, V800R021C10SPC140 and later, and
V300R023C00 and later.
Note [2]: If cables are reversely connected to the meter and the NMS can
correctly display the real-time data of the meter, it is considered that the NMS
supports reverse connection. That is, the NMS reverses the active power, reactive
power, power factor, phase A active power, phase B active power, and phase C
active power, replaces the total positive active energy and total negative active
energy with each other, and replaces the total positive reactive power and total
negative reactive power with each other.

NOTE

● When Meter access direction is set to Positive or Reverse, Electric meter power
direction must be set to Positive. Electric meter power direction is set in the grid
connection with limited power under active power control and power closed-loop
control under reactive power control.
● When Meter access direction is set to Reverse_Report raw data, Electric meter
power direction must be set to Reverse. Electric meter power direction is set in the
grid connection with limited power under active power control and power closed-loop
control under reactive power control.
● If the connected meter is of another model, set the parameters as follows.
Parameter Description

Intelligent Power Meter Set this parameter to Other.

Type

Read function code Read holding register 03H and Read input register
04H are supported. Set this parameter based on the
vendor's protocol.

Read mode Multiple read and Single read are supported.

Word order Big endian and Little endian are supported. Set this
parameter based on the vendor's protocol.

Start address When Read mode is set to Multiple read, set the
start address.

End address When Read mode is set to Multiple read, set the end
address.

Voltage change ratio ● Set this parameter to 1 if the meter uploads the
primary value.
Current change ratio
● Set this parameter based on the actual transformer
ratio if the meter uploads the secondary value.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Signal parameters Set this parameter based on the vendor's protocol.

NOTE NOTE
Signal parameters If the power meter can collect a certain signal, set Signal
include Signal Name, address to the address of the corresponding register. If not,
Signal address, Number set Signal address to 65535.
of Registers, Gain, Data
Type, and Unit.

----End

6.3.17 Setting EMI Parameters

6.3.17.1 Setting Modbus-RTU EMI Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Set access parameters and click Add Devices.

Figure 6-57 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to EMI.

Connection mode Set this parameter to Modbus-RTU.

Port number Set this parameter to the serial number of the COM
port connected to the EMI.

Address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the EMI.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > EMI > Running Param., set running parameters and click
Submit.
● If the model of the connected EMI is displayed in the EMI model drop-down
list box, set parameters as follows.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 283

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

EMI model Set this parameter to the model of the connected EMI.

Synchronize You are advised to retain the default value Disable.

Environment Data NOTE
When this parameter is set to Enable, the SmartLogger
transmits the wind speed and direction data to the solar
inverter in a PV plant with the tracking system.

Threshold of fast ● This parameter can be manually set. The value

synchronization of ranges from 15.0 to 30.0.
wind speeds ● When the actual wind speeds collected by all
running EMIs are within the threshold of fast
synchronization of wind speeds, all EMIs
synchronize the real-time wind speeds to inverters
every minute by default. The inverters forward the
real-time wind speeds to trackers.
● When the actual wind speed collected by any
running EMI exceeds the threshold, all running
EMIs will send the real-time wind speeds five times
at an interval of 10s. After that, the real-time wind
speeds are synchronized to the inverters every
minute.

Master/Slave When the SmartLogger connects to multiple EMIs, set

one of them to master mode. The solar inverter
performance data displayed is the data of the EMI in
master mode.

● If the connected EMI is a split EMI that supports Modbus-RTU, set parameters
as follows.
Parameter Description

EMI model Set this parameter to Sensor(ADAM).

Synchronize You are advised to retain the default value Disable.

Environment Data NOTE
When this parameter is set to Enable, the SmartLogger
transmits the wind speed and direction data to the solar
inverter in a PV plant with the tracking system.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 284

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Master/Slave When the SmartLogger connects to multiple EMIs, set

one of them to master mode. Both the inverter
performance data and plant performance data pages
display data on the EMI in master mode.
NOTE
● If a single EMI is set to master mode or slave mode, the
EMI data is displayed in both the inverter performance
data and plant performance data pages.
● When the SmartLogger connects to multiple EMIs, only
one EMI can be set to master mode. If multiple EMIs are
set to master mode, only the last configuration takes
effect, that is, the last EMI is set to master mode and the
other EMIs are automatically switched to slave mode.
● If multiple EMIs are connected to the SmartLogger and
these EMIs are set to slave mode, the performance data
of the first connected EMI is displayed in both the inverter
performance data and plant performance data pages.

Read function code Set this parameter to Read holding register 03H or
Read holding register 04H based on the protocol
adopted by the vendor.

Data reporting mode Set this parameter to Integer or Floating point based
on the protocol adopted by the vendor.

Word ordering Set this parameter to Big endian or Little endian

based on the protocol adopted by the vendor.

Read mode The value can be Multiple read or Single read.

Start address If Read mode is set to Multiple read, set the start
address for reading.

End address If Read mode is set to Multiple read, set the end
address for reading.

Signal parameters Set this parameter based on the vendor's protocol.

NOTE NOTE
Signal parameters If the EMI can collect a signal, set Signal address for the
include Signal Name, signal to the corresponding register address. If the EMI
Signal address, Lower cannot collect a signal, set Signal address for the signal to
Thres., Upper Thres., 65535.
Spec, Start (mV/mA),
End (mV/mA), and Unit.

● If the connected EMI is of another model, set parameters as follows.

Parameter Description

EMI model Set this parameter to Other.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Synchronize You are advised to retain the default value Disable.

Environment Data NOTE
When this parameter is set to Enable, the SmartLogger
transmits the wind speed and direction data to the solar
inverter in a PV plant with the tracking system.

Master/Slave When the SmartLogger connects to multiple EMIs, set

one of them to master mode. The solar inverter
performance data displayed is the data of the EMI in
master mode.

Read function code Set this parameter to Read holding register 03H or
Read holding register 04H based on the protocol
adopted by the vendor.

Data reporting mode Set this parameter to Integer or Floating point based
on the protocol adopted by the vendor.

Word ordering Set this parameter to Big endian or Little endian

based on the protocol adopted by the vendor.

Read mode The value can be Multiple read or Single read.

Start address If Read mode is set to Multiple read, set the start
address for reading.

End address If Read mode is set to Multiple read, set the end
address for reading.

Signal parameters Set this parameter based on the vendor's protocol.

NOTE NOTE
Signal parameters If the EMI can collect a signal, set Signal address for the
include Signal Name, signal to the corresponding register address. If the EMI
Signal address, Gain, cannot collect a signal, set Signal address for the signal to
Offset, and Unit. 65535.

----End

6.3.17.2 Setting AI EMI Parameters

Procedure
Step 1 Set access parameters and click Add Devices.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 286

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-58 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to EMI.

Connection mode Set this parameter to AI.

Address Set this parameter to the communication address of

the EMI.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > EMI(AI) > Running Param., set running parameters and
click Submit.

Parameter Description

Synchronize You are advised to retain the default value Disable.

Environment Data NOTE
When this parameter is set to Enable, the SmartLogger
transmits the wind speed and direction data to the solar
inverter in a PV plant with the tracking system.

Master/Slave When the SmartLogger connects to multiple EMIs, set

one of them to master mode. The solar inverter
performance data displayed is the data of the EMI in
master mode.

Signal parameters Set these parameters as required.

NOTE NOTE
Signal parameters When you need to change the configured port number, set
include Signal Name, Port number to No first, then to the required port number.
Port number, Lower
Thres., Upper Thres.,
Start (V/mA), End (V/
mA), and Unit.

Step 3 If Port number is set to the number of the connected PT port, click PT T
Correction to correct the temperature.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.18 Setting STS Parameters

The STS can be connected to the SmartLogger over RS485 or FE. If the STS is
connected to the SmartLogger over RS485, you need to manually add devices and
set access parameters. If the STS is connected over FE, the SmartLogger
automatically identifies the STS.

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) If the STS connects to the SmartLogger over RS485, click Add Devices
and set access parameters.

Figure 6-59 Setting access parameters

Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to STS.

Port number Set this parameter to the number of the COM port
connected to the STS.

Address Set this parameter to the communications address of

the STS.

Step 2 Choose Monitoring > STS, set device monitoring parameters and click Submit.
Tab Function Description

Teleindication Views the status parameters -

of the device, such as the
switched-on or switched-off
state.

Telemetering Views the real-time data of -

the device, such as the
voltage.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 288

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Function Description

Telecontrol Sets status control Set this parameter as

parameters, such as the required.
parameter for controlling
switch-on or switch-off.

Performance Views or exports the -

Data performance data of the
device.

Running Param. Sets the standby signals for Set this parameter as
teleindication, telemetering, required.
and teleadjust.

Active Alarm Queries active alarms. -

About Queries communication -

information.

Step 3 Choose Settings > Other Parameters and set STS overtemperature protection
as required.

----End

6.3.19 Setting IEC103 Device Parameters

Description
IEC103 devices support transparent transmission. When the SmartLogger connects
to the management system, it transparently transmits IEC103 device data to the
management system without parsing the data.

Transparent Transmission Mode

Step 1 Set IEC103 parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-60 Setting IEC103 parameters

Parameter Description

IEC103 port No. Set this parameter based on the COM port connected
to the device.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 289

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

IEC103 address Set this parameter to the IEC103 device address.

IEC103 IP Set this parameter to the IP address of the

management system.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Other Parameters and check that Data forwarding is set to
Enable.

NOTICE

● If Data forwarding is set to Enable, the SmartLogger transparently transmits

information about unconnected devices to the management system without
parsing device data.
● If Data forwarding is set to Disable, the SmartLogger does not transmit
information about unconnected devices to the management system.

----End

6.3.20 Setting Custom Device Parameters

Context
The SmartLogger can connect to third-party devices supporting the Modbus RTU
protocol, such as transformer stations and EMIs. The protocol information points
vary depending on vendors. Therefore, you need to configure a protocol
information file in .cfg format. To connect devices to the SmartLogger, the supplier
or Huawei engineers need to modify the parameters in the device configuration
table file delivered with the version based on device requirements, generate a
protocol information file in .cfg format, and import the file to the SmartLogger.
The supported device types are Custom Device1 to Custom Device10. The
corresponding configuration file names are modbus_equip_custom_1.cfg to
modbus_equip_custom_10.cfg. Multiple devices of the same type can be
connected.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the protocol information point file in .cfg format and import the file to
the SmartLogger.

Figure 6-61 Importing configuration

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 290

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Step 2 Click Add Devices and set access parameters.

Figure 6-62 Setting access parameters

Parameter Setting

Device Type Currently, Custom Device1 to Custom Device10 are

supported.
Set this parameter based on the configuration import
file. For example, if you import
modbus_equip_custom_1.cfg, select Custom
Device1.

Port number Set this parameter to the number of the COM port
connected to the custom device.

Address Set this parameter to the communications address of

the custom device.

Step 3 Set monitoring parameters and click Submit.

Figure 6-63 Monitoring

Tab Function Setting

Running Info. Displays the running -

information about the
custom device.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Function Setting

Teleindication Displays the device status, -

such as the switch status.

Telemetering Displays the real-time analog -

data of the device, such as
the voltage.

Telecontrol Allows users to set status Set this parameter as

control parameters, such as required.
the parameter for controlling
switch-on or switch-off.

Teleadjust Allows users to set analog Set this parameter as

parameters, such as voltage required.
protection parameters.

----End

6.3.21 Setting Parameters for Poverty Alleviation Monitoring

Center
Procedure
The SmartLogger can be connected to the poverty alleviation monitoring center in
either of the following modes:
● Method 1: The SmartLogger connects to the poverty alleviation monitoring
center through the FusionSolar SmartPVMS. Method 1 (recommended): Use
the FusionSolar SmartPVMS to import the plant information configuration
package provided by the poverty alleviation monitoring center to the
SmartLogger.
● Method 2: The SmartLogger directly connects to the poverty alleviation
monitoring center. Method 2: Based on the PV plant information
configuration package provided by the poverty alleviation monitoring center,
choose Settings > Poverty Alleviation Monitoring Center and set the
parameters of the SmartLogger poverty alleviation monitoring center. This
method is used as an example in this section.

Figure 6-64 Parameters related to the poverty alleviation monitoring center

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 292

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Basic Server Set this parameter to the

Information address of the poverty
alleviation monitoring
center server.

Port Set this parameter to the

port number of the poverty
alleviation monitoring
center server.

User Name Configure the power

station information
Password package based on the
Device SN: power station information
provided by the poverty
PV plant ID alleviation monitoring
center.
This object indicates the
name of a CA certificate
file.

Forwarding Solar inverter

table

6.3.22 Smart Tracking Algorithm

Context
● Before using the smart tracking algorithm, check whether the plant meets the
requirements for using this function based on the onsite smart tracking
algorithm delivery checklist, and check whether the Modbus protocol versions
between the plant networking devices are compatible.
● When the SmartLogger is connected to a third-party PV module support, it
implements only smart tracking and does not support maintenance for the
third-party PV module support.
● The smart tracking algorithm can be configured only after a license is
purchased and loaded.
● For details about how to load a license, see 7.4.6 License Management.

Procedure
After the trackers are commissioned during onsite delivery, their parameters can
be intelligently controlled by the smart tracking algorithm.

1. Choose Settings > Smart Tracking Algorithm, set Tracker working mode to
Automatic and Smart tracking algorithm to Enable. Then, the smart
tracking algorithm automatically adjusts tracker parameters such as the angle
based on sunlight to maximize energy yield.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-65 Smart tracking algorithm (SDS) parameters

6.3.23 Setting IMD Parameters

Context
The SmartLogger connects to an IMD over RS485. IMD whitelist: DOLD
RN5897.12/011 + RP5898/61 This function applies only to the C&I scenario and is
supported in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC172 and later versions.

NOTICE

Ensure that cables are correctly and securely connected to the IMD according to
the IMD user manual. If cables are incorrectly connected or in poor contact, the
IMD cannot work properly and the insulation resistance detection function fails.

Procedure
1. Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Connect Device > Add Devices to
set access parameters.
Parameter Description

Device Type Set this parameter to IMD.

Port number The IMD uses RS485 for

communication. Set the COM port
connected to the IMD based on site
requirements.

Address Set the IMD communications

address based on site requirements.

Model of equipment DOLD RN5897.12/011

2. View IMD running information.

Figure 6-66 IMD running information

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 294

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.3.24 Setting Relay Parameters

Context
A relay protection device is an important test tool to ensure the safe and reliable
operation of the system. A relay protection device must be configured in the On-
grid/Off-grid (VSG) scenario when microgrid control is implemented by the
SmartLogger.

Procedure
1. Add the device.
– Method 1: Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Connect Device. The
Connect Device page is displayed. Click Add Devices and set related
parameters.

– Method 2: Select Yes in the Do you want to connect the relay

protection device? dialog box under Microgrid in Deployment Wizard.
Set relay protection device parameters.

Table 6-17 Relay protection device parameters

Parameter Description

Port Set the COM port connected to Relay protection

device based on the actual cable connections.

Baud rate Set the baud rate, parity, stop bit, and address of
Relay protection device to be consistent with the
Parity communications parameters of the relay protection
Stop Bit device.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Address

Device Type Set this parameter to Relay protection device.

Device model Set this parameter to Easergy P3U30.

2. Choose Monitoring > RELAY > Telecontrol, set telecontrol parameters for the
relay protection device, and click Submit.
Parameter Description

PCC Breaker Off Turns off the on/off-grid switch. To turn off the
Preset switch, enable PCC Breaker Control Execute.

PCC Breaker On Turns on the on/off-grid switch. To turn on the switch,

Preset enable PCC Breaker Control Execute.

PCC Breaker 0: Disables the function of turning on or off the on/

Control Execute off-grid switch remotely by the relay protection
device.
1: Enables the function of turning on or off the on/
off-grid switch remotely by the relay protection
device.

6.4 Setting Battery Control Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00SPC602 and earlier versions.

Battery Settings
● Choose Settings > Battery Settings to set the working mode.

Table 6-18 Battery control working modes

Working Mode Mode Description

No control The SmartLogger directly delivers the external

scheduling power limit. No other power
scheduling control is performed. The power is
automatically controlled by the device.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 296

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

Maximum self- ● This mode applies to areas where the

consumption electricity price is high, or areas where the FIT
subsidy is low or unavailable. The PV+ESS
system generates sufficient PV power for loads
and uses the surplus PV power to charge the
ESS (if the PV power is insufficient for loads,
the TOU mode is recommended).
● PV power is preferentially supplied to loads,
and the surplus power is used to charge the
ESS. If the ESS is fully charged or is being
charged at full power, the surplus power is fed
to the grid. When PV power is insufficient or
no PV power can be generated at night, the
ESS discharges power to loads. This improves
the self-consumption rate and energy self-
sufficiency rate, and reduces electricity costs.
The grid cannot charge the ESS but can supply
power to loads.
● The SmartLogger performs ESS scheduling
based on the external scheduling power limit
and the preceding policies.

Fully fed to grid ● This parameter applies only to distributed

scenarios.
● This mode maximizes the PV energy fed to the
grid. When the PV output power in the
daytime is greater than the maximum output
capacity of the inverter, the surplus PV power
is used to charge the ESS. When the PV output
power is less than the maximum output
capacity of the inverter, the ESS discharges
energy to the inverter to maximize the energy
fed from the inverter to the grid. The grid
cannot charge the ESS.
● The SmartLogger directly delivers the external
scheduling power limit.
NOTE
Fully fed to grid is displayed only in distributed energy
storage scenarios.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 297

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

TOU ● It is applicable to the PV+ESS system and ESS-

only system where peak to valley electricity
prices are different and power meters are
available.
● You can manually set the charge and discharge
time segments. For example, if you set the low
electricity price period at night as the charge
time, the system charges the batteries at the
maximum power during the charge time. If
you set the high electricity price period as the
discharge time, batteries can discharge only
during the discharge time based on the actual
load power, reducing electricity costs.
● Click Add to set the charge and discharge time
segments. A maximum of 14 time segments
can be set. During the charge time, the grid
can charge the batteries. During the discharge
time, the batteries can supply power to the
loads. In other time segments, the batteries do
not discharge. The PV system and grid supply
power to loads, and the PV system can charge
the batteries.
● In some countries, the grid is not allowed to
charge batteries. In such case, this mode
cannot be used.
● The SmartLogger performs ESS scheduling
based on the external scheduling power limit
and the preceding policies.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 298

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

TOU (fixed power)[1] ● It is applicable to the PV+ESS system and ESS-

only system where peak to valley electricity
prices are different and power meters are
unavailable.
● You can manually set the charge and discharge
time segments. For example, if you set the low
electricity price period at night as the charge
time, the system charges the batteries at the
fixed power during the charge time. If you set
the high electricity price period as the
discharge time, batteries can discharge only
during the discharge time at the fixed power,
reducing electricity costs.
● Click Add to set the charge and discharge time
segments. A maximum of 14 time segments
can be set. During the charge time, the grid
can charge the batteries. During the discharge
time, the batteries can supply power to the
loads. In other time segments, the batteries do
not discharge and are not charged.
● In some countries, the grid is not allowed to
charge batteries. In such case, this mode
cannot be used.
● The SmartLogger performs ESS scheduling
based on the external scheduling power limit
and the preceding policies.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

Charge/Discharge ● This mode applies to utility-scale plant

based on grid scheduling scenarios where the northbound
dispatch controller delivers active power scheduling
commands.
● The purpose of scheduled discharge is to meet
the active power scheduling target value at the
grid access point. PV energy is preferred. If the
generated PV energy is insufficient, the
batteries discharge and the energy is fed to the
grid based on the active power scheduling
target value. If the generated PV energy is
sufficient, the energy is fed to the grid based
on the active power scheduling target value,
and the surplus PV energy is used to charge
the batteries.
● The purpose of scheduled charge is to meet
the active power scheduling target value at the
grid access point. If the battery charge power
is insufficient or the Smart PCS limits the
power, the grid charges the batteries with the
maximum capability. If the batteries are not
fully charged when the scheduling target value
is met, the PV power is used to charge the
batteries.

Custom[2] ● This mode applies to utility-scale plant (with

ESSs) scheduling scenarios. Customers can
control the battery discharge power.
● Non-discharge period: The batteries cannot
discharge and can be charged based on the
scheduling command.
● Discharge period: If Adaptive discharge
power is enabled, the control logic is the same
as that for scheduled charge and discharge.
The battery charge and discharge power is
determined by the upper-layer scheduling
command. If Adaptive discharge power is
disabled, the battery discharge power is fixed
to the reference value set by the customer. In
this case, the upper-layer scheduling command
controls only the PV inverters but not the
batteries.

Note [1]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC150

and later versions.
Note [2]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC120
and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 300

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-19 Running parameters in each battery control working mode

Working Mode Parameter Description

Maximum self- Active power Set the grid power

consumption threshold of grid threshold at the grid
during battery connection point for loads
discharge when the load power is
greater than the PV power.

Adjustment deadband Set the precision of the

grid power at the grid
connection point. This
parameter affects the
power value range at the
grid connection point. If
the actual grid power
threshold at the grid
connection point is within
this range, i.e. [Active
power threshold of grid
during battery discharge –
Adjustment deadband,
Maximum grid power
during battery discharge +
Adjustment deadband],
the grid power
requirement at the grid
connection point is met.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

TOU Preferred use of ● Charge: When the PV

surplus PV power power is greater than
the load power, the
surplus PV energy is
used to charge the
batteries. After the
maximum charge
power is reached or the
batteries are fully
charged, the surplus PV
energy is fed to the
grid.
● Fed to grid: When the
PV power is greater
than the load power,
the surplus PV energy is
preferentially fed to the
grid. When the
maximum output
power of the device is
reached, the surplus
energy is used to
charge the batteries.
This setting is
applicable to the
scenario where the FIT
is higher than the
electricity price. The
grid cannot charge the
batteries.

Maximum power for Set the maximum power

charging batteries at which the grid charges
from grid the batteries.

Active power Set the grid power

threshold of grid threshold at the grid
during battery connection point for loads
discharge when the load power is
greater than the PV power.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 302

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

Adjustment deadband Set the precision of the

grid power at the grid
connection point. This
parameter affects the
power value range at the
grid connection point. If
the actual grid power
threshold at the grid
connection point is within
this range, i.e. [Active
power threshold of grid
during battery discharge –
Adjustment deadband,
Maximum grid power
during battery discharge +
Adjustment deadband],
the grid power
requirement at the grid
connection point is met.

Start time Set the start time and end

time of charge and
End time discharge. A maximum of
Charge/Discharge 14 time segments can be
set. You can set a cycle by
Repeat week by clicking the
buttons corresponding to
Mon. through Sun. in the
Repeat box. The buttons
are blue by default,
indicating being selected.
After you click it, the
button turns gray.

TOU (fixed power) Start time Set the start time, end
time, and power of charge
End time and discharge. A
Charge/Discharge maximum of 14 time
segments can be set. You
Charge/Discharge can set a cycle by week by
power (kW) clicking the buttons
corresponding to Mon.
Repeat through Sun. in the
Repeat box. The buttons
are blue by default,
indicating being selected.
After you click it, the
button turns gray.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

Charge/Discharge Array end-of-charge/ The default value is

based on grid discharge SOC Disable. The default value
dispatch derating is recommended. Set this
parameter as required.
After this parameter is
enabled, the SmartLogger
will be derated according
to a certain slope to
prevent sudden power
changes of arrays at the
cut-off SOC point.

Control charge/ The default value is

discharge time Disable. The default value
window is recommended. Set this
parameter as required. You
can set the time segment
for charge forbidden,
discharge forbidden,
charge, and discharge only
after the control charge/
discharge time window is
enabled.

Start time Set the start time, end

time, and power of charge
End time forbidden, discharge
Charge/Discharge forbidden, charge, and
discharge. A maximum of
Charge/Discharge 14 time segments can be
power (kW) set. You can set a cycle by
week by clicking the
Repeat buttons corresponding to
Mon. through Sun. in the
Repeat box. The buttons
are blue by default,
indicating being selected.
After you click it, the
button turns gray.

Protection against The default value is

communication Disable. The default value
disconnection is recommended. Set this
parameter as required.
NOTE
In the utility-scale ESS low-
voltage coupling scenario,
the PV+ESS capacity exceeds
the transformer station
capacity. You are advised to
set this parameter to Enable.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Parameter Description

Custom ESS discharge start Set the start time of

time battery discharge. During
the period from the start
time to the end time, the
batteries can be charged
and can discharge. Beyond
the period, the batteries
cannot discharge and can
only be charged.

ESS discharge end Set the end time of

time battery discharge. During
the period from the start
time to the end time, the
batteries can be charged
and can discharge. Beyond
the period, the batteries
cannot discharge and can
only be charged.

Adaptive discharge ● Enable: PV power

power supply is preferred. If
the PV power is
insufficient, the
batteries supply power
to loads; if the PV
power is sufficient, the
system outputs at the
target value and the
surplus PV power is
used to charge the
batteries.
● Disable: Batteries
discharge based on the
discharge power set on
the GUI.

Reference discharge Set the battery discharge

power power during the
discharge period.

Note [1]: This parameter is added in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC120

and later versions. This parameter is displayed and needs to be set only
when the Smart PCS is connected.

● Choose Settings > Battery Settings to set power allocation. You can set this
parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC550 and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 305

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Difference The default value is 5%. The default value is

threshold for recommended. Set this parameter as required. When
starting array SOC the SOC difference between racks in the array is
rapid equilibrium greater than the value of Difference threshold for
starting array SOC rapid equilibrium, the rapid
equilibrium algorithm is enabled.

● Choose Settings > Battery Settings to set dispatch control. The scheduling
mode applies only to the C&I scenario and is displayed when the C&I ESS is
connected. You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC550
and later versions.
Parameter Description

Scheduling Mode The default value is Maximize energy.

● Maximize energy. If ESSs with different rates are
used together in C&I scenarios, the power is
allocated based on the minimum rate.
● Maximize power. If ESSs with different rates are
used together in C&I scenarios, the power is
allocated based on the maximum power.

● Choose Settings > Battery Settings to set automatic calibration for battery
control.
Parameter Description

Automatic SOC calibration ● If this parameter is set to Enable,

automatic charge and discharge
calibration is allowed for battery
racks. The ESS periodically
calibrates the SOC rack by rack.
During the calibration, the end-
of-charge SOC and end-of-
discharge SOC settings will be
overridden so that the ESS can be
fully charged or discharged.
● If this parameter is set to
Disable, automatic charge and
discharge calibration is not
allowed for battery racks.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Automatic SOC calibration Set the automatic SOC calibration

interval[1] interval. This parameter is displayed
when Automatic SOC calibration is
set to Enable.
If the battery SOC stays in the range
of 10% to 99% most of the time, for
example, in the microgrid scenario,
the recommended online calibration
interval is less than or equal to 7
days.
If the battery SOC stays in the range
of 40% to 60% most of the time, for
example, in the frequency regulation
scenario, the recommended online
calibration interval is less than or
equal to 30 days.
If the battery SOC stays below 10%
or at 100% most of the time, for
example, in the peak shaving
scenario, the recommended online
calibration interval is less than or
equal to 180 days.

Automatic SOH calibration ● If this parameter is set to Enable,

the ESS periodically calibrates the
SOH rack by rack. During the
calibration, the end-of-charge
SOC and end-of-discharge SOC
settings will be overridden so that
the ESS can be fully charged and
discharged. Then, the battery
capacity will be calculated. The
charge and discharge response
will be affected during the
calibration. Suggestion: During
SOH calibration, after the system
is fully charged, maintain the
charge command for 30 to 60
minutes. After the discharge is
complete, maintain the discharge
command for 30 to 60 minutes.
● If this parameter is set to
Disable, automatic SOH
calibration is not allowed for
battery racks.

Note [1]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC172

and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 307

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

● Choose Settings > Battery Settings to set the array end-of-charge SOC and
array end-of-discharge SOC. You can set these parameters in SmartLogger
V300R023C10SPC500 and later versions.

Parameter Description

Array end-of- The default value is 100%. The default value is

charge SOC recommended. Set this parameter as required.

Array end-of- The default value is 5%. The default value is

discharge SOC recommended. Set this parameter as required.

Capacity Control
● In SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC550 and later versions, Capacity Control is
displayed and can be set only in energy storage scenarios. Choose Settings >
Battery Settings > Capacity Control and set related parameters.
● Peak shaving limits the maximum peak power at the grid connection point.
In some areas, electricity fees depend on both volumetric charge and demand
charge. The Peak shaving function allows you to lower the peak demand
purchased from the grid during peak hours, reducing electricity fees. Peak
shaving applies to areas where demand charges are collected. The peak
shaving function allows you to lower the peak power purchased from the grid
in Maximum self-consumption or TOU mode during peak hours, reducing
electricity fees.
● Power boost limit is designed to limit the maximum peak current at the grid
connection point. By doing so, it ensures that the electric current purchased
from or sold to the grid does not exceed the maximum peak current at the
grid connection point. This control is essential because if the electric current
exceeds the maximum peak current, it may trigger the system's overcurrent
protection mechanism, potentially causing the transformer to trip.

NOTICE

The Power boost limit function is ineffective during the update of the
SmartLogger and ESS.

Table 6-20 Capacity control parameters

Parameter Description

Peak shaving ● No control: The peak shaving function is disabled.

● Active power limit: The active power purchased
from the grid cannot exceed the preset capacity
limit.
● Apparent power limit: The apparent power
purchased from the grid cannot exceed the preset
capacity limit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 308

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Power boost limit ● No control: The power boost limit function is

disabled.
● Current Limit: The current of electricity purchased
from or sold to the grid cannot exceed the preset
current limit.

Maximum Peak This parameter is displayed when Power boost limit is

Current set to Current Limit. Specifies the maximum peak
current at the grid connection point. The default value
is 30000 A. Set this parameter based on the maximum
peak current for power purchase or sales at the grid
connection point.

Backup power SOC Specifies the backup power SOC for capacity control.
for capacity control The value of this parameter affects the peak shaving
capability. A larger value indicates stronger peak
shaving capability.

PV power limit when Specifies the active power limit of the inverter when
power meter fails the export+import meter communication is abnormal.
You can manually change the active power percentage
of the inverter as required.

PCS power limit when Specifies the active power limit of the PCS when the
power meter fails export+import meter communication is abnormal. You
can manually change the active power percentage of
the PCS as required.

Start time ● Set the peak power range based on the start time
and end time. The peak power is configured based
End time on electricity prices in different time segments. You
Maximum peak are advised to set the peak power to a low value
power when the electricity price is high.
● A maximum of 14 time segments can be set.

Peak Shaving
Peak Shaving is displayed and can be set only when the feed-in meter is
connected in energy storage scenarios and the version is between SmartLogger
V300R023C00SPC160 and SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC550.
In some areas, electricity fees depend on both volumetric charge and demand
charge. The Peak shaving function allows you to lower the peak demand
purchased from the grid during peak hours, reducing electricity fees. In distributed
scenarios, the Peak Shaving must be used in maximum self-consumption or TOU
mode.
Choose Settings > Battery Settings and set Peak Shaving.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-67 Setting peak shaving

Parameter Description Remarks

Peak ● No control: The peak shaving function is disabled. If Peak

Shaving ● Active power limit: The active power purchased from the grid Shaving is set
cannot exceed the preset capacity limit. to No control,
other
● Apparent power limit: The apparent power purchased from parameters are
the grid cannot exceed the preset capacity limit. not displayed.
Backup ESS backup power SOC for peak shaving. The value of this
power SOC parameter affects the peak shaving capability. A larger value
for peak indicates stronger peak shaving capability.
shaving

PV power Set the active power limit of the inverter when the feed-in
limit when meter communication is abnormal. You can manually change
power meter the active power percentage of the inverter as required.
fails

PCS power Specifies the active power limit of the PCS when the export
limit when +import meter communication is abnormal. You can manually
power meter change the active power percentage of the PCS as required.
fails

Start time ● Set the peak power range based on the start time and end
time. The peak power is configured based on electricity prices
End time in different time segments. You are advised to set the peak
Maximum power to a low value when the electricity price is high.
Power ● A maximum of 14 time segments can be set.

Capacity Limit
In versions earlier than SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC160, Capacity Limit is
displayed in the energy storage scenario. Choose Settings > Battery Settings and
set the capacity limit.

Figure 6-68 Setting the capacity limit

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 310

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Paramete Description Remarks

r

Capacity ● No control: The capacity of the grid- If Capacity Limit is set

Limit connection point is not limited. The to No control, other
inverter and Smart PCS run parameters are not
according to the preset control policy. displayed.
● Active capacity limit: The active
power of the grid-connection point
for purchasing or feeding power
cannot exceed the preset capacity
limit.
● Apparent capacity limit: The
apparent power of the grid-
connection point for purchasing or
feeding power cannot exceed the
preset capacity limit.

Maximum Set this parameter according to the This parameter is

active charging capacity in the demand displayed only when
capacity contract of the grid company. Once set, Capacity Limit is set to
the active power of the grid-connection Active capacity limit.
point for purchasing or feeding power
cannot exceed the preset value.

Maximum Set this parameter according to the This parameter is

apparent charging capacity in the demand displayed only when
capacity contract of the grid company. Once set, Capacity Limit is set to
the apparent power of the grid- Apparent capacity limit.
connection point for purchasing or
feeding power cannot exceed the preset
value.

PV power Set the active power limit of the -

limit inverter when the feed-in meter
when communication is abnormal. You can
power manually change the active power
meter percentage of the inverter as required.
fails

PCS Specifies the active power limit of the -

power PCS when the export+import meter
limit communication is abnormal. You can
when manually change the active power
power percentage of the PCS as required.
meter
fails

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

● If the capacity limit is met 24 hours a day, the ratio of the ESS and Smart PCS power to
the load power must be properly set to ensure that the ESS and Smart PCS have
sufficient capacity to meet the capacity limit.
● When the ESS is used only for capacity limit, you can set the charge window to 24 hours
by setting TOU without setting the discharge window or non-charge/discharge window.
● When the capacity limit is enabled in TOU mode, the charge/discharge time set in the
TOU window must cover 24 hours a day. Capacity limit is not supported in non-charge/
discharge time.
● The overload capability of transformers, power distribution switches, and cables must be
greater than the sum of the maximum charge current and maximum load current of the
ESS.

Battery Parameters
If the PCS is powered off, you are advised to preset PCS running parameters on
this tab page.
Choose Settings > Battery Settings > Battery parameters to set PCS parameters
in batches. This tab page is displayed only in SmartLogger V300R023C10SPC200
and later versions.
After Array parameter synchronization is set to Enable, if Auto switching
between working modes, Working mode switching delay, Working mode, and
VSG parameters are set and submitted, the corresponding parameters under
Monitoring > PCS > Running Param. are read-only.
Parameter Description Remarks

Array parameter The default value is Disable. Other battery

synchronization Disable: The function of array parameter parameters are
synchronization is disabled. Parameters displayed only
related to the array are not displayed. when Array
parameter
Enable: The function of array parameter synchronizatio
synchronization is enabled. If the n is set to
parameter values of the PCS are different Enable.
from those configured on this page, the
parameter values configured on this page
will be synchronized for the PCS.

Auto switching The default value is Disable. When the Auto

between Disable: The function of auto switching switching
working modes between working modes is disabled. between
working modes
Enable: The PCS working mode is is set to Enable,
automatically switched between PQ and the Working
VSG. mode and VSG-
related
parameters are
not displayed.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 312

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Working mode The default value is 60. Time for other -

switching delay instructions to take effect during PCS
working mode switching The value range
is [10, 300] (unit: s).

Working mode The default value is PQ. -

PQ: In the on-grid scenario, set this
parameter to PQ.
VSG: In the off-grid scenario, set this
parameter to VSG.

Per unit The default value is 2. Specifies the ● This

armature resistance per unit value for armature parameter is
resistance windings of the virtual synchronous displayed
generator. The value of this parameter when
ranges from 0.0% to 5.0%. Working
mode is set
Per unit The default value is 1. Specifies the to VSG.
armature inductive reactance per unit value for
inductive armature windings of the virtual ● This
reactance synchronous generator. The value of this parameter
parameter ranges from 0.0% to 5.0%. must be set
by
VSG inertia time The default value is 1. Specifies the time professional
constant required for the virtual rotor of the virtual personnel.
synchronous generator to reach the rated Improper
speed from the static state under the settings may
rated torque. The value of this parameter cause device
ranges from 0.0s to 20.0s. exceptions.

P-F adjustment The default value is 1. Specifies the

coefficient frequency deviation corresponding to the
rated active power of the virtual
synchronous generator. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0.5% to 5.0%.

Q-V adjustment The default value is 3. Specifies the

coefficient voltage deviation corresponding to the
rated reactive power of the virtual
synchronous generator. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0.3% to 10.0%.

P-V adjustment The default value is 0. Specifies the

coefficient voltage deviation corresponding to the
rated active power of the virtual
synchronous generator. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0% to 10.0%.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Q-F adjustment The default value is 0. Specifies the

coefficient frequency deviation corresponding to the
rated reactive power of the virtual
synchronous generator. The value of this
parameter ranges from 0.5% to 5.0%.

VSG output The default value is 100. Corrects the

voltage deviation caused by the transformer ratio
correction error. The value of this parameter ranges
coefficient from 90.0% to 110.0%.

VSG output The default value is 100. Corrects the PCS

frequency output frequency deviation. The value of
correction this parameter ranges from 90.0% to
coefficient 110.0%.

VSG frequency The default value is 7.2. Specifies the

damping power factor that prevents the frequency
coefficient change of the virtual synchronous
generator. The value of this parameter
ranges from 1.0% to 10.0%.

VSG excitation The default value is 0. Specifies the time

time constant required for the excitation of the virtual
synchronous generator to reach the rated
voltage. The value of this parameter
ranges from 0s to 100s.

VSG excitation The default value is 0. Specifies the power

damping factor that prevents the voltage change of
coefficient the virtual synchronous generator. The
value of this parameter ranges from 0% to
20000%.

Active power The default value is 100. Adjusts the This parameter
(%) active output power of the device by is delivered
percentage. The value of this parameter once before the
ranges from –100.0% to 100.0%. PCS is started.
The
Reactive power The default value is 0. Specifies the configuration
compensation reactive power of the device. The value of can be modified
(Q/S) this parameter ranges from –100.0% to by choosing
100.0%. Monitoring >
PCS > Running
Param.

6.5 Setting EMS Control Parameters

This section does not apply to V300R001C00SPC603 and later versions.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 314

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Procedure
To set the battery working mode, choose Settings > EMS Control.

Figure 6-69 Working mode

Table 6-21 Battery control working modes

Working Mode Mode Description

No control The SmartLogger directly delivers the

external scheduling power limit. No
other power scheduling control is
performed. The power is automatically
controlled by the device.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

Maximum self-consumption ● This mode applies to areas where

the electricity price is high, or areas
where the FIT subsidy is low or
unavailable. The PV+ESS system
generates sufficient PV power for
loads and uses the surplus PV
power to charge the ESS (if the PV
power is insufficient for loads, the
TOU mode is recommended).
● PV power is preferentially supplied
to loads, and the surplus power is
used to charge the ESS. If the ESS is
fully charged or is being charged at
full power, the surplus power is fed
to the grid. When PV power is
insufficient or no PV power can be
generated at night, the ESS
discharges power to loads. This
improves the self-consumption rate
and energy self-sufficiency rate, and
reduces electricity costs. The grid
cannot charge the ESS but can
supply power to loads.
● The SmartLogger performs ESS
scheduling based on the external
scheduling power limit and the
preceding policies.

Fully fed to grid ● This parameter applies only to

distributed scenarios.
● This mode maximizes the PV energy
fed to the grid. When the PV output
power in the daytime is greater
than the maximum output capacity
of the inverter, the surplus PV
power is used to charge the ESS.
When the PV output power is less
than the maximum output capacity
of the inverter, the ESS discharges
energy to the inverter to maximize
the energy fed from the inverter to
the grid. The grid cannot charge the
ESS.
● The SmartLogger directly delivers
the external scheduling power limit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 316

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Mode Mode Description

TOU ● It is applicable to the PV+ESS

system and ESS-only system where
peak to valley electricity prices are
different and power meters are
available.
● You can manually set the charge
and discharge time segments. For
example, if you set the low
electricity price period at night as
the charge time, the system charges
the batteries at the maximum
power during the charge time. If
you set the high electricity price
period as the discharge time,
batteries can discharge only during
the discharge time based on the
actual load power, reducing
electricity costs.
● Click Add to set the charge and
discharge time segments. A
maximum of 14 time segments can
be set. During the charge time, the
grid can charge the batteries.
During the discharge time, the
batteries can supply power to the
loads. In other time segments, the
batteries do not discharge. The PV
system and grid supply power to
loads, and the PV system can
charge the batteries.
● In some countries, the grid is not
allowed to charge batteries. In such
case, this mode cannot be used.
● The SmartLogger performs ESS
scheduling based on the external
scheduling power limit and the
preceding policies.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-22 Running parameters in each battery control working mode

Working Parameter Description
Mode

Maximum Tracking load ● Enable: The device output changes

self- with the load so that the output is
consumption approximately equal to the load.
● Disable: The device outputs power as
much as possible. However, the output
power is still affected by parameters
such as external scheduling.

Battery reverse ● Enable: If the battery feeds power to

current the grid while discharging, the system
protection sends a standby command to the
battery to eliminate the reverse power.
When the battery needs to discharge
power, the system sends a running
command to the battery.
● Disable: If reverse battery power is
detected at the grid-connection point,
the reverse power is eliminated by
reducing the battery output power.
The battery standby command is not
delivered.

Active power Set the grid power threshold at the grid

threshold of grid connection point for loads when the load
during battery power is greater than the PV power.
discharge

Adjustment Set the precision of the grid power at the

deadband grid connection point. This parameter
affects the power value range at the grid
connection point. If the actual grid power
threshold at the grid connection point is
within this range, i.e. [Active power
threshold of grid during battery
discharge – Adjustment deadband,
Maximum grid power during battery
discharge + Adjustment deadband], the
grid power requirement at the grid
connection point is met.

TOU Tracking load ● Enable: The device output changes

with the load so that the output is
approximately equal to the load.
● Disable: The device outputs power as
much as possible. However, the output
power is still affected by parameters
such as external scheduling.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 318

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Parameter Description

Mode

Battery reverse ● Enable: If the battery feeds power to

current the grid while discharging, the system
protection sends a standby command to the
battery to eliminate the reverse power.
When the battery needs to discharge
power, the system sends a running
command to the battery.
● Disable: If reverse battery power is
detected at the grid-connection point,
the reverse power is eliminated by
reducing the battery output power.
The battery standby command is not
delivered.

Preferred use of ● Charge: When the PV power is greater

surplus PV power than the load power, the surplus PV
energy is used to charge the batteries.
After the maximum charge power is
reached or the batteries are fully
charged, the surplus PV energy is fed
to the grid.
● Fed to grid: When the PV power is
greater than the load power, the
surplus PV energy is preferentially fed
to the grid. When the maximum
output power of the device is reached,
the surplus energy is used to charge
the batteries. This setting is applicable
to the scenario where the FIT is higher
than the electricity price. The grid
cannot charge the batteries.

Maximum power Set the maximum power at which the

for charging grid charges the batteries.
batteries from
grid

Active power Set the grid power threshold at the grid

threshold of grid connection point for loads when the load
during battery power is greater than the PV power.
discharge

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 319

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Working Parameter Description

Mode

Adjustment Set the precision of the grid power at the

deadband grid connection point. This parameter
affects the power value range at the grid
connection point. If the actual grid power
threshold at the grid connection point is
within this range, i.e. [Active power
threshold of grid during battery
discharge – Adjustment deadband,
Maximum grid power during battery
discharge + Adjustment deadband], the
grid power requirement at the grid
connection point is met.

Start time Set the start time and end time of charge
and discharge. A maximum of 14 time
End time segments can be set. You can set a cycle
Charge/Discharge by week by clicking the buttons
corresponding to Mon. through Sun. in
Repeat the Repeat box. The buttons are blue by
default, indicating being selected. After
you click it, the button turns gray.

6.6 Setting Microgrid Control Parameters

● Microgrid Control is displayed only when the SmartLogger model is
SmartLogger3000.
● To modify microgrid control parameters, contact professional plant operation
and management personnel or the Company's engineers.

6.6.1 On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/VSG)

Step 1 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > General Configuration and set general
configuration parameters.
Parameter Description

MGCC Mode under This parameter is displayed as Enable. You can change
Microgrid the setting only through the deployment wizard.

Microgrid scenario This parameter is displayed as On-grid/Off-grid (PQ/

under Microgrid VSG). You can change the setting only through the
deployment wizard.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 320

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Switch status port Set these parameters based on the actual cable
under On/Off-grid connections.
switch DI port status can be set to Open or Close. If the
DI port status under actual status of the on/off-grid switch is inconsistent
On/Off-grid switch with the displayed status, change the setting of DI
port status.

Switch-off control Set the DO port for turning off the on/off-grid switch.
port under On/Off-
grid switch

Switch-on control Set the DO port for turning on the on/off-grid switch.
port under On/Off-
grid switch

DI port under Grid Set the DI port to which the the grid failure detection
Failure Detection device is connected and the DI port status.

DI port status under

Grid Failure
Detection

Step 2 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > Dispatch Control to set dispatch control
parameters.

Table 6-23 Dispatch control parameters

Tab Parameter Description

Control End-of-charge Set the maximum SOC for charge in off-grid

Policy SOC (off-grid) mode. The default value 90% is recommended.
The value range is [85, 98]%.

End-of-discharge Set the minimum SOC for discharge in off-grid

SOC (off-grid) mode. The default value 10% is recommended.
The value range is [10, 20]%.

Chargin Real-time SOC The output power of the inverter is controlled

g (%) based on the current battery SOC to meet the
battery charge power adjustment target.
Allowed Charge
Power (%) The value of Real-time SOC (%) ranges from
End-of-discharge SOC (off-grid) to End-of-
charge SOC (off-grid).
The value range of Allowed Charge Power (%)
is [0, 70]%.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 321

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Power Off-grid power ● Enable: The off-grid power backup function

Backup backup is enabled. When the SOC is less than or
equal to Min. SOC for off-grid power
backup, the ESS stops discharging to
maintain sufficient power for off-grid
operation.
● Disable: The off-grid power backup function
is disabled.

Min. SOC for off- This parameter is displayed when Power Backup
grid power is set to Enable.
backup (%) In on-grid mode, set Min. SOC for off-grid
power backup (%). The default value 40% is
recommended. The value range is [20, 90]%.
The precision is 1%.

Prioritize off-grid This parameter is displayed when Power Backup

power backup is set to Enable.
● Enable: When this function is enabled, if the
current SOC is less than or equal to Min. SOC
for off-grid power backup, the ESS stops
discharging and is charged by PV power
preferentially. In this case, the current on-grid
ESS scheduling policy becomes invalid.
● Disable: This function is disabled.

Draw power from This parameter is displayed when Prioritize off-

grid for off-grid grid power backup is set to Enable.
power backup ● Disable: The ESS is not allowed to obtain
power from the grid for off-grid power
backup.
● Allow: The ESS is allowed to obtain power
from the grid for off-grid power backup.

Charge power for This parameter is displayed when Draw power

off-grid power from grid for off-grid power backup is set to
backup (kW) Allow.
Set the power for charging from the grid during
off-grid power backup. The default value is 100
kW, and the value range is [0.000, 50000.000]
kW.

Step 3 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > On/Off-grid switching, and set on/off-
grid switching parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 322

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-24 On/Off-grid switching parameters

Tab Parameter Description

General Automatic ● Enable: When the system switches from on-

Configuratio microgrid grid to off-grid mode, the microgrid
n adaptability adaptability of the inverter is automatically
control enabled. When the system switches from off-
grid to on-grid mode, the microgrid
adaptability of the inverter is automatically
disabled.
● Disable: The automatic microgrid
adaptability control function is disabled. The
microgrid adaptability of the inverter is not
automatically set during on/off-grid
switching.

On/Off-grid ● No control: All the operations involved in the

switching on/off-grid switching are manually
mode performed. If the customer needs to repair
the equipment, you are advised to set this
parameter to No control.
● Auto: The on/off-grid switching will be
performed automatically based on the status
of the mains power. When you set On/Off-
grid switching mode to this mode, an
immediate on/off-grid switching may be
triggered, depending on the status of the
mains power.
● Manual: You need to manually turn on or off
the on/off-grid switch at the grid connection
point.

Off-grid to Off-grid to If On/Off-grid switching mode is set to

On-grid on-grid under Manual, click Off-grid to on-grid before
Manual On- switching from off-grid to on-grid mode. After
grid/Off-grid the PV+ESS system shuts down, turn on the on/
Switching off-grid switch locally. After the switch is turned
on, the PV+ESS system automatically restarts.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 323

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

On/Off-grid On/Off-grid ● Close: The on/off-grid switch is turned on,

switch switch control switching the system from off-grid to on-grid
control state. Click Off-grid to on-grid before switch-
on.
● Open: The on/off-grid switch is turned off,
switching the system from on-grid to off-grid
state.
NOTE
● In the on/off-grid (PQ/VSG) scenario, the on/off-
grid switching will be performed according to the
status of the on/off-grid switch only when On/Off-
grid switching mode is set to Auto or Manual.
● In the on/off-grid (PQ/VSG) scenario, the Close
and Open buttons are available only when the DO
ports of Switch-off control port and Switch-on
control port under On/Off-grid switch are
configured.
● When the on/off-grid switch is on, the Close
button is grayed out, and the Open button is
available.
● When the on/off-grid switch is in invalid state, the
Close and Open buttons are grayed out.

----End

6.6.2 On-grid/Off-grid (VSG)

Step 1 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > General Configuration and set general
configuration parameters.

Table 6-25 General configuration parameters

Parameter Description

MGCC Mode under This parameter is displayed as Enable. You can change
Microgrid the setting only through the deployment wizard.

Microgrid scenario If this parameter is set to On-grid/Off-grid (VSG), you

under Microgrid can change the setting only through the deployment
wizard.

Genset start/stop ● If the genset is controlled by the SmartLogger, set the

control port under DO port that controls genset startup and shutdown
Genset based on the actual cable connections.
● If the genset is controlled by the ATS, set this
parameter to No.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > Dispatch Control to set dispatch control
parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 324

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-26 Dispatch control parameters

Tab Parameter Description

Control End-of-charge Set the maximum SOC for charge in on-grid

Policy SOC (on-grid) mode. The default value 90% is recommended.
The value range is [85, 98]%.

End-of-charge Set the maximum SOC for charge in off-grid

SOC (off-grid) mode. The default value 90% is recommended.
The value range is [85, 98]%.

End-of-discharge Set the minimum SOC for discharge in off-grid

SOC (off-grid) mode. The default value 10% is recommended.
The value range is [10, 20]%.

Chargin Real-time SOC The output power of the inverter is controlled

g (%) based on the current battery SOC to meet the
battery charge power adjustment target.
Allowed Charge
Power (%) The value of Real-time SOC (%) ranges from
End-of-discharge SOC (off-grid) to End-of-
charge SOC (off-grid).
The value range of Allowed Charge Power (%)
is [0, 70]%.

Genset Genset Auto ● Enable: Enable the automatic control of

Control Control genset startup and shutdown. If the ESS is
shut down, the genset automatically starts to
supply power to loads.
● Disable: Disable the automatic control of
genset startup and shutdown.

Genset Manual ● Power-On: Manually start the genset.

Control ● Power-Off: Manually shut down the genset.

Power Off-grid power ● Enable: The off-grid power backup function

Backup backup is enabled. When the SOC is less than or
equal to Min. SOC for off-grid power
backup, the ESS stops discharging to
maintain sufficient power for off-grid
operation.
● Disable: The off-grid power backup function
is disabled.

Min. SOC for off- This parameter is displayed when Power Backup
grid power is set to Enable.
backup (%) In on-grid mode, set Min. SOC for off-grid
power backup (%). The default value 40% is
recommended. The value range is [20, 90]%.
The precision is 1%.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Prioritize off-grid This parameter is displayed when Power Backup

power backup is set to Enable.
● Enable: When this function is enabled, if the
current SOC is less than or equal to Min. SOC
for off-grid power backup, the ESS stops
discharging and is charged by PV power
preferentially. In this case, the current on-grid
ESS scheduling policy becomes invalid.
● Disable: This function is disabled.

Draw power from This parameter is displayed when Prioritize off-

grid for off-grid grid power backup is set to Enable.
power backup ● Disable: The ESS is not allowed to obtain
power from the grid for off-grid power
backup.
● Allow: The ESS is allowed to obtain power
from the grid for off-grid power backup.

Charge power for This parameter is displayed when Draw power

off-grid power from grid for off-grid power backup is set to
backup (kW) Allow.
Set the power for charging from the grid during
off-grid power backup. The default value is 100
kW, and the value range is [0.000, 50000.000]
kW.

NOTE

Array end-of-charge SOC > End-of-charge SOC (on-grid) or End-of-charge SOC (off-
grid) ≥ Backup power SOC for peak shaving ≥ Min. SOC for off-grid power backup >
End-of-discharge SOC (off-grid) > Array end-of-discharge SOC

Step 3 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > On/Off-grid switching, and set on/off-
grid switching parameters.

Table 6-27 On/Off-grid switching parameters

Tab Parameter Description

On-grid to Switch to Off-grid under After the planned switching

Off-grid Planned switching control control is started, the on/off-
grid switch is turned off and the
system enters off-grid state.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

Off-grid to Auto switching to on-grid ● Enable: If the mains voltage

On-grid under Automatic Off-grid to is stable, the system
On-grid Switching automatically switches from
off-grid to on-grid state after
the synchronization of the
relay protection device is
successful.
● Disable: Disable the function
of automatic switching from
off-grid to on-grid.

Setting value of high Set the allowed error range of

voltage under Criteria of the mains voltage. If the
Stable Grid voltage is within [Setting value
of high voltage, 110]% of the
rated voltage, the voltage is
considered stable.

Continuous power available Set the minimum time for

for under Criteria of Stable which the mains voltage
Grid remains stable.

Max switching time under Set the maximum time for

Conditions for Off-grid to switching from off-grid to on-
On-grid Switching grid. Max switching time must
be greater than the maximum
duration for the synchronization
check of the relay protection
device.

Off-grid to on-grid under Set Auto switching to on-grid

Manual On-grid/Off-grid to Disable. To switch from off-
Switching grid to on-grid, click Off-grid to
on-grid first. When the mains
voltage is stable,
synchronization will be
performed. After the
synchronization is successful,
the on/off-grid switch is turned
on and the system enters on-
grid state.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 327

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

On/Off-grid On/Off-grid switch control This function is used only to

switch control check the status of the on/off-
grid switch. Before the check,
the array shall be shut down.
● Close: The on/off-grid switch
is turned on and the system
checks whether the relay
protection device has
correctly controlled the
switch-on.
● Open: The on/off-grid switch
is turned off and the system
checks whether the relay
protection device has
correctly controlled the
switch-off.
NOTE
● In the on/off grid (VSG)
scenario, if the relay protection
device is offline, the Close and
Open buttons are grayed out.
● When the on/off-grid switch is
off, the Close button is
available, and the Open button
is grayed out.
● When the on/off-grid switch is
on, the Close button is grayed
out, and the Open button is
available.
● When the on/off-grid switch is
in invalid state, the Close and
Open buttons are grayed out.

----End

6.6.3 Off-Grid
Step 1 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > General Configuration and set general
configuration parameters.

Table 6-28 General configuration parameters

Parameter Description

MGCC Mode under This parameter is displayed as Enable. You can change
Microgrid the setting only through the deployment wizard.

Microgrid scenario This parameter is displayed as Off-grid. You can

under Microgrid change the setting only through the deployment
wizard.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 328

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Switch status port Set these parameters based on the actual cable
under Load Switch connections. If you need to modify the parameters
after the settings are submitted, the automatic control
DI port status under function of the load switch may fail. This function can
Load Switch be restored only after the SmartLogger is restarted or
the black start is successful in the off-grid scenario.
DI port status can be set to Open or Close. If the
actual status of the load switch is inconsistent with
Status, change the setting of DI port status.

Switch-off control Set the DO port for turning off the load switch.
port under Load
Switch

Switch-on control Set the DO port for turning on the load switch.
port under Load
Switch

Step 2 Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > Dispatch Control to set dispatch control
parameters.

Table 6-29 Dispatch control parameters

Tab Parameter Description

Control End-of-charge SOC Set the maximum SOC for charge in off-grid
Policy (off-grid) mode. The default value 90% is recommended.

SOC threshold for The default value 30% is recommended. If the

stopping load SOC is greater than or equal to SOC threshold
shedding for stopping load shedding, the load switch is
automatically turned on to supply power to
loads.
If you manually turn on or off the load switch,
the automatic control function of the load
switch will be automatically disabled. This
function can be restored only after the
SmartLogger is restarted or the black start is
successful in the off-grid scenario.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Tab Parameter Description

SOC threshold for The default value 20% is recommended. If the

starting load SOC is less than or equal to SOC threshold for
shedding starting load shedding, the load switch is
automatically turned off to reduce the ESS
discharge power.
If you manually turn on or off the load switch,
the automatic control function of the load
switch will be automatically disabled. This
function can be restored only after the
SmartLogger is restarted or the black start is
successful in the off-grid scenario.

End-of-discharge Set the minimum SOC for discharge in off-grid

SOC (off-grid) mode. The default value 10% is recommended.

Min PV voltage for After the solar irradiance recovers, the inverter
black start PV voltage increases. If the PV1 voltage of an
inverter is greater than or equal to Min PV
voltage for black start, the black start function
may be enabled.

Chargin Real-time SOC (%) The output power of the inverter is controlled
g based on the current battery SOC to meet the
Allowed Charge battery charge power adjustment target.
Power (%)
The value of Real-time SOC (%) ranges from
End-of-discharge SOC (off-grid) to End-of-
charge SOC (off-grid).
The value range of Allowed Charge Power
(%) is [0, 70]%.

Load Manual Load Close: Loads are connected.

control Control Open: Loads are disconnected.
NOTE
● In the off-grid scenario, the Close and Open
buttons are available only when the DO ports of
Switch-off control port and Switch-on control
port under Load Switch are configured.
● When the load switch is off, the Close button is
available, and the Open button is grayed out.
● When the load switch is on, the Close button is
grayed out, and the Open button is available.
● When the load switch is in invalid state, the Close
and Open buttons are grayed out.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 330

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTE

Array end-of-charge SOC > End-of-charge SOC (off-grid) ≥ SOC threshold for stopping
load shedding > SOC threshold for starting load shedding > End-of-discharge SOC (off-
grid) > Array end-of-discharge SOC

----End

6.6.4 Black Start

Choose Settings > Microgrid Control > Black Start to view the black start status
and perform black start manually.

NOTICE

For manual black start, before clicking Starting under Settings > Microgrid
Control > Black Start, ensure that Current Battery SOC is higher than 2%.
Otherwise, black start may fail.

Parameter Description

Current Battery SOC View the current battery SOC.

Black Start Progress View the black start progress.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 331

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Status ● Black start failed. Cause: All ESSs are offline.

● Black start failed. Cause: No ESS is available
for black start.
● Black start failed. Cause: No PCS is available
for black start.
● Black start failed. Cause: No PCS is prepared
for black start.
● Black start failed. Cause: No PCS has
established the voltage for black start.
● Manual black start in progress
● Automatic black start in progress: The current
battery SOC is higher than Min. Battery SOC
for Black Start.
– When MGCC Mode is set to Enable,
Microgrid scenario is set to On-grid/Off-
grid (PQ/VSG), and On/Off-grid switching
mode is set to Auto, black start is
automatically triggered if the mains triggers
the on/off-grid switching.
– When MGCC Mode is set to Enable,
Microgrid scenario is set to On-grid/Off-
grid (PQ/VSG), and On/Off-grid switching
mode is set to Manual, black start is
automatically triggered if you turn off on-
grid/off-grid switch locally to trigger the
on/off-grid switching manually.
– When MGCC Mode is set to Enable, if the
voltage on the PCS AC side is abnormal
(less than 30% of the rated voltage on the
PCS AC side) and the PCS is shut down
abnormally, black start is automatically
triggered.
– When MGCC Mode is set to Enable and
Microgrid scenario is set to Off-grid, if the
solar irradiance recovers for inverters and
no PCS is running, turn off the load switch
and then the black start is automatically
triggered.
● Black start succeeded

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 332

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.7 Setting Feature Parameters

PCS Insulation Resistance Detection
The PCS insulation resistance detection function periodically triggers PCS startup
and shutdown to check whether the system has a risk of low insulation resistance.
Choose Settings > Feature Parameters and set the PCS insulation resistance
detection parameter. If a dialog box You are advised to change the insulation
resistance detection time to the optimal time (XX:XX) is displayed, you are
advised to click Confirm, go to the Feature Parameters page, and set Detection
start time to the optimal time. This policy applies only to the C&I scenario and is
supported in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC172 and later versions.

Table 6-30 Setting parameters related to PCS insulation resistance detection

Parameter Description

Detection Specifies the time when the PCS insulation resistance detection
start time[1] function is enabled. The default value is 02:00.

Note [1]: You can set this parameter in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC153 and
later versions. LUNA2000-215-2S10 and LUNA2000-215-2S12 do not support
this parameter.

6.8 Power Grid Scheduling

6.8.1 Power Adjustment Description

According to standard requirements, the SmartLogger can reliably adjust power
for the connected solar inverters/Smart PCS in real time to ensure that the plant
can respond to requirements of the power grid company in a timely manner.

NOTICE

● To ensure that the SmartLogger will deliver scheduling commands to the

connected solar inverters or Smart PCS, you must select the active or reactive
power control mode before adjusting the active or reactive power for a PV
plant.
● If Active power control mode is set to No limit or Reactive power control
mode is set to No output, the SmartLogger does not send scheduling
commands to the connected solar inverters or Smart PCS.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 333

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.8.2 Setting Active Power Control

If the plant has requirements of power limitation, the power grid scheduling
personnel should limit the active power or disable all the active power for the
plant, that is, to enable the active power derating mode.

Step 1 Choose Monitoring > Inverter/PCS > Running Param. > Power Adjustment. On
the page that is displayed, check that Remote power schedule is set to Enable.
Step 2 Set the parameters for active power control and click Submit.

Figure 6-70 Active power control

----End

No Limit
Parameter Description

Active power control If this parameter is set to No limit, the device

mode operates at full load, and the Smart PCS limits the
power based on the energy storage control policy.

DI Active Scheduling

NOTICE

● When setting this function, ensure that the user-defined DI port is not occupied.
Otherwise, the setting will fail.
● When setting this function, ensure that the SmartLogger is correctly connected
to a ripple control receiver. (In Germany and some other European areas, a
ripple control receiver is used to convert a power grid scheduling signal to a dry
contact signal, in which a dry contact is needed.)
● When both Remote communication scheduling and DI are enabled, the
control with a lower active power percentage value is preferentially responded.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 334

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Active power control Set this parameter to DI active scheduling.

mode

Remote Set this parameter to Start-up, DI active scheduling

communication and remote communication scheduling work at the
scheduling same time.

DI ● Supports 16 levels of percentages.

NOTE ● "√" indicates a low level. When the four DI ports of
DI parameters include the SmartLogger are connected, the ports are low-
DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4, and
level ports. When not connected, the ports are
Percentage(%).
high-level ports.
● The percentage levels of DI1–DI4 must differ from
each other. Otherwise, an exception will occur
during command parsing.
● If the actual input DI signal is inconsistent with
that configured on the WebUI, the SmartLogger
controls the inverter to work at full power and the
Abnormal Active Schedule alarm is raised.

Percentage Fixed-Value Limitation (Open Loop)

The SmartLogger provides simplified active power percentage configuration as
well as power control automation, that is, to automatically adjust the active power
derating percentage in different periods of a day.

Parameter Description

Active power control Set this parameter to Percentage fixed-value

mode limitation (open loop) to control the maximum
output power of the devices by time segment.

Start time If the device is required to run with specified

maximum power in certain periods of a day, add
Percentage(%) records based on site requirements.
When multiple time points are set, the device will run
with the maximum power specified for the time point
that is earlier than and the closest to the current
system time. For example, if you add 00:00:00 and
12:00:00 on the WebUI and the current system time is
14:30:00, the device will run with the maximum power
specified for 12:00:00.

Remote Communication Scheduling

The management system or independent power adjustment device sends
scheduling commands over the communications port that supports Modbus TCP,

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 335

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

GOOSE, or IEC 104, without the need of user configuration or operation. The
SmartLogger can automatically switch between scheduling modes and send
scheduling commands.

Parameter Description

Active power control Set this parameter to Remote communication

mode scheduling.
The SmartLogger parses the scheduling command
delivered by the upper-layer management system to
valid instruction data that can be identified by the
devices in the plant and delivers the data to all
devices connected to the SmartLogger.
As the Remote communication scheduling mode has
a higher priority, the SmartLogger automatically
changes Active power control mode to Remote
communication scheduling after receiving a
scheduling command from the upper-layer
management system.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 336

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Schedule strategy The value can be Disable, Strategy 1, Strategy 2 or

Strategy 3. The default value is Strategy 1.
● Disable: The SmartLogger controls the device to
work at full load and will not receive scheduling
commands sent by the management system.
● Strategy 1: Open-loop scheduling policy. That is,
the SmartLogger evenly allocates the power value
from the scheduling and delivers the average value
to each device, which then operates with the
specific power. The adjustment value delivered by
the SmartLogger is constant. If Adjustment
coefficient is set, the power value will be sent to
the device after being multiplied by the preset
coefficient.
● Strategy 2: Customized functions for specific
plants. Set Overshoot, Adjustment period, and
Adjustment deadband based on the scheduling
requirements of the power plant.
– Overshoot: Indicates the maximum overshoot
percentage during adjustment. If a plant cannot
reach the preset target value due to factors such
as insufficient sunlight, the set target value is
the current value plus the overshoot.
– Adjustment period: Indicates the time required
from adjustment instruction delivery, device
response to the instruction, to the detection of
the preceding actions by the SmartLogger.
– Adjustment deadband: Indicates the
percentage of the adjustment deviation value to
the rated output capacity. In the adjustment
deadband, strategy 2 does not deliver control
instructions but still detects the deviation in real
time.
● Strategy 3: In the feed-in limitation scenario of the
master and slave SmartLoggers, set this parameter
to Strategy 3 for the slave SmartLogger.

Adjustment coefficient Coefficient for calculating the target value of active

power adjustment. The default value is 1.000.

Shutdown upon The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set to

communication Enable, the SmartLogger shuts down the device when
exceptions the communication between the SmartLogger and the
scheduling backend is interrupted for a period longer
than the set value of Time for communication
exception detection.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 337

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Time for The default value is 300. This parameter is used only
communication for shutdown protection when the communication
exception detection (s) between the SmartLogger and the scheduling backend
is abnormal. If the communication is interrupted for a
period longer than the set value, it is determined as
abnormal.

Automatic startup The default value is Enable. If this parameter is set to

upon communication Enable, the device automatically starts if the
recovery communication recovers after an exception.

Limit solar inverter The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set to
power upon active Enable, the SmartLogger controls the device in the
power scheduling following ways after the communication between the
timeout SmartLogger and the scheduling backend is
interrupted for a period longer than the set value of
Active power scheduling timeout threshold for
triggering solar inverter power limiting.
● Limit the active power of the inverter based on the
value of Power (in percentage of rated power) of
solar inverter in case of active power scheduling
timeout.
● Limit the active power of the Smart PCS based on
the value of Power (in percentage of rated
power) of ESS in case of active power
scheduling timeout.

Active power The default value is 300.0. This parameter is used only
scheduling timeout for active power limiting protection when the
threshold for triggering communication between the SmartLogger and the
solar inverter power scheduling backend is abnormal. If the
limiting (s) communication is interrupted for a period longer than
the set value, active power limiting protection is
started.

Power (in percentage The default value is 0.0.

of rated power) of After Limit solar inverter power upon active power
solar inverter in case of scheduling timeout is enabled, if the communication
active power between the SmartLogger and the scheduling backend
scheduling timeout (%) is interrupted for a period longer than the set value of
Active power scheduling timeout threshold for
triggering solar inverter power limiting, the
SmartLogger limits the active power of the inverter
based on the set value of this parameter.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 338

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Power (in percentage The default value is 0.0.

of rated power) of ESS After Limit solar inverter power upon active power
in case of active power scheduling timeout is enabled, if the communication
scheduling timeout (%) between the SmartLogger and the scheduling backend
is interrupted for a period longer than the set value of
Active power scheduling timeout threshold for
triggering solar inverter power limiting, the
SmartLogger limits the active power of the Smart PCS
based on the set value of this parameter.

Filter same scheduling Enable: The SmartLogger filters the same scheduling
commands commands delivered in the northbound direction.
Disable: The SmartLogger does not filter the same
scheduling commands delivered in the northbound
direction.

Export Limitation (kW)

NOTICE

● You are advised to choose Settings > Export Limitation and enable the
function of limiting feed-in power.
● To enable this function, you need to set meter, inverter/Smart PCS, and export
limitation parameters. This section describes how to set export limitation
parameters.
● Before setting the parameters, ensure that the power meter is correctly
connected to the SmartLogger.

Step 1 Set export limitation parameters and click Submit.

Parameter Description

Active power control Set this parameter to Export Limitation(kW).

mode

Start control When this parameter is set to Yes, the power limiting
function takes effect.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Electric meter power ● Positive: default value.

direction – Cables are correctly connected to the meter.
– If cables are reversely connected to the meter
and the NMS does not support reverse
connection[1], set Meter access direction[2] to
Reverse and Electric meter power direction to
Positive.
● Reverse: applicable to export+import meters. If
cables are reversely connected to the meter and
the NMS supports reverse connection, set Meter
access direction to Reverse_Report raw data and
Electric meter power direction to Reverse.

Limitation mode ● Total power: controls the total power at the grid-
connection point to limit the power fed to the
power grid.
● Single-phase power: controls the power of each
phase at the grid-connection point to limit the
power fed to the power grid.

Maximum grid feed-in Indicates the maximum power that the device can
power feed into the power grid.
Suggestion: Set this parameter based on the feed-in
threshold allowed by the power grid company.

Power lowering Specifies the period for lowering the device output
adjustment period power.

Maximum protection Specifies the maximum duration from the time when
time the SmartLogger detects feed-in to the time when the
device output power reaches 0.
Suggestion: Set this parameter based on the
maximum feed-in duration allowed by the power grid
company.

Power raising threshold When the power supply from the grid reaches this
threshold, the devices start to raise their output
power. The recommended value of this parameter is
1% to 2% of Pn.
Pn is the total rated output power of devices and can
be queried on the overview page of the SmartLogger.

PV Power Limit Upon Set the inverter output power percentage when
Communication Failure communication between the SmartLogger and the
meter is abnormal.

PCS Power Limit Upon Set the PCS output power percentage when
Communication Failure communication between the SmartLogger and the
meter is abnormal.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Switch-off with 0% Set whether the DO port is allowed to control switch-

power limit off.

Switch-off control port Set this parameter to the DO port that controls
switch-off.

Switch-on control port Set this parameter to the DO port that controls
switch-on.

Switch-off state Set this parameter to the DI port that reports the
feedback port switch-off status.

Switch-on state Set this parameter to the DI port that reports the
feedback port switch-on status.

Note [1]: If cables are reversely connected to the meter and the NMS can
correctly display the real-time data of the meter, it is considered that the NMS
supports reverse connection. That is, the NMS reverses the active power, reactive
power, power factor, phase A active power, phase B active power, and phase C
active power, replaces the total positive active energy and total negative active
energy with each other, and replaces the total positive reactive power and total
negative reactive power with each other.
Note [2]: Meter access direction is set in the meter running parameters.

Step 2 Verify that the SmartLogger can remotely turn on and off circuit breakers in
scenarios with circuit breakers.
● Click Switch off and check that the circuit breaker is switched off properly.
● Click Switch on and check that the circuit breaker is switched on properly.

----End

Remote Output Control

NOTE

Remote output control is not supported in energy storage scenarios (excluding distributed
energy storage scenarios). When you attempt to set the mode to Remote output control, a
failure message will be returned. If Remote output control has been set before plant
expansion by adding ESSs, you need to set Active power control mode to other values.

Step 1 Synchronize the clock source of the server.

Path Parameter Description

Settings > User Clock source Set this parameter to NTP.

Param. >
Date&Time Synchronization Set this parameter to the IP address or
server domain name of the server for time
synchronization.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 341

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Path Parameter Description

NTP You can click this button to check the

synchronization time synchronization status.
test

Step 2 Set remote output control parameters.

Path Parameter Description

Settings > Active power Set this parameter to Remote output

Active Power control mode control.
Control
Control area Set this parameter to the area where the
remote output control function is used.
To enable the function in some areas,
the license needs to be imported and
enabled.

Output control Set this parameter to the time required

duration for the device to change its output
power from 0% to 100% or from 100%
to 0%.

PV plant ID Set this parameter to the PV plant ID.

Remote output Set this parameter to the IP address or

control server domain name of the server.

Enable certificate Determine whether to import and

enable a certificate based on the actual
situation.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 342

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Path Parameter Description

Selling surplus ● Disable: The inverter output power is

power controlled by the SmartLogger
according to the remote output
control command issued by the
power company. The output power of
the PV plant cannot exceed the active
power scheduling value issued by the
power company.
● Enable: When the load power is less
than or equal to the remote output
control command, the inverter output
power is determined according to the
remote output control command.
Power can be bought or sold at the
grid-connection point. When the load
power is greater than the remote
output control command, the
SmartLogger automatically adjusts
the inverter output power to achieve
zero-power at the grid-connection
point, that is, power cannot be sold at
the grid-connection point.

PV module Set this parameter to the capacity of PV

capacity modules connected to the plant.

Plant AC capacity Set this parameter to the AC capacity of

the limited feed-in power from the
plant.

NOTE

● If the connection between the SmartLogger and the server is abnormal, click Submit
and then Import to import the output control file in .data format obtained from the
website of the utility company to the SmartLogger.
● After the SmartLogger connects to the server, you can export the relevant file.

----End

6.8.3 Setting Reactive Power Control

Large-scale plants are required to adjust the voltage at the grid-connection point.
Power grid scheduling personnel enable a plant to absorb or add reactive power
at the grid-connection point, that is, to enable the reactive power compensation,
based on the real-time reactive power transmission status in the power grid.

Step 1 Choose Monitoring > Inverter/PCS > Running Param. > Power Adjustment. On
the page that is displayed, check that Remote power schedule is set to Enable.

Step 2 Set the parameters for reactive power control and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 343

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-71 Reactive power control

----End

No Output
Parameter Description

Reactive power control If the plant is not required to adjust the voltage at the
mode grid-connection point or perform reactive power
compensation, device can run with pure active output
power. In this case, set this parameter to No output.

DI Reactive Scheduling

NOTICE

● When setting this function, ensure that the user-defined DI port is not occupied.
Otherwise, the setting will fail.
● SmartLogger scenario: Before setting this function, ensure that the
SmartLogger is properly connected to the ripple control receiver.
● SmartLogger+SmartModule scenario: Before setting this function, ensure that
the SmartModule is properly connected to the ripple control receiver.

Table 6-31 SmartLogger scenario

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to DI reactive scheduling.

mode

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

DI ● Supports 16 levels of power factors.

NOTE ● "√" indicates a low level. When the four DI ports of
DI parameters include the SmartLogger are connected, the ports are low-
DI1, DI2, DI3, DI4, and
level ports. When not connected, the ports are
Power factor.
high-level ports.
● The percentage levels of DI1–DI4 must differ from
each other. Otherwise, an exception will occur
during command parsing.
● If the actual input DI signal is inconsistent with
that configured on the WebUI, the SmartLogger
controls the device to work at full power and the
Reactive Power Scheduling Instruction Exception
alarm is raised.

Table 6-32 SmartLogger+SmartModule scenario

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to DI reactive scheduling.

mode

DI ● Supports 16 levels of percentages.

NOTE ● "√" indicates a low level. When the four DI ports of
The DI parameters the SmartModule are connected, the ports are low-
include M1.DI1, M1.DI2,
level ports. When not connected, the ports are
M1.DI3, M1.DI4, and
Percentage. high-level ports.
● The percentage levels of M1.DI1 to M1.DI4 must
differ from each other. Otherwise, an exception will
occur during command parsing.
If the actual input DI signal is inconsistent with
that configured on the WebUI, the SmartLogger
controls the device to work at full power and the
Reactive Power Scheduling Instruction Exception
alarm is raised.

NOTE

● Before connecting the SmartModule to the SmartLogger, if DI reactive scheduling has

been configured for the DI port and the scheduling signal needs to be connected to the
SmartModule, delete the DI configuration and reconfigure it.
● In the scenario where the SmartLogger and SmartModule are combined, if the
SmartModule is removed and the scheduling signal needs to be connected to the
SmartLogger, delete the DI configuration and reconfigure it.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 345

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Reactive Power Fix Control

Parameter Description

Reactive power control If the array is required to generate constant reactive

mode power at a specified time, set this parameter to
Reactive power fix control.

Start time If the device is required to run with specified

maximum power in certain periods of a day, add
Reactive power(kVar) records based on site requirements.
When multiple time points are set, the device will run
with the maximum power specified for the time point
that is earlier than and the closest to the current
system time. For example, if you add 00:00:00 and
12:00:00 on the WebUI and the current system time is
14:30:00, the device will run with the maximum power
specified for 12:00:00.

Power Factor Fix Control

Parameter Description

Reactive power control If the plant is required to generate a constant power

mode factor at the grid-connection point and the device is
required to adjust the real-time reactive power based
on the preset power factor, set this parameter to
Power factor fix control.

Start time If the device is required to run with specified power in

certain periods of a day, add records based on site
Power factor requirements.
When multiple time points are set, the device will run
with the power specified for the time point that is
earlier than and the closest to the current system
time. For example, if you add 00:00:00 and 12:00:00
on the WebUI and the current system time is 14:30:00,
the device will run with the maximum power specified
for 12:00:00.

Q-U Characteristic Curve

If the remote reactive power control command is not available, you can configure
the characteristic curve as a substitute. The SmartLogger delivers the values
configured for the characteristic curve to the inverter or Smart PCS, which then
operates according to the configuration. The SmartLogger no longer adjusts the
values.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

NOTICE

Configure the characteristic curve under instructions from professionals to ensure

that the inverter or Smart PCS works properly.

In the Q-U characteristic curve control mode, the inverter or Smart PCS
dynamically adjusts the ratio Q/S of output reactive power to apparent power in
accordance with the ratio U/Un(%) of the actual grid voltage to the rated grid
voltage.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to Q-U characteristic curve.

mode

Reactive power Specifies the change interval of the reactive power at

adjustment time the grid-connection point.

Trigger power Under a specific grid code, the characteristic curve

percentage takes effect only when the actual output active power
of the device is greater than the specified value.

Exit power percentage Under a specific grid code, the characteristic curve
becomes invalid when the actual output active power
of the device is less than the specified value.

Limit value for Limits the actual minimum PF when the Q-U
minimum PF characteristic curve takes effect.

Characteristic curve Specifies the number of points on the characteristic

points curve.
The characteristic curve supports a maximum of 10
valid points.

U/Un(%) When configuring the curve, ensure that the U/Un(%)

value of a point is greater than the U/Un(%) value of
Q/S the previous point. Otherwise, the message indicating
invalid input will be displayed.

cosφ-P/Pn Characteristic Curve

If the remote reactive power control command is not available, you can configure
the characteristic curve as a substitute. The SmartLogger delivers the values
configured for the characteristic curve to the inverter or Smart PCS, which then
operates according to the configuration. The SmartLogger no longer adjusts the
values.

NOTICE

Configure the characteristic curve under instructions from professionals to ensure

that the inverter or Smart PCS works properly.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

In the cosφ-P/Pn characteristic curve control mode, the inverter or Smart PCS
dynamically adjusts the power factor cosφ in accordance with the P/Pn (%) based
on the VDE-4105 and BDEW German standards.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to cosφ-P/Pn characteristic curve.

mode

Reactive power Specifies the change interval of the reactive power at

adjustment time the grid-connection point.

Characteristic curve Specifies the number of points on the characteristic

points curve.
The characteristic curve supports a maximum of 10
valid points.

U/Un(%) When configuring the curve, ensure that the P/Pn(%)

value of a point is greater than the P/Pn(%) value of
cosφ the previous point. Otherwise, the message indicating
invalid input will be displayed.

Q-U Hysteresis Curve (CEI0-16)

If the remote reactive power control command is not available, you can configure
the characteristic curve as a substitute. The SmartLogger delivers the values
configured for the characteristic curve to the inverter or Smart PCS, which then
operates according to the configuration. The SmartLogger no longer adjusts the
values.

NOTICE

Configure the characteristic curve under instructions from professionals to ensure

that the inverter or Smart PCS works properly.

The Q-U hysteresis curve (CEI0-16) control mode is the Italian standard CEI0-16
version of the Q-U characteristic curve. It dynamically adjusts the output reactive
power of the inverter or Smart PCS in accordance with the ratio of the actual
voltage to the rated voltage. The target value of reactive power adjustment should
be in the form of Q/S.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to Q-U hysteresis curve(CEI0-16).

mode

Reactive power Specifies the change interval of the reactive power at

adjustment time the grid-connection point.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 348

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Trigger power Under a specific grid code, the characteristic curve

percentage takes effect only when the actual output active power
of the device is greater than the specified value.

Exit power percentage Under a specific grid code, the characteristic curve
becomes invalid when the actual output active power
of the device is less than the specified value.

Limit value for Limits the actual minimum PF when the Q-U
minimum PF characteristic curve takes effect.

U/Un(%) When configuring the curve, ensure that the U/Un(%)

value of a point is greater than the U/Un(%) value of
Q/S the previous point. Otherwise, the message indicating
invalid input will be displayed.
When configuring the curve, ensure that the Q/S
values at points A and B are the same and set in
sequence, and that the Q/S values at points C and D
are the same and set in sequence. Otherwise, a
message indicating invalid input is displayed.

Remote Communication Scheduling

The management system or independent power adjustment device sends
scheduling commands over the communications port that supports Modbus TCP
or IEC 104, without the need of user configuration or operation. The SmartLogger
can automatically switch between scheduling modes and send scheduling
commands.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control As the Remote communication scheduling mode has

mode a higher priority, the SmartLogger automatically
changes Reactive power control mode to Remote
communication scheduling after receiving a
scheduling command from the upper-layer
management system.
If this parameter is set to Remote communication
scheduling, the SmartLogger parses the scheduling
command delivered by the upper-layer management
system to valid instruction data that can be identified
by the devices in the plant and delivers the data to all
devices connected to the SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 349

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Shut down solar The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set to
inverter upon reactive Enable, the SmartLogger shuts down the device when
power scheduling the communication between the SmartLogger and the
timeout scheduling backend is interrupted for a period longer
than the set value of Reactive power scheduling
timeout threshold for triggering solar inverter
shutdown.

Reactive power The default value is 300. This parameter is used only
scheduling timeout for shutdown protection for reactive power scheduling
threshold for triggering when the communication between the SmartLogger
solar inverter shutdown and the scheduling backend is abnormal. If the
communication is interrupted for a period longer than
the set value, it is determined as abnormal.

Start up solar inverter The default value is Enable. If this parameter is set to
upon recovery from Enable, after a reactive power signal timeout occurs,
reactive power if the reactive power signal recovers, the device
scheduling timeout automatically starts.

Limit solar inverter The default value is Disable. If this parameter is set to
power upon reactive Enable, the SmartLogger controls the device in the
power scheduling following ways after the communication between the
timeout SmartLogger and the scheduling backend is
interrupted for a period longer than the set value of
Reactive power scheduling timeout threshold for
triggering solar inverter power limiting.
● Limit the reactive power of the inverter based on
the value of Q/S during power limiting of solar
inverter in case of reactive power scheduling
timeout.
● Limit the reactive power of the Smart PCS based
on the value of Q/S during power limiting of ESS
in case of reactive power scheduling timeout.

Reactive power The default value is 300.0. This parameter is used only
scheduling timeout for reactive power limiting protection when the
threshold for triggering communication between the SmartLogger and the
solar inverter power scheduling backend is abnormal. If the
limiting (s) communication is interrupted for a period longer than
the set value, reactive power limiting protection is
started.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 350

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Q/S during power The default value is 0.000.

limiting of solar After Limit solar inverter power upon reactive
inverter in case of power scheduling timeout is enabled, if the
reactive power communication between the SmartLogger and the
scheduling timeout (%) scheduling backend is interrupted for a period longer
than the set value of Reactive power scheduling
timeout threshold for triggering solar inverter
power limiting, the SmartLogger limits the active
power of the inverter based on the set value of this
parameter.

Q/S during power The default value is 0.000.

limiting of ESS in case After Limit solar inverter power upon reactive
of reactive power power scheduling timeout is enabled, if the
scheduling timeout (%) communication between the SmartLogger and the
scheduling backend is interrupted for a period longer
than the set value of Reactive power scheduling
timeout threshold for triggering solar inverter
power limiting, the SmartLogger limits the reactive
power of the Smart PCS based on the set value of this
parameter.

Power Factor Closed-Loop Control (Old Policy)

NOTICE

Before setting the parameters, ensure that the power meter is correctly connected
to the SmartLogger.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to Power factor closed-loop

mode control (old policy).

Target power factor Specifies the target value for the adjustment power
factor of the power meter.

Adjustment period Specifies the interval for sending adjustment

commands by the SmartLogger.

Adjustment deadband Specifies the adjustment power factor precision.

NOTICE
This parameter is valid only when the power factor of the
power meter is greater than 0.9.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Power Factor Closed-Loop Control

To improve the revenue, a distributed plant needs to reduce or avoid the power
factor surcharge by performing distributed reactive power compensation. To
enable the function, set the related parameters.

NOTICE

● You are advised to choose Settings > Smart Reactive Power Compensation to
enable smart reactive power compensation.
● For versions earlier than SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC160, before setting the
parameters, ensure that the license for smart reactive power compensation has
been loaded on the Maintenance > License Management page.
● Before setting the parameters, ensure that the power meter is correctly
connected to the SmartLogger.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to Power factor closed-loop

mode control.

Electric meter power ● Positive: default value.

direction – Cables are correctly connected to the meter.
– If cables are reversely connected to the meter
and the NMS does not support reverse
connection[1], set Meter access direction[2] to
Reverse and Electric meter power direction to
Positive.
● Reverse: applicable to export+import meters. If
cables are reversely connected to the meter and
the NMS supports reverse connection, set Meter
access direction to Reverse_Report raw data and
Electric meter power direction to Reverse.

Power meter Set this parameter to Smart meter.

Target power factor Specifies the target value for the adjustment power
factor of the power meter. The target value shall be
larger than the appraisal value of the plant power
factor.

Adjustment period Specifies the interval for sending adjustment

commands by the SmartLogger.

Adjustment deadband Specifies the adjustment power factor precision.

NOTICE
This parameter is valid only when the power factor of the
power meter is greater than 0.9.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 352

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Reactive compensation Specifies the delay time for starting the distributed
delay power factor compensation if the current power factor
is lower than the target power factor.

Note [1]: If cables are reversely connected to the meter and the NMS can
correctly display the real-time data of the meter, it is considered that the NMS
supports reverse connection. That is, the NMS reverses the active power, reactive
power, power factor, phase A active power, phase B active power, and phase C
active power, replaces the total positive active energy and total negative active
energy with each other, and replaces the total positive reactive power and total
negative reactive power with each other.
Note [2]: Meter access direction is set in the meter running parameters.

NOTICE

When the SmartLogger receives a remote reactive power scheduling command

from the plant, it automatically changes Reactive power control mode to
Remote communication scheduling. If power factor closed-loop control is
required, set Reactive power control mode to Power factor closed-loop control
and set the target power factor correctly.

PF-U Characteristic Curve

If the remote reactive power control command is not available, you can configure
the characteristic curve as a substitute. The SmartLogger delivers the values
configured for the characteristic curve to the inverter or Smart PCS, which then
operates according to the configuration. The SmartLogger no longer adjusts the
values.

NOTICE

Configure the characteristic curve under instructions from professionals to ensure

that the inverter or Smart PCS works properly.

In the PF-U characteristic curve control mode, the inverter or Smart PCS
dynamically adjusts the PF at the device port based on the ratio U/Un(%) of the
actual grid voltage to the rated grid voltage.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to PF-U characteristic curve.

mode

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 353

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Characteristic curve ● Specifies the number of points on the characteristic

points curve.
● The characteristic curve supports a maximum of 10
valid points.

U/Un(%) When configuring the curve, ensure that the U/Un(%)

value of a point is greater than that of the previous
PF point. Otherwise, the "Invalid input" message will be
displayed.

Q-P Characteristic Curve

If the remote reactive power control command is not available, you can configure
the characteristic curve as a substitute. The SmartLogger delivers the values
configured for the characteristic curve to the inverter or Smart PCS, which then
operates according to the configuration. The SmartLogger no longer adjusts the
values.

NOTICE

Configure the characteristic curve under instructions from professionals to ensure

that the inverter or Smart PCS works properly.

In the control mode of the Q-P characteristic curve, the inverter or Smart PCS
adjusts the ratio Q/Pn of the output reactive power to the rated power based on
the ratio P/Pn of the current active power to the rated power.

Parameter Description

Reactive power control Set this parameter to Q-P characteristic curve.

mode

Reactive power Specifies the change interval of the reactive power at

adjustment time the grid-connection point.

Characteristic curve ● Specifies the number of points on the characteristic

points curve.
● The characteristic curve supports a maximum of 10
valid points.

P/Pn When configuring the curve, ensure that the P/Pn

value of a point is greater than that of the previous
Q/Pn point. Otherwise, the "Invalid input" message will be
displayed.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.8.4 Setting Parameters for Shutdown at High Feed-in Power

NOTE

This section applies to V300R001C00 only.

The power grid company requires plants to limit or reduce the output power of a
PV system when it is too high. If the output power cannot be limited to the range
within the specified time, all inverters must be shut down.

Step 1 Set parameters for shutdown at high feed-in power and click Submit.

Figure 6-72 Shutdown at high feed-in power

----End

Shutdown at high feed-in power

Parameter Description

Shutdown at high feed- ● The default value is Disable.

in power ● If this parameter is set to Enable, the inverter shuts
down for protection when the grid-connection
point power exceeds the threshold and remains in
this condition for the specified time threshold.

Upper feed-in power The default value is 0. This parameter specifies the
threshold for inverter power threshold of the grid-connection point for
shutdown triggering inverter shutdown.

High feed-in power The default value is 20. This parameter specifies the
duration threshold for duration threshold of high feed-in power for
triggering inverter triggering inverter shutdown.
shutdown ● When High feed-in power duration threshold for
triggering inverter shutdown is set to 5,
Shutdown at high feed-in power takes
precedence.
● When High feed-in power duration threshold for
triggering inverter shutdown is set to 20, Export
Limitation(kW) takes precedence (when Active
power control mode is set to Export
Limitation(kW)).

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.8.5 Setting Export Limitation Parameters

Context
When the PV and energy storage plant generates power for self-consumption,
reverse current may feed into the power grid if the loads cannot consume all the
power. In this case, you can set the export limitation parameters on the WebUI to
prevent reverse current.
● Scenario without a circuit breaker: The reverse current feeding into the power
grid can be eliminated by sending a command from the SmartLogger to
adjust the inverter/Smart PCS output power.

Figure 6-73 Network diagram (without a circuit breaker)

● Scenario with a circuit breaker: When the reverse current feeding into the
power grid cannot be eliminated by sending a command from the
SmartLogger to adjust the inverter or Smart PCS output power, and
Maximum protection time is exceeded, the SmartLogger controls the DO
port to drive the relay to switch off the circuit breaker. When the DI port
detects that the circuit breaker is switched off, the DO port and relay on the
SmartLogger will be switched off, and the SmartLogger will restore to the
initial state.
NOTE

Connect the DO ports in series to the 12 V power supply loop of the relay coils. You are
advised to use the 12 V output power port on the SmartLogger to power the relay coils. You
can also prepare a 12 V power supply.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 356

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-74 Network diagram (with a circuit breaker)

CAUTION

In the scenario with a circuit breaker, place the power supply to the SmartLogger
at the upstream of the circuit breaker to avoid the SmartLogger power-off after
the DO port switches off the circuit breaker.

Procedure
Step 1 Set parameters as prompted. For details, click Help on the page.
NOTE

● Click Previous and Next as required.

● For details about the running parameters of power meters, see 6.3.16.2 Setting
Modbus-RTU Meter Parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 357

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-75 Setting export limitation parameters

----End

6.8.6 Setting Parameters for Smart Reactive Power

Compensation
Context
The smart reactive power compensation algorithm obtains the power data of the
power meter at the grid-connection point through the SmartLogger, performs
intelligent algorithm analysis, adjusts the reactive output power of the inverter or
Smart PCS, optimizes the power factor of the grid-connection point, and reduces
or avoids power factor charge to increase the energy yield of the plant.

NOTE

● Before setting the parameters, ensure that the inverter or Smart PCS is connected to the
SmartLogger.
● If a power meter is connected to the SmartLogger, the power meter access procedure in
the wizard is only used as a check guide. If no power meter is connected to the
SmartLogger, add a power meter by following the wizard.
● For versions earlier than SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC160, before setting the
parameters, ensure that the license for smart reactive power compensation has been
loaded on the Maintenance > License Management page.

Procedure
Step 1 Set parameters as prompted. For details, click Help on the page.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-76 Setting parameters for smart reactive power compensation (scenario
selection)

NOTICE

When the SmartLogger receives a remote reactive power scheduling command

from the plant, it automatically changes Reactive power control mode to
Remote communication scheduling. If power factor closed-loop control is
required, set Reactive power control mode to Power factor closed-loop control
and set the target power factor correctly.

NOTE

For details about the running parameters of power meters, see 6.3.16.2 Setting Modbus-
RTU Meter Parameters.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 359

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-77 Setting parameters for smart reactive power compensation (power
meter)

----End

6.8.7 Setting DRM Parameters

Context
According to Australian standards, the inverters must pass the Demand Response
Modes (DRM) certification.

Figure 6-78 Wiring diagram for the DRM function

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 360

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Table 6-33 DRM requirements

Mode SmartLogger Requirement Remarks
Port

DRM0 AI2–AI4 ● When S0 is turned on, the -

inverters shut down.
● When S0 is turned off, the
inverters are connected to the
power grid.

DRM5 DI1 When S5 is turned on, the When two or

inverters do not output active more DRM
power. modes are
used at the
DRM6 DI2 When S6 is turned on, the same time,
output active power of the the strictest
inverters does not exceed 50% requirement
of the rated power. must be met.
DRM7 DI3 When S7 is turned on, the
output active power of the
inverters does not exceed 75%
of the rated power, and the
inverters consume the maximum
reactive power.

DRM8 DI4 When S8 is turned on, the

output active power of the
inverters recovers.
NOTE
The inverters output active power
based on the percentage set on the
SmartLogger.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Settings > Power Adjustment > Active Power Control to check the
Active power control mode.
● When setting DRM0 parameters, you can set Active power control mode to
any value.
● When setting DRM5–DRM8 parameters: Set Active power control mode to
No limit.
Step 2 Choose Settings > Power Adjustment > Reactive Power Control and ensure that
Reactive power control mode is set to No output.
Step 3 Choose Settings > Remote Shutdown and ensure that Access port is set to No.
Step 4 Set DRM parameters and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-79 Setting DRM parameters

Parameter Description

connection port Set the parameter to the AI port for DRM signals.

Startup current range If the current of the AI port is within the setting
range, inverters are turned on. Otherwise, inverters
are turned off.

Power Control Set DI parameters based on the DRM requirements.

----End

6.8.8 Setting Remote Shutdown

6.8.8.1 Setting Dry Contact Remote Shutdown

Context
The SmartLogger has four DI ports, and the OVGR can connect to any DI port. The
SmartLogger shuts down the inverter over OVGR signals.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 362

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Figure 6-80 Networking

NOTICE

When setting this function, ensure that the user-defined DI port is not occupied.
Otherwise, the setting will fail.

Procedure
Step 1 Set dry contact remote shutdown parameters.

Figure 6-81 Dry contact remote shutdown

Parameter Description

Access port Set the parameter to the DI port connected to OVGR

signals.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description

Effective dry contact The value can be Open or Close.

status NOTE
If OVGR shutdown is enabled and this parameter is set to
Close, the SmartLogger sends an inverter shutdown
command only when the corresponding DI port is in the
Close state.

OVGR shutdown Specifies whether to enable shutdown over OVGR.

Cubicle alarm enabling If this parameter is set to Enable, the Abnormal

Cubicle alarm is generated when the dry contact
signal is effective and the Cubicle is abnormal.

----End

6.8.8.2 Setting NS Protection Remote Shutdown

Context
● The NS protection function applies to areas complying with the VDE 4105
standard. Choose Monitoring > Running Param. > Grid Parameters and set
Grid Code to VDE-AR-N-4105 or SWITZERLAND-NA/EEA:2020-LV230.
● The NS protection device is connected to the AI1 port and 12V output power
port. The SmartLogger shuts down the inverter over the voltage change
detected at the AI1 port. When the NS protection device is disconnected, the
AI1 port voltage is 0 V, and the inverter shuts down. When the NS protection
device is connected again, the AI1 port voltage is 12 V, and you need to start
the inverter manually.

Figure 6-82 Networking

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 364

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Procedure
1. Set NS protection remote shutdown parameters.

Figure 6-83 NS protection remote shutdown

Parameter Description

Access port Set the parameter to AI1 port connected to AI

signals. The SmartLogger shuts down the inverter
over the voltage change detected at the AI1 port.

2. Set the protocol type of the RS485 communications parameters. Protocol of

the COM1 port is set to Modbus by default, and that of the COM2 port
should be set to Modbus-Control. Set Baud rate, Parity, Stop Bit, Start
address, and End address based on the actual situation.
a. If only one inverter is connected to the SmartLogger, connect the COM1
port on the SmartLogger to the RS485-1 port on the inverter, and
connect the COM2 port on the SmartLogger to the RS485-2 port on the
inverter.
b. If inverters are cascaded, connect the COM1 port on the SmartLogger to
the RS485-1 port on the inverter, and connect the COM2 port on the
SmartLogger to the RS485-2 port on the inverter. Connect the RS485-1
and RS485-2 ports on one inverter to the RS485-1 and RS485-2 ports on
the other inverter, respectively.
NOTE

Because there are many types of inverters, the RS485-1 port may be named
RS485_1, 485B1, or 485A1. The RS485-2 port may be named RS485_2, 485B2, or
485A2.

Figure 6-84 Setting RS485 parameters

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 365

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

6.8.9 Setting Feed-in at Limited Current

● These parameters can be configured only for SmartLogger
V300R023C10SPC550 and later versions and apply only to the C&I scenarios in
the United Kingdom.
● To use the Feed-in at limited current function, at least one of the following
conditions must be met:
– The active power control mode is No limit or Export Limitation(kW).
– The battery control working mode is No control, Maximum self-
consumption, or TOU.
– Power boost limit for battery control is configured.
– Peak shaving for battery control is configured.

Procedure
Choose Settings > Power Adjustment > Feed-in at limited current. Click
Previous and Next as required.
NOTE

For details about the running parameters of meters, see Setting Modbus-RTU Meter
Parameters.

1. Set inverter or Smart PCS parameters and click Batch configurations.

Description Description

Communication disconnection fail- If this parameter is set to Enable,

safe the inverter or Smart PCS performs
protection based on the preset
power when its communication with
the SmartLogger is interrupted for a
period longer than Communication
disconnection detection time.

Active power limit when Set this parameter to 0.0.

communication fails (%)

Communication disconnection Set the duration threshold to 5s for

detection time (s) determining the communication
disconnection between the inverter
or Smart PCS and the SmartLogger
or Smart Dongle.

2. Set parameters for feed-in at limited current and click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 6 WebUI Operations

Parameter Description Remarks

Feed-in at The default value is Disable. If the feed-in current

limited current ● If this parameter is set to exceeds Max. feed-in
Disable, feed-in at limited current(A) for 15
current will be unavailable. seconds, the device will
shut down and an alarm
● If this parameter is set to will be reported. After the
Enable, feed-in at limited device has been shut
current will be available. down for 4 hours,
manually restart the
device to restore feed-in
at limited current. The
alarm will be
automatically cleared.

Max. feed-in Set the maximum current fed These parameters are
current(A) to the grid at the grid displayed after Feed-in
connection point. at limited current is set
to Enable.
Max. grid Set the maximum current
supply supplied from the grid at the
current(A) grid connection point.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 367

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

7 Device Maintenance

7.1 Routine Maintenance

● Ensure that the SmartLogger is free from strong electromagnetic interference.
● Ensure that the SmartLogger is away from heat sources.
● Regularly clean the SmartLogger.
● Regularly check that cables are secured.

7.2 Troubleshooting
No. Fault Cause Suggestion

1 The 1. The DC output power cable for 1. Connect the DC output power
SmartLogge the power adapter is not cable for the power adapter to
r cannot be connected the 12V IN port of the the 12V IN port of the
powered on. SmartLogger. SmartLogger.
2. The power cable is not connected 2. Check that the power cable is
to the AC input power port of the connected to the AC input power
power adapter. port of the power adapter.
3. The AC input power cable is not 3. Check that the power cable is
connected to the AC socket. connected to the AC socket.
4. The power adapter is faulty. 4. Replace the power adapter.
5. The SmartLogger is faulty. 5. Contact the dealer or Huawei
technical support.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

No. Fault Cause Suggestion

2 The 1. The COM ports are not 1. Check the RS485 cable
SmartLogge connected to devices, or the connection. If the cable is loose,
r cannot cables are loose, disconnected, or disconnected, or reversely
find any reversely connected. connected, reconnect it firmly.
device. 2. The RS485 communications 2. Check the RS485
parameters are not correctly set, communications parameter
and the solar inverter address is settings. Ensure that the baud
beyond the search range preset rate and communication address
on the SmartLogger. are set correctly and that the
3. The devices that cannot be solar inverter address is within
detected automatically, such as the search range of the
the EMI and power meter, are SmartLogger.
not manually added. 3. Manually add the devices that
4. There are devices with duplicate cannot be detected
addresses. automatically, such as the EMI
and power meter.
5. The network port does not
connect to any devices or the 4. Addresses are automatically
network cables are loose. assigned to all devices to ensure
that no duplicate address exists.
Then restart the automatic
search.
5. Check the network cable
connection. If the cable is loose,
reconnect it firmly.
6. Contact the dealer or Huawei
technical support.

3 The 1. The solar inverter and 1. Check whether the solar inverter
communicat SmartLogger do not support and SmartLogger support MBUS.
ion for MBUS. 2. Check the AC power cable. If it is
MBUS 2. The AC power cable is loose, loose, disconnected, or reversely
networking disconnected, or reversely connected, reconnect it firmly.
failed. connected. 3. Check that the upstream circuit
3. The upstream circuit breaker for breaker for the AC power cable
the AC power cable is turned off. is turned on.
4. In MBUS networking, Built-in 4. Set Built-in MBUS and
MBUS or Networking is set to Networking to Enable.
Disable. 5. Contact the dealer or Huawei
5. The SmartLogger is faulty. technical support.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 369

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

No. Fault Cause Suggestion

4 The device 1. The cable between the solar 1. Check the communications cable
status is inverter and the SmartLogger is and network cable between the
displayed as loose or disconnected. device and the SmartLogger. If
disconnecte 2. The solar inverter is powered off. the cables are loose, reconnect
d on the them firmly.
SmartLogge 3. The baud rate or RS485 address
of the solar inverter is changed. 2. Check the solar inverter
r. connection and power on the
4. The solar inverter is replaced. solar inverter.
5. The solar inverter is removed and 3. Check that the baud rate and
not reconnected. RS485 address of the solar
inverter are set correctly.
4. If any device is replaced, search
for the device again or manually
add the device.
5. If the device has been removed,
perform the Remove Devices
operation on the Device Mgmt.
page.

5 The EMI 1. The RS485 communications cable 1. Check the cable connection. If
fails in between the EMI and the the cable is loose or
communicat SmartLogger is connected disconnected, reconnect it firmly.
ion. incorrectly, loose, or 2. Power on the EMI.
disconnected.
3. Check that the RS485
2. The EMI is not powered on. communications parameters of
3. The EMI and SmartLogger use the EMI are correctly.
different RS485 communications 4. Log in to the WebUI and ensure
parameter settings. that the EMI parameters are set
4. The EMI parameters are correctly.
incorrectly set.

6 The 1. The SmartLogger is not 1. Check that the Ethernet port of

SmartLogge connected to the PC, or the cable the SmartLogger is correctly
r cannot is loose or disconnected. connected to the PC or a router.
communicat 2. The parameters of the wired or 2. Check that the parameters of
e with the wireless network are incorrectly the wired or wireless network
managemen set. are set correctly.
t system.
3. The management system 3. Check that the management
parameters are incorrectly set. system parameters are correctly
set.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

No. Fault Cause Suggestion

7 The 1. The RS485 communications cable 1. Terminal block connection:

communicat is incorrectly connected, loose, or Check that the RS485
ion for disconnected. communications cable is
RS485 2. The SmartLogger is not powered connected to the correct port of
networking on. the terminal block.
failed. 2. RJ45 network port connection:
3. The RS485 communications
parameters are incorrectly set. Check that the RJ45 connector is
properly crimped and that each
wire is connected to the correct
pin.
3. Check that the RS485 ports of
other devices are connected to
the correct ports of the
SmartLogger.
4. Check the RS485 cable
connection. If the cable is loose,
disconnected, or reversely
connected, reconnect it firmly.
5. Power on the SmartLogger and
its connected device.
6. Check the RS485
communications parameter
settings.
7. Contact the dealer or Huawei
technical support.

8 The 4G 1. The SIM card is not inserted or it 1. Insert or replace the SIM card.
communicat is in arrears or damaged. 2. Tighten or replace the 4G
ion is 2. The 4G antenna is not tightened antenna.
abnormal. or is damaged. 3. Check that the management
3. The management system system parameters and wireless
parameters and wireless network network parameters are set
parameters are incorrectly set. correctly.
4. The SIM card registration failed. 4. Contact the SIM card carrier or
Huawei technical support.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 371

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

No. Fault Cause Suggestion

9 An EMI fails 1. A device with the same 1. Choose Maintenance > Device
to be added communications address has Mgmt. > Connect Device >
over the AI been connected to the MBUS Auto Assign Address or
port port. Maintenance > Device Mgmt. >
(another 2. Duplicate addresses are not Device List > Modify Device
device has allowed. Info to modify the
already communications address of the
been device with the same address
connected connected to the MBUS port,
to the port). and then add the EMI again.
2. Change the communications
address of the EMI and add it
again.

7.3 Alarm Reference

For details about alarms, see SmartLogger3000 Alarm Reference.

7.4 WebUI Maintenance Operations

7.4.1 Upgrading the Device Firmware Version

Context
You can upgrade the software of the SmartLogger, inverter, Smart PCS, Smart
String ESS, MBUS module, or PID module on the WebUI.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Software Upgrade. The Software Upgrade page is
displayed.
Step 2 Upload the software upgrade package and click Software Upgrade. Contact the
Company's engineers to obtain the software upgrade package.

Figure 7-1 Software upgrade

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

NOTE

● Before upgrading the PCS and inverter, ensure that the DC side is powered on.
● For SmartLogger V300R024C10 and later versions, the size of the file to be uploaded must
be less than 80 MB. Otherwise, the page will be abnormal.
● SmartLogger V300R023C10 and later versions support one-click upgrade of different types of
devices after the software package is uploaded.
● The Stop Upgrade function applies only to the devices waiting to be upgraded.
● If the active power control mode is set to Grid connection with limited power or Remote
communication scheduling, and the reactive power control mode is set to Power factor
closed-loop control or the working mode of Battery Control is enabled, you are advised to
upgrade software when inverters and Smart PCSs are disconnected from the grid. Otherwise,
power control may be abnormal or the upgrade may fail.

----End

7.4.2 Setting Security Parameters

Figure 7-2 Security settings

Parameter Description

Change Password Change the password for the current login user to log
in to the WebUI.

Automatic logout time After this parameter is set, a user is automatically

logged out if the user does not perform any operation
within the period specified by this parameter.

WebUI Security You are advised to use the existing network security
Certificate certificate and key.
If the browser displays the
"ERR_SSL_SERVER_CERT_BAD_FORMAT" error, use
another browser (such as Firefox) or replace the
certificate.

Update Key Specifies the key update interval.

User Lockout Set Detection period, Maximum login attempts, and

Lockout duration.

Certificate Alarm Time ● Test interval: specifies the interval for checking
whether a digital certificate is about to expire.
● Early-warning time: specifies the time when a
warning is generated before a digital certificate
expires.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Parameter Description

Module Security Load the network security certificate of the module.

Certificate If the private key file has a password, select Enable
key password and enter the key password obtained
from the certificate provider.

Communication Specifies whether to enable communication using an

Settings expired certificate.
If this parameter is set to Enable, the SmartLogger
can communicate with the SmartModule. After the
certificate expires, set this parameter to Disable to
prevent the SmartLogger from communicating with
the SmartModule to ensure network security.

South Equip Security Load the security certificate of southbound

Certificate equipment.
If the private key file has a password, select Enable
key password and enter the key password obtained
from the certificate provider.

WEB TLS Setting[1] Enables or disables the TLS 1.0 and 1.1 function.

Intrusion Detection If this parameter is set to Starting up, when intrusion

events such as abnormal user login and key file
tampering are detected, you can choose Query >
Security Events to query the exception records.

Service Management Starts or stops Modbus remote communication

networking.

Anti-rollback The default setting is Enable.

● Enable: Enable the anti-rollback function.
● Disable: Disable the anti-rollback function.
When this parameter is set to Disable, a dialog box
Disabling the anti-rollback function does not
restrict the rollback of the software version. The
rollback may cause historical problems. Are you
sure you want to continue? is displayed. If you click
Confirm, the submission continues. If you click
Cancel, the submission is canceled.

Note [1]: This parameter can be set only for V300R001C00 version.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 374

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

7.4.3 Sending a System Maintenance Command

Figure 7-3 System maintenance

Function Description

Restart System Resets the SmartLogger, which will automatically shut

down and restart.

Restore Factory ● Only accounts with the administrator permission

Settings (installer) can restore the factory settings.
● After the factory settings are restored, all
configured parameters (except the current date,
time, and communication parameters) are restored
to their factory default values. The running
information, alarm records, and system logs are
not changed. Exercise caution when deciding to
perform this operation.

Data Clearance Clears all historical data of the SmartLogger.

Full profile export Before replacing the SmartLogger, export the

SmartLogger configuration file to a local PC.

Full profile import After replacing the SmartLogger, import the local
configuration file to the new SmartLogger. After the
import is successful, the SmartLogger restarts for the
configuration file to take effect. Ensure that the
parameters on the Settings tab page and the
parameters for the built-in MBUS are correctly set.

Clear Cache You can clear the temporary files and upgrade
package files stored on the SmartLogger through
Clear Cache.

Clear User Data Clears user data and restarts the device. You need to
log in again after the restart.
CAUTION
Clearing user data will delete all data in the system. Exercise
caution when performing this operation.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

7.4.3.1 Exporting Full Configuration Files

Procedure
1. Choose Maintenance > System Maint. and click Export under Full profile
export.
NOTE

During the export of the full configuration files, you need to enter Password of the
current user and set Encryption password of the exported file in the Re-
authentication dialog box.

Figure 7-4 Exporting full configuration files

2. After the export is successful, click Confirm. Click Save under Full profile
export to save the full configuration files.

7.4.3.2 Importing Full Configuration Files

Procedure
1. Choose Maintenance > System Maint. and click Import under Full profile
import.
NOTE

During the import of the full configuration files, you need to enter Password of the
current user and Decryption password of the imported file in the Re-
authentication dialog box.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 376

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

NOTICE

● If Encryption password of the exported file has not been set for the
exported full configuration files, deselect Decryption password of the
imported file in the Re-authentication dialog box when importing the
files.
● If Encryption password of the exported file has been set for the exported
full configuration files, you need to set Decryption password of the
imported file in the Re-authentication dialog box when importing the
files.
● When a faulty SmartLogger3000 is replaced, certificate-related files are not
exported. After the full configuration files are imported, you need to reload
a third-party certificate if required.

Figure 7-5 Importing full configuration files

2. Click Choose File, select all exported files, and click Import.

7.4.4 Exporting Device Logs

Procedure
Step 1 Access the device log page.

Figure 7-6 Exporting logs

Step 2 Select the device whose logs are to be exported and click Export Log.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 377

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

NOTE

● Logs of two or more types of devices cannot be exported at a time. For example, you cannot
select both SUN2000 and MBUS.
● ESS log: Select an ESS and click Export Log. In the dialog box that is displayed, select
Battery logs. You can click the plus sign to select batteries.
● If the active power control mode is set to Grid connection with limited power or Remote
communication scheduling, and the reactive power control mode is set to Power factor
closed-loop control or the working mode of Battery Control is enabled, you are advised to
export logs when inverters and Smart PCSs are disconnected from the grid. Otherwise, power
control may be abnormal or the log export may fail.
● For an STS connected over RS485, only performance data can be exported, and device logs
cannot be exported.

Step 3 Observe the progress bar and wait until the log export is complete.
Step 4 For versions earlier than V300R023C10SPC200, when the export is successful, click
Log archiving to save the logs. In V300R023C10SPC200 or later, if the export is
successful, the file is automatically saved to the default download location of the
browser. You can specify a download location by changing the default one of the
browser.

----End

7.4.5 Starting an Onsite Test

Context
After an inverter is put into use, you need to periodically check its health to detect
potential risks and problems.

Procedure
Step 1 Start an onsite test.

Figure 7-7 Onsite test

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 378

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Tab Function Description

Inspection Check the health 1. If Single Inspection is selected, select the

status of the device to be inspected. If Batch
inverter. Inspection is selected, you do not need to
select a device.
2. Set Inspection type.
3. Click Start Inspection.
4. Observe the progress bar and wait until
the inspection is complete.
5. After the inspection is successful, click Log
archiving to download the inspection log.

Spot-check Start a spot-check. 1. Select the device to be spot-checked.

NOTE 2. Click Start Spot-Check.
The spot-check
function is available 3. Perform a spot-check test onsite.
only for a device 4. After the spot-check test is complete, click
whose grid code is Stop Spot-Check.
set to the Japanese
standard.

Alarm Test Simulates an 1. Choose Device model > Device name to

inverter alarm. select the device for which the alarm test
NOTE is to be performed.
Only the 2. Click an alarm name to deliver an alarm
SUN2000-63KTL-
command. The alarm icon is green by
JPH0,
SUN2000-50KTL/ default and turns red after the command
63KTL-JPM0, and is delivered.
SUN2000-125KTL- 3. Click Clear Alarm to clear all alarms of
JPH0 support the
the SUN2000-63KTL-JPH0,
alarm test function.
SUN2000-50KTL/63KTL-JPM0, and
SUN2000-125KTL-JPH0.
NOTE
After the alarm is cleared, the SmartLogger
collects alarm data again.

----End

7.4.6 License Management

Context
● The Smart I-V Curve Diagnosis, smart string monitoring, and Smart Tracker
Control Algorithm (SDS), and smart grid forming features – microgrid and on-
grid can be used only after licenses are purchased.
● The license files for Smart I-V Curve Diagnosis and smart string monitoring
are stored in the inverter. The license files for SDS and smart grid forming
features – microgrid and on-grid are stored in the SmartLogger. Each license
uniquely matches a device SN.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 379

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

● License management allows you to view the inverter license information and
obtain the current license status. Before a device is replaced, the current
device license needs to be revoked so that a revocation code can be generated
and used for applying for a new device license.
● The size of the license file imported to the SmartLogger must be less than 1
MB. Otherwise, the page will be abnormal.
● For versions earlier than SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC160, you need to
purchase a license to use the smart reactive power compensation. The license
file is stored in the SmartLogger. For SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC160 or
later versions, the smart reactive power compensation can be used directly.
● In SmartLogger V300R023C10 and later versions, the LUNA2000-200KTL-H1
supports the off-grid function. The function can be used only after a license is
purchased.
● The smart grid forming features - microgrid and on-grid are applicable to
SmartLogger V300R024C10 and later versions.

Procedure
Step 1 Access the License Management page.

Figure 7-8 License management

Tab Function Description

License Displays the 1. Select the name of the device whose

information license license details are to be exported.
information. 2. Click Export Details.

License Exports the 1. Select the name of the device whose

application license license is to be applied.
application file. 2. Click Export License Appli File.
3. Purchase a license from Huawei and
obtain the license file from Huawei
technical support engineers

License loading Loads the 1. Click Upload License.

obtained license 2. Select the name of the device whose
to the license is to be loaded.
corresponding
device. 3. Click Load License.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Tab Function Description

License Revokes a license 1. Select the name of the device whose

revocation or exports the license is to be revoked.
revocation code 2. Click Revoke License.
file.
3. Click Export Revo Code File.

NOTE

When importing a license file, ensure that the file name extension is .dat or .zip.

----End

7.4.7 Managing the SmartModule

Context
When replacing the SmartModule, you need to manually remove the device on
the WebUI.

Procedure
1. Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > SmartModule.

2. Select the device to be removed and click to remove it.

NOTE

is used to change the secondary authentication password of the SmartModule.

7.4.8 Managing Users

Context
● After the SmartLogger is upgraded from V300R001C00, installer has the
administrator permission, and admin becomes an advance user.
● You can add, modify, and delete users after logging in as installer.

Procedure
Step 1 Add a user.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 381

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-9 Adding a user

Step 2 Modify a user.

Figure 7-10 Modifying a user

Step 3 Delete a user.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Figure 7-11 Deleting a user

----End

7.4.9 Collecting Performance Data

Context
You can re-collect performance data of the solar inverter, Smart PCS, CMU, and
ESU as well as daily, monthly, and yearly energy yields (also referred to as data re-
collection).

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Data Re-collection.
Step 2 Select the type of the data to be collected and set the collection period.
Step 3 Select the name of the device whose data is to be collected and click Collect
Data.
Step 4 Wait until all data is gathered. On the Monitoring page, query the collection
result.
----End

7.4.10 Adjusting the Total Energy Yield

● SmartLoggerV300R001C00:
a. Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Adjust total energy yield.
b. Set Adjust total energy yield(kWh), select the name of the device
whose total energy yield needs to be adjusted, and click Submit.
● Other versions:
a. Tap Monitoring and select the device whose total energy yield needs to
be adjusted.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 383

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

b. Choose Running Param > Electricity Revise, set Adjust total energy
yield and Adjusted total power supply from grid, and click Submit.

7.4.11 Force Start

This section does not apply to V300R001C00.

Context
● The force start function is mainly used in the scenario when the ESS needs to
be forcibly started and then charged because it has been overdischarged
before the initial deployment of the array. Before force start, ensure that the
array is shut down.
● During the force start operation, each Smart PCS charges the ESS at 50 kW
power. Ensure that the AC power meets the requirement. If the AC power is
restricted, you are advised to charge the ESS in batches and disconnect the
auxiliary power supply and power circuits of the devices that do not need to
be charged.
● To use the force start function, prepare an external power supply for the
system and set Working mode to PQ under Monitoring > PCS > Running
Param. > Feature Parameters.
● When you force start the ESS, the ESS functions are restricted because no
deployment operation is performed. In this case, the ESS supports only battery
charging and cannot be scheduled by the upper-layer controller.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Force Start and click Starting up. This
operation will interrupt ongoing services in the array. Exercise caution when
performing this operation.

Step 2 Start the insulation resistance detection procedure. If the detection is successful,
force start is initiated. Otherwise, force start fails. The overdischarge insulation
resistance function is supported only in SmartLogger V300R023C00SPC172 and
later versions and applies only to the C&I scenario.
NOTE

● The array-level force start operation lasts 180 minutes. The SmartLogger needs to
maintain the array-level force start state. The default status is idle. After a force start
task is started, the SmartLogger periodically collects the SOC value of each battery rack.
If the SOC value is lower than 50%, the SmartLogger remains in the Force starting...
state. If the SOC value of each battery rack exceeds 50% or the protection duration for
force start exceeds the upper limit, the SmartLogger restores the force start state to idle.
● You can stop a force start task. In this case, devices in the array stop force start and
return to the original status. If the system does not need to be started, shut down the
system.
● After an array-level force start task is started, if new devices are connected and cannot
be automatically started or some devices restart, the SmartLogger delivers a force start
command at an interval of 5 minutes to ensure that the devices can identify the force
start state.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

7.4.12 Device Replacement

Context
The device replacement function applies to the scenario where a faulty CMU is
replaced. The SmartLogger can automatically back up CMU parameters. If a CMU
is replaced, the SmartLogger allows you to automatically import the backup CMU
parameters to the new CMU. The function of CMU parameter backup is only
supported in SmartLogger V300R023C10 and later versions, which shall be
matched with the version of the ESS software.
● C&I scenario: LUNA2000B V100R023C00SPC120 and later versions.
● Utility-scale scenario: LUNA2000C V100R023C00SPC110 and later versions.
● SmartLogger V300R024C00 and SmartLogger V300R024C10 do not support
this function currently.

Procedure
1. Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Device Replacement. The device
replacement page is displayed.
2. After setting the parameters, click Submit.

Paramete Description
r

Operate Set Replace Device.

Type

Device Set CMU.

Type

SN of Old SN of the old CMU

Device

SN of New SN of the new CMU

Device

7.4.13 Communication Records

The SmartLogger supports the function of exporting communication records.
Set Choose port, Protocol Selection, and Record time. Click Start to start the
communication records. Click Export to stop and export communication records.

Parameter Description

Choose port Select the port of the communication records.

Protocol Selection Select the protocol type of the connected device.

IEC104 and ModbusTCP are supported.
NOTE
IEC 104 or Modbus TCP can be selected only when the port is
WAN, LAN, SFP1, or SFP2.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 385

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Parameter Description

Record time Set the duration of the communication records. The

duration range of the communication records is [5,
30] minutes.

7.4.14 SOC Balancing

The SOC balancing function applies only to the LUNA2000-200KWH-2H1,
LUNA2000-161KWH-2H1, LUNA2000-126KWH-2H1, and LUNA2000-97KWH-1H1
C&I ESSs.

Context
This function can be used to balance the SOCs of multiple battery packs in an ESS.
● In the off-grid scenario, PV power is used to charge the ESS to balance the
SOCs of multiple battery packs in the ESS.
● In the on/off-grid scenario, mains power is used to charge the ESS to balance
the SOCs of multiple battery packs in the ESS.

Table 7-1 Application scenarios

Application Condition
Scenario

Initial Check the SOCsa of multiple battery packs in the ESS. If

deployment SOCMAX – SOCMIN > 10%, the actual charge and discharge
energy and backup duration of the ESS will be affected. You
Replacing a
are advised to perform SOC balancing.
battery pack

The ESS has

been running
properly for
three to six
months.

Note a: Methods of checking the SOCs

● SmartLogger WebUI: Choose Monitoring > ESS > ESU > ESR > ESM >
Running Info.
● On the FusionSolar Smart PV Management System (SmartPVMS): Choose
Monitoring > ESS > Overview.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

NOTICE

During SOC balancing, the SmartLogger does not respond to northbound

scheduling commands or ESS control. After SOC balancing stops, the SmartLogger
automatically resumes response to northbound scheduling commands and ESS
control. Before starting SOC balancing, ensure that:
● In the off-grid scenario, the irradiance is appropriate and external loads have
been disconnected to prevent SOC balancing failure.
● In the on/off-grid scenario, the AC switch is turned on and the mains supply is
connected to prevent SOC balancing failure.
● In the case of planned power outages, you are advised to start SOC
balancing after the mains supply recovers.
● If the mains supply is disconnected during SOC balancing, the SOC
balancing will fail and the loads will be powered off. If the mains supply
fails to recover within a short period of time, you are advised to stop SOC
balancing.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > SOC Balancing and select the target ESS
for SOC balancing.

Parameter Description

SOC balancing Indicates the SOC balancing status.

status ● Unbalanced: SOC balancing is not performed for battery
packs.
● Balancing: SOC balancing is in process for battery packs.
● Balanced: SOC balancing is completed for battery packs.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 387

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

Step 2 Click Starting up. For details about the time required for SOC balancing, see
Table 7-2.
NOTE

● In the on-grid scenario, the Starting up and Stop buttons are grayed out.
● SOC balancing for one ESS requires a maximum of 48 hours. If SOC balancing is not
complete within 48 hours for one ESS, the balancing fails.
● In the off-grid scenario, SOC balancing is performed one by one for multiple ESSs. You
are advised to disconnect the loads and use PV power to charge the multiple ESSs until
their SOCs reach 90% before starting SOC balancing. If SOC balancing for an ESS fails,
SOC balancing for the other ESSs stops.
● In the on/off-grid scenario, SOC balancing is performed all at once for multiple ESSs. If
SOC balancing of an ESS fails, SOC balancing for the other ESSs is not affected.

Table 7-2 Estimated time (examples)

Scena PV-to-ESS ESS Model Initial SOC Estimated
rio Ratioa Time

Off- 1 LUNA2000-200KW 50% 1.5 hours/

gridb H-2H1 cabinet

1 LUNA2000-97KWH 50% 1 hour/cabinet

-1H1

1 LUNA2000-200KW 0% 3 hours/cabinet
H-2H1

1 LUNA2000-97KWH 0% 1.5 hours/

-1H1 cabinet

On/ / LUNA2000-200KW 50% 1.5 hours

Off- H-2H1
gridc
/ LUNA2000-97KWH 50% 1 hour
-1H1

/ LUNA2000-200KW 0% 3 hours
H-2H1

/ LUNA2000-97KWH 0% 1.5 hours

-1H1

Note a: If the irradiance is insufficient, the actual time required for SOC
balancing will exceed the estimated time.
Note b: Time for balancing multiple ESSs = Quantity of ESSs x Estimated time
for balancing one ESS.
Note c: Time for balancing multiple ESSs = Estimated time for balancing one
ESS.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

7.5 Device Replacement

7.5.1 Exporting Configuration Files from the SmartLogger

WebUI
Step 1 Before replacing the SmartLogger, export its configuration files to a local PC.
Perform operations by referring to 7.4.3.1 Exporting Full Configuration Files.

Step 2 Power off the SmartLogger, remove its cables, and label the cables.

Step 3 Install a new SmartLogger, reconnect the cables, and power on the SmartLogger.

Step 4 Log in to the WebUI and import the exported configuration files from the local PC
to the new SmartLogger. Perform operations by referring to 7.4.3.2 Importing Full
Configuration Files.

Step 5 After the import is successful, the SmartLogger restarts for the configuration files
to take effect. Ensure that the parameters on the settings tab page and the
parameters for the built-in MBUS are correctly set.

----End

7.5.2 Exporting Configuration Files from the SUN2000 App

NOTICE

Do not power off the SmartLogger3000 when exporting all configuration files.

Step 1 Before replacing the SmartLogger, export its configuration files to a USB flash
drive.
1. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port at the bottom of the
SmartLogger3000.
2. Run the SUN2000 app and select a connection mode. On the operation
screen, tap Manual connection, and select WLAN. The initial name of the
WLAN hotspot is Logger-SmartLogger SN. You can view the device SN on
the SmartLogger3000 label.
NOTE

Use the initial password Changeme of the WLAN hotspot for the first login and
change it immediately after login. To ensure account security, protect the password by
changing it periodically, and keep it secure. Your password might be stolen or cracked
if it is left unchanged for extended periods. If a password is lost, devices cannot be
accessed. In these cases, the Company shall not be liable for any loss caused to the
plant.
3. After connecting the WLAN, log in to the device and access the main menu
screen.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 389

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

NOTE

– When you log in to the device for the first time, set the login password. To ensure
account security, protect the password by changing it periodically, and keep it
secure. Your password might be stolen or cracked if it is left unchanged for
extended periods. If a password is lost, devices cannot be accessed. In these cases,
the Company shall not be liable for any loss caused to the plant.
– You will be locked out for 10 minutes after five consecutive failed password
attempts (the interval between two consecutive entries is less than 2 minutes).
4. Choose Maintenance > Export All Files, set Encryption password of the
exported file, and tap Confirm to export the configuration files.
5. After the export is complete, tap OK and remove the USB flash drive.

Step 2 Power off the SmartLogger, remove its cables, and label the cables.

Step 3 Install a new SmartLogger, reconnect the cables, and power on the SmartLogger.

Step 4 Run the SUN2000 app, log in to the new device, and import the configuration
files.
1. Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port at the bottom of the new
SmartLogger3000.
2. Start the SUN2000 app and log in to the new device. On the operation screen,
tap Manual connection, and select WLAN. The initial name of the WLAN
hotspot is Logger-SmartLogger SN. You can view the device SN on the
SmartLogger3000 label.
NOTE

Use the initial password Changeme of the WLAN hotspot for the first login and
change it immediately after login. To ensure account security, protect the password by
changing it periodically, and keep it secure. Your password might be stolen or cracked
if it is left unchanged for extended periods. If a password is lost, devices cannot be
accessed. In these cases, the Company shall not be liable for any loss caused to the
plant.
3. After connecting the WLAN, log in to the device and access the main menu
screen.
NOTE

– When you log in to the device for the first time, set the login password. To ensure
account security, protect the password by changing it periodically, and keep it
secure. Your password might be stolen or cracked if it is left unchanged for
extended periods. If a password is lost, devices cannot be accessed. In these cases,
the Company shall not be liable for any loss caused to the plant.
– You will be locked out for 10 minutes after five consecutive failed password
attempts (the interval between two consecutive entries is less than 2 minutes).
4. Choose Maintenance > Import All Files, enter Decryption password of the
imported file, and tap Confirm to import the configuration files.
5. After the import is complete, tap OK and remove the USB flash drive.

Step 5 After the import is successful, the SmartLogger restarts for the configuration files
to take effect. Ensure that the parameters on the settings tab page and the
parameters for the built-in MBUS are correctly set.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 390

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 7 Device Maintenance

7.6 Device Disposal

If the service life of the SmartLogger expires, dispose of the SmartLogger
according to the local disposal act for waste electric appliances.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

8 FAQ

8.1 How Do I Connect the SmartLogger to the

SUN2000 App or FusionSolar App?
Prerequisites
● The SmartLogger has been powered on.
● The WLAN function has been enabled on the SmartLogger.
NOTE

● By default, WLAN is set to OFF in idle state.

● When WLAN is set to OFF in idle state, the WLAN function is available within 4
hours after the SmartLogger is powered on. In other cases, hold down the RST
button (for 1s to 3s) to enable the WLAN function.
● If WLAN is set to Always OFF, choose Settings > Wireless Network on the
SmartLogger WebUI and set WLAN to Always ON or OFF in idle state.
● The FusionSolar app is recommended when the SmartLogger is connected to
the FusionSolar SmartPVMS. The SUN2000 app is recommended when the
SmartLogger is connected to other management systems.
● The SUN2000 app or FusionSolar app has been installed on the mobile phone.

Context
● The SUN2000 app or FusionSolar app communicates with the SmartLogger
through the WLAN to provide functions such as alarm query, parameter
settings, and routine maintenance.
● Mobile phone operating system: Android 4.0 or later
● Access Huawei AppGallery, search for SUN2000 or FusionSolar, and
download the app.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 392

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-1 WLAN connection range

Procedure
Step 1 Log in to the app.
1. (Connecting the SmartLogger to the FusionSolar SmartPVMS) Open the
FusionSolar app, log in to intl.fusionsolar.huawei.com as installer account, and
choose Me > Device commissioning to connect to the WLAN hotspot of the
SmartLogger.
2. (Connecting the SmartLogger to Other Management Systems) Open the
SUN2000 app and connect to the WLAN hotspot of the SmartLogger.
3. Select installer and enter the login password.
4. Tap Log in and go to the Quick settings screen or SmartLogger screen
NOTE

● The screenshots in this document correspond to the FusionSolar app version 6.22.10.118
(Android) and SUN2000 app version 6.22.10.117 (Android).
● The initial WLAN hotspot name of the SmartLogger is Logger_SN and the initial
password is Changeme. The SN can be obtained from the SmartLogger label.
● The initial passwords of installer and user are both 00000a for the SUN2000 app and
FusionSolar app device commissioning.
● Use the initial password upon first power-on and change it immediately after login. To
ensure account security, change the password periodically and keep the new password
in mind. Not changing the initial password may cause password disclosure. A password
left unchanged for a long period of time may be stolen or cracked. If a password is lost,
the device cannot be accessed. In these cases, the user is liable for any loss caused to
the PV plant.
● If the SmartLogger is powered on for the first time or the factory defaults are restored
and parameter configuration is not performed on the WebUI, the Quick settings screen
is displayed after you log in to the app. You can set parameters based on site
requirements.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-2 Logging in to the app

----End

8.2 How Do I Set FTP Parameters?

Context
● The FTP function is used to access a third-party NMS. The SmartLogger can
report the configuration information and running data of the managed PV
plant system through FTP. A third-party NMS can access Huawei devices after
being configured.
● FTP is a universal standard protocol without any security authentication
mechanism. Data transmitted by FTP is not encrypted. To reduce network
security risks, the IP address of the connected third-party FTP server is left
blank by default. This protocol can transmit the running data of PV plants,
which may cause user data breach. Therefore, exercise caution when using
this protocol. Users are liable for any loss caused by the enabling of the FTP
protocol (non-secure protocol). Users are advised to take measures at the PV
plant level to reduce security risks, or use Huawei management system to
mitigate the risks.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Settings > Comm. Param. > FTP, set FTP parameters, and click Submit.

Parameter Description

FTP server Set this parameter to the domain name or IP address

of the FTP server.

User name Set this parameter to the user name for logging in to
the FTP server.

Password Set this parameter to the password for logging in to

the FTP server.

Remote directory After you set this parameter, a subdirectory of the

same name is created in the default data upload
directory (specified by the FTP server).

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 394

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Parameter Description

Data reporting Specifies whether data can be reported.

File format Format 1, Format 2, Format 3, and Format 4 are

supported.
NOTE
Format 2 has two more information points than Format 1:
E-Day (current-day energy yield) and E-Total (total energy
yield). Format 3 has more information points than Format 1
and Format 2: power meter, PID module, user-defined
device, and SmartLogger data. Format 4 has more
information points than Format 3: active and reactive power
of power meters.

File name Set this parameter to the format of the file name.

Time format Set this parameter to the time format.

Reporting mode The value can be Cyclic or Fixed time.

● Cyclic: Periodically reports data. Reporting
interval specifies the interval for reporting data.
File mode specifies whether all data or only the
incremental data of a day is reported each time.
● Fixed time: Reports data at a specified time. Fixed
time specifies the time for reporting data.

NOTE

You can click Start report test to check whether the SmartLogger can report data to the FTP
server.

----End

Troubleshooting

NOTICE

If the error code is not listed in the following table, provide SmartLogger run logs
and contact Huawei technical support.

Error Code Troubleshooting Suggestion Error Code Troubleshooting Suggestion

0x1002 Configure the FTP server 0x1003 1. Check whether the DNS
address. server address is correctly
configured.
2. Check whether the domain
name of the third-party FTP
server is correctly
configured.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Error Code Troubleshooting Suggestion Error Code Troubleshooting Suggestion

0x1004 Configure the user name of 0x1005 Configure the user name of the
the FTP account. FTP account.

0x3001 1. Check whether the FTP 0x3002 1. Check whether the user
server address is correctly name of the FTP account is
configured. correctly configured.
2. Check whether the third- 2. Check whether the password
party FTP server is working of the FTP account is
properly. correctly configured.

0x3007 Check whether the third-party 0x3008 Ensure that the SmartLogger
FTP server allows the client to data upload directory exists on
upload data. the third-party FTP server.

Other Codes Provide SmartLogger run logs - -

and contact Huawei technical
support.

8.3 How Do I Set Email Parameters?

Context
● The SmartLogger can send emails to inform users of the current energy yield,
alarms, and device status of the plant, helping users understand the operating
status of the plant in a timely manner.
● When using this function, ensure that the SmartLogger can connect to the
configured email server and the Ethernet parameters and email parameters
are correctly set for the SmartLogger.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Settings > Comm. Param. > Email, set Email parameters, and click
Submit.

Parameter Description

SMTP server Set this parameter to the domain name or IP address

of the SMTP server.

Encryption mode Set this parameter to the email encryption mode.

SMTP port Set this parameter to the email sending port.

Weak cipher suite -

User Name Set this parameter to the user name for logging in to
the SMTP server.

Password Set this parameter to the password for logging in to

the SMTP server.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 396

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Parameter Description

Email language Set this parameter to the language for sending emails.

Send address Set this parameter to the email address for sending
emails.

Receive address N Set this parameter to the email address for receiving
NOTE emails.
N is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

Energy yield Specifies whether to send energy yield data by email

and the time for sending emails.

Alarms Specifies whether to send alarms by email and the

severity of the alarms to be sent.

NOTE

You can click Send test mail to check whether the SmartLogger can successfully send emails to
users.

----End

Troubleshooting

NOTICE

If the error code is not listed in the following table, provide SmartLogger run logs
and contact Huawei technical support.

Error Code Suggestion Error Code Suggestion

0x2002 1. Check whether the IP 0x2003 1. Try again later.

address of the DNS server 2. Check whether the domain
is correct. name and the IP address of
2. Check whether the domain the SMTP server are correct.
name and the IP address of
the SMTP server are
correct.
3. Check whether the network
communication between
the management system
and the DNS server is
normal.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 397

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Error Code Suggestion Error Code Suggestion

0x200b 1. Check whether the DNS 0x4016 1. Try again later.

server address is correct. 2. Check whether the DNS
2. Check whether the domain server address is correctly
name and the IP address of configured.
the SMTP server are 3. Check whether the domain
correct. name and the IP address of
the SMTP server are correct.

0x406e Confirm the encryption mode 0x8217 1. Check whether the user
and port supported by the name and password are
email box, and check whether correct.
they are correct. 2. Log in to the email box of
the email sender and start
the SMTP service.
3. Log in to the email box of
the email sender and start
the third-party client license
code function.

0xa003 Check whether the domain 0xa005 Enter the user name correctly.
name and the IP address of
the SMTP server are correct.

0xa006 Enter the password correctly. 0xe002 Configure the domain name
and the IP address of the SMTP
server correctly.

0xe003 Configure the addresses for Others Please provide SmartLogger

sending and receiving emails running logs and contact
correctly. Huawei Service Center.

8.4 How Do I Change the SSID and Password of the

Built-in WLAN?
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Settings > Wireless Network, set parameters for the built-in WLAN, and
click Submit.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 398

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Parameter Description

WLAN Specifies the status of the built-in WLAN.

● Always ON: The WLAN module is powered on.
● OFF in idle state: The WLAN module is
automatically powered off when idle. You can hold
down the RST button for 1s to 3s to power on the
WLAN module and wait for connecting to the
SUN2000 app. If the SUN2000 app is not
connected, the WLAN module is automatically
powered off after it is powered on for 4 hours.
● Always OFF: The WLAN module is not powered on
and cannot be powered on by holding down the
button.

SSID ● Specifies the name of the built-in WLAN.

● The default name of the built-in WLAN is
Logger_SN.

Password ● Specifies the password for accessing the built-in

WLAN.
● The initial password of the built-in WLAN is
Changeme.
● Use the initial password upon first power-on and
change it immediately after login. To ensure
account security, change the password periodically
and keep the new password in mind. Not changing
the initial password may cause password disclosure.
A password left unchanged for a long period of
time may be stolen or cracked. If a password is
lost, the device needs to be restored to factory
settings. In these cases, the user is liable for any
loss caused to the PV plant.

----End

8.5 How Do I Use DI Ports?

● The SmartLogger provides four DI ports, which support DI active scheduling,
DI reactive scheduling, DRM, remote shutdown, and input of correlated
alarms.
● For details about DI active scheduling, DI reactive scheduling, DRM, and
remote shutdown, see 6.8 Power Grid Scheduling.

NOTICE

Before setting the corresponding function, ensure that the DI port is not set for
other purposes. Otherwise, the setting will fail.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Alarm Input
When a valid level is delivered into a DI port, an alarm is raised. You can set the
alarm name and severity.

Step 1 Choose Settings > DI and associate alarms with DI ports.

Parameter Description

Activation Status If this parameter is set to Activated for a DI port, you

can set the function of the DI port. Otherwise, you
cannot set the function of the DI port.

Dry Contact Status Specifies the valid input status of a DI port.

Alarm Generation Specifies whether to allow alarm generation.

Alarm Severity Specifies the alarm severity.

Trigger Shutdown Specifies whether to deliver a solar inverter remote

shutdown command.

Trigger Startup Specifies whether to deliver a solar inverter remote

startup command.

Alarm Name Specifies the alarm name.

Startup Delay Specifies the delay time for the automatic startup of
the solar inverter after Trigger Startup is set to
Enable.

----End

8.6 How Do I Use DO Ports?

The SmartLogger provides two DO ports, which support the reset of external
routers, audible and visual alarming for grounding faults, and output of correlated
alarms.

NOTICE

Before setting the corresponding function, ensure that the DO port is not set for
other purposes. Otherwise, the setting will fail.

Resetting an External Router

Connect one DC power cable of the 3G router to a DO port on the SmartLogger,
and power on or off the wireless module by connecting or disconnecting the DO
dry contact to control the reset of the 3G router.

Step 1 Cut off a DC power cable of the router, and connect the DC power cable to a DO
port on the SmartLogger.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 400

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Figure 8-3 Connecting to a DO port

Step 2 Choose Settings > Other parameters and set Reset the external router to the
DO port.

----End

Audible and Visual Alarm for Grounding Fault

Connect one DC power cable of the audible and visual alarm to a DO port on the
SmartLogger, and power on or off the audible and visual alarm by connecting or
disconnecting the DO dry contact to implement audible and visual alarming for
grounding faults.

Step 1 Connect one DC power cable of the audible and visual alarm to the DO port
(COM/NO) on the SmartLogger.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Alarm Output and associate Low Insulation Resistance with
the DO port.

----End

Alarm Output
After a solar inverter alarm is associated with a DO port, the alarm signal is
delivered from the DO port when the solar inverter raises the alarm.

Step 1 Choose Settings > Alarm Output and associate solar inverter alarms with the DO
port.
NOTE

If the SmartLogger is restarted or powered off after the function is enabled, the DO port status
may change and the alarm output may be abnormal.

----End

8.7 How Do I Use the USB Port?

The SmartLogger has a USB port, which provides 5 V/1 A power supply.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 401

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

● The USB port can connect to a 3G router to supply power to the router, and
the power supply of the USB port is disconnected when communication is
disconnected, implementing 3G router reset control.

NOTICE

If the maximum operating current of the 3G router is greater than 1 A, it

cannot be connected through the USB port.

● The USB port can connect to a USB flash drive for local maintenance, device
log export, and device upgrade.
NOTE

It is recommended that you use a SanDisk, Netac, or Kingston USB flash drive to ensure
compatibility.

Connecting to a 3G Router
If the DC power cable of the 3G router has a standard USB connector with the
maximum operating current of less than 1 A, it can be directly connected to the
USB port on the SmartLogger.

Step 1 Connect the USB connector of the DC power cable for the 3G router to the USB
port on the SmartLogger.
Step 2 If you need to use the reset function of the external router, choose Settings >
Other Parameters and set Reset the external router to USB.

----End

Connecting to a USB Flash Drive for Local Maintenance

Step 1 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port at the bottom of the SmartLogger.
Step 2 Log in to the app as installer, choose More > System Maintenance on the
SmartLogger screen, and perform the local maintenance.
Local Maintenance Description Prerequisites

Offline Configuration After the power plant The power plant

deployment deployment
configuration file is configuration file has
imported through been saved in the root
Offline Configuration, directory of the USB
the SmartLogger flash drive.
automatically completes
the deployment
configuration.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 402

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Local Maintenance Description Prerequisites

Exporting All Files Before replacing the -

SmartLogger, export the
SmartLogger
configuration file to a
local PC.

Importing All Files After replacing the All exported files have
SmartLogger, import the been saved in the root
local configuration file to directory of the USB
the new SmartLogger. flash drive.
After the import is
successful, the
SmartLogger restarts for
the configuration file to
take effect. Ensure that
the parameters on the
Settings tab page and
the parameters for the
built-in MBUS are
correctly set.

Step 3 After the local maintenance is complete, remove the USB flash drive.

NOTICE

After files are imported, the SmartLogger automatically restarts.

----End

Connecting to a USB Flash Drive to Export Device Logs

Step 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port on the SmartLogger.

Step 2 Log in to the app as installer, choose More > Device Logs, select the device
whose logs you want to export, and tap Next.

Step 3 Select the types of logs to be exported and tap Confirm to start exporting device
logs.

Step 4 After the logs are exported, remove the USB flash drive.

----End

Connecting to a USB Flash Drive for Device Upgrade

You can upgrade the SmartLogger, solar inverter, MBUS module, or PID module
using a USB flash drive.

Step 1 Save the device upgrade package to the USB flash drive.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 403

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

NOTE

Do not decompress the upgrade package.

Step 2 Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port on the SmartLogger.
Step 3 Log in to the app as installer, choose More > Upgrade, select a single device or
multiple devices of the same type, and tap Next.
Step 4 Select the upgrade package and tap Next.
Step 5 Confirm the upgrade package and the device to be upgraded, and tap Finish to
start upgrading the device.
NOTE

After the upgrade is complete, the device automatically restarts.

Step 6 After the upgrade is complete, remove the USB flash drive.

----End

8.8 How Do I Change a Device Name?

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Device List.
Step 2 Modify the device name based on the actual situation, select the modified entry,
and click Modify Device Info.
NOTE

You can also export device information to a .csv file, modify the file, and import the modified
file to modify device information.

----End

8.9 How Do I Change the Communications Address?

The SmartLogger allows you to change the communications addresses of Huawei
devices on the Connect Device or Device List page.

Changing the Communications Address on the Connect Device Page

Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Connect Device.
Step 2 Click Auto Assign Address, set the start address for assignment, and confirm the
address assignment.
Step 3 Confirm the address adjustment, adjust the device address as required, and click
Address Adjustment.
Step 4 Confirm to search for the device again.
Step 5 After the search is complete, click Close.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Changing the Communications Address on the Device List Page

Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Device List.

Step 2 Change the device communications address and device name based on the site
requirements, select the modified entries, and click Modify Device Info.

Step 3 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Connect Device and click Auto. Search.

Step 4 After the search is complete, click Close.

----End

8.10 How Do I Export Inverter Parameters?

Context
You can export configuration parameters of multiple solar inverters to a .csv file.
Site engineers can then check whether the solar inverter configurations are correct
in the exported file.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt > Export Param.

Step 2 Select the name of the device whose parameters are to be exported, and click
Export.

Step 3 Observe the progress bar and wait until the export is complete.

Step 4 After the export is successful, click Log archiving to save the file.

----End

8.11 How Do I Clear Alarms?

Context
You can clear all active and historical alarms for the selected device and re-collect
alarm data.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Maintenance > Device Mgmt. > Clear Alarm.

Step 2 Select the name of the device whose alarms are to be cleared, click Submit, and
choose All, Locally synchronized alarms, or Alarms stored on devices to clear
alarms.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 405

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

NOTE

If alarms are cleared for the SmartLogger, you must reset alarms on the management system.
Otherwise, the management system cannot obtain the alarm information collected by the
SmartLogger after the alarms are cleared.

----End

8.12 How Do I Enable the AI1 Port to Detect SPD

Alarms?
Context
In the smart array controller application scenario, the AI1 port on the SmartLogger
can be connected to the SPD alarm output to raise an alarm when the SPD is
faulty.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose Settings > Other Parameters and set AI1 SPD detection alarm to
Enable.

----End

8.13 Which Models of Power Meters and EMIs Are

Supported by the SmartLogger?
Table 8-1 Supported power meters

Vendor Model Export Limitation

ABB A44 -

Acrel PZ96L Supported

Algodue UPM209 Supported

NOTE
When the power meter connects to the
SmartLogger, an external 120-ohm
resistor needs to be connected to the
RS485 bus of the power meter. For details,
see the user manual of the power meter.

- BackUp-CT Supported

CHNT DTSU666 -

- DTSU666-H Supported

- DTSU666-HW Supported

- DDSU666-H Supported

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 406

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Vendor Model Export Limitation

Elster A1800ALPHA -

GAVAZZI EM210 -

Janitza UMG103-CBM Supported

Janitza UMG104 -

Janitza UMG604 Supported

Janitza UMG96-S2 -

Lead LD-C83 -

MingHua CRDM-830 -

Mitsubishi EMU4-BD1-MB Supported

NOTE
● Not applicable to single-phase power
scenarios.
● When the power meter connects to
the SmartLogger, an external 120-ohm
resistor needs to be connected to the
RS485 bus of the power meter. For
details, see the user manual of the
power meter.

Mitsubishi M8FM-N3LTR -

Mitsubishi ME110NSR-MB -

Mitsubishi ME110SR-MB -

Mitsubishi ME110SSR-MB -

Mitsubishi ME110SSR-4APH -

NARUN PD510 -

NetBiter CEWE -

People RM858E -

REAL ENERGY PRISMA-310A -

SYSTEM

Rishabh LM1360 Supported

Schneider PM1200 -

Schneider PM2xxx -

Schneider PM5100 -

Schneider PM5300 -

SFERE PD194Z -

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Vendor Model Export Limitation

Socomec COUNTIS E43 Supported

NOTE
● Not applicable to single-phase power
scenarios.
● When the power meter connects to
the SmartLogger, an external 120-ohm
resistor needs to be connected to the
RS485 bus of the power meter. For
details, see the user manual of the
power meter.

Toshiba S2MS -

Wave Energy PWM-72 -

WEG MMW03-M22CH Supported

YADA YDS60-80 Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to three-phase power
scenarios.

YADA YDS70-C16 Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to single-phase power
scenarios.

YADA YDS60-C24 Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to three-phase power
scenarios.

Linyang DDSU71 Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to single-phase power
scenarios.

Linyang DTSU71 Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to three-phase power
scenarios.

Wisdom DDSU1079-CT Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to single-phase power
scenarios.

Wisdom DHSU1079-CT Supported

NOTE
Applicable only to three-phase power
scenarios.

Wisdom DHSU1079-ZT Supported

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 408

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Table 8-2 Supported EMIs

Vendor Model EMI Information

ABB VSN800-12 Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, and PV
module temperature

VSN800-14 Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Gill MetPak Pro Gill MetPak Pro Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Hukseflux SRx Hukseflux SRx Total irradiance and

ambient temperature

Ingenieurbüro Si- Ingenieurbüro Si- Total irradiance, ambient

RS485TC RS485TC temperature, PV module
temperature, and wind
speed

Kipp&Zonen SMPx series Total irradiance and

ambient temperature

Lufft WSx-UMB Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

WSx-UMB(external Total irradiance, ambient

sensors) temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Meier-NT ADL-SR Meier-NT ADL-SR Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, and wind
speed

MeteoControl SR20-D2 Total irradiance and

ambient temperature

RainWise PVmet-150 Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, and PV
module temperature

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 409

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Vendor Model EMI Information

PVmet-200 Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Soluzione Solare SunMeter Total irradiance and

ambient temperature

Jinzhou Licheng Jinzhou Licheng Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Jinzhou Solargiga PC-4 Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Handan RYQ-3 Total irradiance, ambient

temperature, PV module
temperature, wind
direction, and wind
speed

Sensor ADAM - -
NOTE
The sensor-type EMI
(current-type or voltage-
type) communicates with
the SmartLogger through
the ADAM analog-to-
digital converter.

8.14 How Do I Check the SIM Card Status?

Choose Over View > Mobile Data to view the SIM card status.

Table 8-3 SIM card status

Parameter Status Description

4G module Card absent No SIM card is detected. Insert a SIM card.

status

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 410

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Parameter Status Description

Failed to 1. Check whether the SIM card account is in

register the arrears. If yes, top up the account.
card. 2. Check whether the network quality is
poor. If yes, use a SIM card of another
carrier with good signal quality.
3. Check whether the SIM card has been
bound to another device. If yes, unbind
the SIM card from the device or replace
the SIM card.

● Not The SmartLogger is trying to set up a dial-up

connected connection. Wait for the connection to be set
● The card is up.
in position.

Connected The dial-up connection is set up successfully.

Enter the PIN. The SIM card has been set to require a
personal identification number (PIN).
Contact the carrier of the SIM card for the
PIN, choose Settings > Wireless Network,
and enter the correct PIN.

Enter the PUK. If the number of incorrect PIN attempts

exceeds the upper limit, you need to enter
the PIN unblocking key (PUK). Contact the
carrier of the SIM card for the PUK. Choose
Settings > Wireless Network and enter the
correct PUK.

Traffic status Normal The used traffic does not exceed the monthly
traffic package, and the remaining traffic is
sufficient.

Warning The used traffic exceeds 80% of the monthly

traffic package, and the remaining traffic is
insufficient.

Used up The used traffic exceeds the monthly traffic

package. Traffic is used up. Top up the SIM
card account immediately.

No package Choose Settings > Wireless Network and

configured configure a monthly traffic package.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.15 How Do I Use Mobile Network Sharing?

Remotely Accessing the WebUI over a Mobile Network
NOTE

A 4G SmartLogger supports remote access to the SmartLogger WebUI over the built-in 4G
wireless communication.

Step 1 Insert a SIM card with a fixed IP address into the SIM card slot of the SmartLogger.
Choose Over View > Mobile Data to check the SIM card status and ensure that
the 4G wireless communication is normal.

Step 2 Choose Settings > Other Parameters and set Mobile network sharing to
Enable.

NOTICE

● After this function is enabled, the SmartLogger is directly exposed to the public
network and is vulnerable to network attacks.
● Data that is actively sent through email and FTP is preferentially transmitted
through 4G wireless communication. If the function of actively sending data
through email and FTP is used, ensure that the corresponding destination
server can be connected through 4G wireless communication.

Figure 8-4 Other parameters

Step 3 Open a web browser, enter https://XX.XX.XX.XX (XX.XX.XX.XX is the fixed IP

address of the SIM card) in the address box, and press Enter. The login page is
displayed.

----End

Sharing a Mobile Network with Other Devices

NOTE

A 4G SmartLogger supports the sharing of the built-in 4G network with other devices for
Internet access.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 412

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

Step 1 Connect the network cable of another device to the WAN port of the SmartLogger.
Step 2 Choose Settings > Other Parameters and set Mobile network sharing to
Enable.

NOTICE

● After this function is enabled, the SmartLogger is directly exposed to the public
network and is vulnerable to network attacks.
● Data that is actively sent through email and FTP is preferentially transmitted
through 4G wireless communication. If the function of actively sending data
through email and FTP is used, ensure that the corresponding destination
server can be connected through 4G wireless communication.

Figure 8-5 Other parameters

Step 3 Choose Settings > Comm. Param. > Wired Network and set network parameters
for other devices.
1. IP address of the device connected to the shared network: The IP address
must be in the same network segment as that of the SmartLogger and does
not conflict with other devices.
2. Subnet mask of the device connected to the shared network: Set it to the
subnet mask of the SmartLogger.
3. Gateway of the device connected to the shared network: Set it to the IP
address of the SmartLogger.
4. Third-party server IP address: IP address of the third-party server that can be
accessed through the 4G network. You need to set the IP address of the third-
party server so that other devices that share the built-in 4G network can
connect to the third-party server.

NOTE

To query the network parameters of the SmartLogger, choose Settings > Comm. Param. >
Wired Network.

----End

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 413

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.16 WebUI Allows Login Only in Chinese or Prompts

to Switch to Chinese After Login
If the WebUI uses a language other than Chinese and the SmartLogger detects
that an inverter sold only in Chinese Mainland is connected, a message is
displayed indicating that the WebUI allows login only in Chinese or prompting to
switch to Chinese after login.

Figure 8-6 WebUI allows login only in Chinese

Figure 8-7 WebUI prompts to switch to Chinese

8.17 How Do I Identify the Meter Wiring Direction on

the SmartLogger?
● Correct wiring: When the plant feeds electricity to the grid, the active power
of the meter is a negative value. When the plant draws electricity from the
grid, the active power of the meter is a positive value.
● Reverse wiring: When the plant feeds electricity to the grid, the active power
of the meter is a positive value. When the plant draws electricity from the
grid, the active power of the meter is a negative value. Negative wiring may
occur.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 8 FAQ

8.18 Resetting Password

Role Description

Adminis If you hold down the RST button for 10s to 20s, the SmartLogger
trator enters the safe mode. In this case, the device configuration
parameters are retained, but personal privacy and sensitive data,
including the login password and email address, are cleared.

Non- The password of a non-administrator account must be reset using the

adminis administrator account. The administrator resets the password and
trator enters the initial password. The user logs in to the system using the
initial password provided by the administrator. After the login, the
user is forced to change the password.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 415

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

9 Technical Specifications

9.1 Technical Specifications of the SmartLogger

Device Management
Parameter Specifications

Number of solar inverters ● SmartLogger3000A: can connect to a

maximum of 80 solar inverters.
● SmartLogger3000B: can connect to a
maximum of 150 solar inverters.

Communications mode RS485, ETH, MBUS (optional), 4G

(optional), and SFP (optional)

Maximum communication ● RS485: 1000 m

distance ● ETH: 100 m
● MBUS (multi-core cable): 1000 m;
MBUS (single-core cable): 400 m (The
three-phase cables must be bound at 1
m intervals)

● Optical fiber (single-mode, 1310 nm

optical module): 10,000 m (with the
1000M optical module); 12,000 m (with
the 100M optical module)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

Common Specifications
Parameter Specifications

Power adapter ● AC input: 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz

● DC output: 12 V, 2 A

DC power supply 24 V, 0.8 A

Power consumption ● SmartLogger3000A: 8 W (typical)

● SmartLogger3000B: 9 W (typical)
● SmartLogger3000B +
SmartModule1000A: 10 W (typical)
● 15 W (maximum)

Dimensions (W x H x D) ● 259 mm x 160 mm x 59 mm (including

mounting ears)
● 225 mm x 160 mm x 44 mm (excluding
mounting ears)

Net weight 2 kg

Operating temperature –40°C to +60°C

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH

IP rating IP20

Installation mode Installed on a wall or guide rail

Highest operating altitude 4000 m

Pollution degree 2

Corrosion level Class B

Ports
Parameter Specifications

Ethernet electrical port (WAN and

2 PCS; 10M/100M/1000M auto-sensing
LAN)

Ethernet optical port (SFP) 2 PCS; supports 100M/1000M SFP/eSFP

optical modules

MBUS port 1 PCS; supports a maximum AC input

voltage of 800 V

RS485 (COM) port 3 PCS; supported baud rates: 1200 bit/s,

2400 bit/s, 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19,200
bit/s, and 115,200 bit/s

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 417

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

Parameter Specifications

USB USB2.0

Output power port One port; DC output: 12 V, 0.1 A

Digital input (DI) Four ports; passive dry contact signal

access

Digital output (DO) Two ports; relay dry contact outputs, with
NO or NC contacts; 12 V/0.5 A signal
voltage

Analog input (AI) Four ports; AI1: 0–10 V voltage (passive);

AI2–AI4: 4–20 mA or 0–20 mA input
current (passive)

4G antenna port (4G) One port; SMA-K (external screw inner

hole) port, used with an antenna that has
the SMA-J (internal screw inner pin) port

Wireless Communication
Parameter Specifications

4G/3G/2G The SmartLogger3000A01CN supports 2G,

3G, and 4G networks of China Mobile and
China Unicom as well as 4G networks of
China Telecom.
The following frequency bands are
supported:
● LTE FDD: B1, B3, B8
● LTE TDD: B38, B39, B40, B41
● WCDMA: B1, B5, B8, B9
● TD-SCDMA: B34, B39
● GSM: 900 MHz/1800 MHz

The SmartLogger3000A01EU and

SmartLogger3000A03EU support the
following frequency bands:
● LTE FDD: B1, B3, B7, B8, B20
● LTE TDD: B38, B40, B41
● WCDMA: B1, B5, B8
● GSM: 900 MHz/1800 MHz

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 418

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

Parameter Specifications

SmartLogger3000A01NH: Supports 3G/4G

of Docomo and SoftBank.
The following frequency bands are
supported:
● LTE FDD: B1, B3, B8, B18, B19, B26
(only Tokyo, Nagoya, and Osaka
support B3)
● LTE TDD: B41
● WCDMA: B1, B6, B8, B19

The SmartLogger3000A01KR supports

networks of SK Telecom.
The following frequency bands are
supported:
● LTE FDD: B1, B3, B5, B7
● WCDMA: B1

The SmartLogger3000A01AU supports the

following frequency bands:
● LTE FDD: B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B28
● LTE TDD: B40
● WCDMA: B1, B2, B5, B8
● GSM: 850 MHz/900 MHz/1800 MHz/
1900 MHz

WLAN (local maintenance using

2.4G
app)

RF Bands of the 4G Module (SmartLogger3000A01EU and

SmartLogger3000A03EU)
Frequency Band Tx Rx

WCDMA Band 1 1920–1980 MHz 2110–2170 MHz

WCDMA Band 5 824–849 MHz 869–894 MHz

WCDMA Band 8 880–915 MHz 925–960 MHz

GSM 900 880–915 MHz 925–960 MHz

GSM 1800 1710–1785 MHz 1805–1880 MHz

LTE Band 1 1920–1980 MHz 2110–2170 MHz

LTE Band 3 1710–1785 MHz 1805–1880 MHz

LTE Band 5 824–849 MHz 869–894 MHz

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 419

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

Frequency Band Tx Rx

LTE Band 7 2500–2570 MHz 2620–2690 MHz

LTE Band 8 880–915 MHz 925–960 MHz

LTE Band 20 832–862 MHz 791–821 MHz

LTE Band 38 2570–2620 MHz

LTE Band 40 2300–2400 MHz

LTE Band 41 2555–2655 MHz

Output Power of the 4G Module (SmartLogger3000A01EU and

SmartLogger3000A03EU)
Frequency Band Standard Value Remarks (Unit:
(Unit: dBm) dB)

GSM 900 GMSK (1Tx Slot) 33 ±2

8PSK (1Tx Slot) 27 ±3

GSM 1800 GMSK (1Tx Slot) 30 ±2

8PSK (1Tx Slot) 26 ±3

WCDMA Band 1 24 +1/–3

WCDMA Band 5 24 +1/–3

WCDMA Band 8 24 +1/–3

LTE Band 1 23 ±2

LTE Band 3 23 ±2

LTE Band 5 23 ±2

LTE Band 7 23 ±2

LTE Band 8 23 ±2

LTE Band 20 23 ±2

LTE Band 38 23 ±2

LTE Band 40 23 ±2

LTE Band 41 23 ±2

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

WLAN
Parameter Specifications

Frequency band 2.4 GHz: 2.4–2.4835 GHz

Gain 2.4 GHz: 2.85 dBi

Transmit power 2.4 GHz: 1 x 100 mW

Maximum throughput 2.4 GHz: 65 Mbit/s

Single/Dual band mode Single

MIMO 2.4 GHz frequency band: 1T1R

Maximum number of online users 6

Polarization mode Linear

Directivity Multi-dimensional

Protocol standard 802.11b/g/n

Bandwidth 20 MHz

Maximum transmit power ≤ 20 dBm EIRP

9.2 Technical Specifications of the SmartModule

Device Management
Item Specifications

Communications mode RS485, ETH

Maximum communication ● RS485:1000 m

distance ● ETH: 100 m

Common Specifications
Item Specifications

DC power supply ● DC 12 V: DC 2.0 power socket male

connector
● DC 24 V: cord end terminal

Power consumption Typical: 4 W; maximum: 5 W

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 421

SmartLogger3000
User Manual 9 Technical Specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions (H x W x D) ● Including mounting ears: 160 mm x 179

mm x 59 mm
● Without mounting ears: 160 mm x 125
mm x 44 mm

Net weight 1 kg

Operating temperature –40°C to +60°C

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Humidity 5%–95% RH

Ingress protection rating IP20

Installation mode Installed on a wall or guide rail

Maximum operating altitude 4000 m

Pollution level Level 2

Corrosion level Class B

Ports
Item Specifications

Ethernet electrical port (GE) Four 10M/100M/1000M auto-sensing

ports

RS485 port (COM) Three ports; supported baud rates: 1200

bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19,200
bps, 115,200 bps

Output power port One port; DC output: 12 V, 0.1 A

Digital input (DI) Four ports; passive dry contact signal

access

PT port (PT) Two ports; support the access of signals

from a 3-wire or 2-wire PT100/PT1000
temperature sensor

Analog input (AI) port Four ports; AI1: 0–10 V voltage (passive);
AI2–AI4: 4–20 mA or 0–20 mA input
current (passive)

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 422

SmartLogger3000
User Manual A Product User Lists

A Product User Lists

Table A-1 User list

Logi SmartLogger Version User Initial Password
n Name
Mod
e

App Factory version earlier Installer 00000a

than
V800R021C10SPC020 User 00000a

Upgraded to installer 00000a

V300R023C00 or later
user

Factory version installer None. You need to set a password

V300R023C00 or later upon the initial login.
user

WEB Factory version earlier admin Changeme

than V300R023C00

Upgraded to installer None. You need to set a password

V300R023C00 or later upon the initial login.

admin Changeme

Factory version installer None. You need to set a password

V300R023C00 or later upon the initial login.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423

SmartLogger3000
User Manual A Product User Lists

Table A-2 Second challenge authentication

Authentication User Name Initial Password
Mode

SmartLogger emscomm /EzFp+2%r6@IxSCv

authentication
by the
management
system

SmartModule SmoduleAdmin /EzFp+2%r6@IxSCv

authentication
by the
SmartLogger

Table A-3 Operating system user list

User Name Initial Password

enspire Changeme

root Changeme

prorunacc No initial password

bin No initial password

daemon No initial password

nobody No initial password

sshd No initial password

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 424

SmartLogger3000
User Manual B Domain Name List of Management Systems

B Domain Name List of Management

Systems

NOTE

The list is subject to change.

Table B-1 Domain names of management systems

Domain Name Data Type Scenario

intl.fusionsolar.huawei.co Public IP address FusionSolar SmartPVMS

m NOTE
The domain name is
compatible with
cn.fusionsolar.huawei.com
(Chinese mainland).

neteco.alsoenergy.com Public IP address Partner management

system

re-ene.kyuden.co.jp Public IP address Remote output control

server of Kyushu Electric
Power Company

re-ene.yonden.co.jp Public IP address Remote output control

server of Shikoku Electric
Power Company

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 425

SmartLogger3000
User Manual C Port No. List

C Port No. List

Table C-1 Port No.

Type of Connected Management Open Port No. of Remarks
Access System Router (Firewall)
Management Setting Port
No.

NetEco 16100 16100, 2121, 11000– ● 16100: used to query and set
11500 data between the
SmartLogger and the
management system.
● 2121 and 11000–11500: used
to upload and download data
or files between the
SmartLogger and the
management system using
FTPS.

FusionSolar 16100 16100, 2121, 2122, The device performance data is

SmartPVMS 10000–12000 updated in real time. Each
device requires 3 MB traffic per
day.
● 16100: used to query and set
data between the
SmartLogger and the
management system.
● 2121, 2122 and 10000–
12000: used to upload and
download data or files
between the SmartLogger
and the management system
using FTPS.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 426

SmartLogger3000
User Manual C Port No. List

Type of Connected Management Open Port No. of Remarks

Access System Router (Firewall)
Management Setting Port
No.

27250 27250, 27251, 2122, Traffic-saving port. This port is

10000–12000 recommended when the
SmartLogger connects to the
management system in wireless
mode. The device performance
data is updated every 5 minutes.
● 27250 and 27251: used to
query and set data between
the SmartLogger and the
management system.
● 2122 and 10000–12000: used
to upload and download data
or files between the
SmartLogger and the
management system using
FTPS.

NOTE

● If a third-party management system connects to the SmartLogger over Modbus TCP, the
SmartLogger port No. is 502, which is used to query and set data between the
SmartLogger and the third-party management system.
● If a third-party management system connects to the SmartLogger over IEC104, the
SmartLogger port number is 2404, which is used to query and set data between the
SmartLogger and the third-party management system.
● If the SmartLogger connects to a third-party FTP server over FTP, the common port
number is 21, which is used to periodically upload performance data to the third-party
FTP server.
● If the SmartLogger connects to a third-party email server over SMTP, the common port
number is 25, 465, or 587, which is used to send emails to the email server.
● If the SmartLogger connects to a third-party NTP server over NTP, the common port
number is 123, which is used for time synchronization with the NTP server.
● If the SmartLogger connects to a remote output server of Japan Electric Power Company
over HTTPS, the common port number is 443 by default, which is used to synchronize
the scheduling table with the electric power company. If you cannot log in using the
default port 443, change the port number to 1443 and log in to the WebUI again. The
login address is https://XX.XX.XX.XX:1443/relogin.asp (XX.XX.XX.XX is the IP address of
the SmartLogger).

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 427

SmartLogger3000
User Manual D Certificate Management and Maintenance

D Certificate Management and

Maintenance

D.1 Preconfigured Certificate Risk Disclaimer

The Huawei-issued certificates preconfigured on Huawei devices during
manufacturing are mandatory identity credentials for Huawei devices. The
disclaimer statements for using the certificates are as follows:
1. Preconfigured Huawei-issued certificates are used only in the deployment
phase, for establishing initial security channels between devices and the
customer's network. Huawei does not promise or guarantee the security of
preconfigured certificates.
2. The customer shall bear consequences of all security risks and incidents arising
from using preconfigured Huawei-issued certificates as service certificates.
3. A preconfigured Huawei-issued certificate is valid from the manufacturing date
until December 2099.
4. Services using a preconfigured Huawei-issued certificate will be interrupted
when the certificate expires.
5. It is recommended that customers deploy a PKI system to issue certificates for
devices and software on the live network and manage the lifecycle of the
certificates. To ensure security, certificates with short validity periods are
recommended.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 428

SmartLogger3000
User Manual D Certificate Management and Maintenance

D.2 Application Scenarios of Preconfigured Certificates

File Path and Name Application Scenario Replacement

/mnt/log/smodule_ca.crt Authenticates the validity of For details about

the peer extension module how to replace a
/mnt/log/ for communication with the certificate, contact
smodule_server.crt TLS extension module. technical support
engineers to obtain
/mnt/home/cert/web/ Authenticates the validity of the corresponding
server.crt the peer web module to be security maintenance
connected. manual.
/mnt/log/ca_1.crt Authenticates the validity of
the peer NMS for
/mnt/log/client_1.crt communication through
/mnt/log/ca_2.crt Modbus-TCP.

/mnt/log/client_2.crt

/mnt/log/client2_ca.crt

/mnt/log/client2.crt

/mnt/log/ca_new.crt

/mnt/log/client_new.crt

/mnt/log/ Authenticates the validity of Certificate

tcpmb_server_cert/ca.crt the peer mobile app for replacement is not
communication through supported.
/mnt/log/ Modbus-TCP.
tcpmb_server_cert/
tomcat_client.crt

/mnt/app/cert/default/ For details about

north_tcp_mb_cert_s/ how to replace a
ca.crt certificate, contact
technical support
/mnt/app/cert/default/ engineers to obtain
north_tcp_mb_cert_s/ the corresponding
tomcat_client.crt security maintenance
manual.

/mnt/log/cmu_ca.crt Authenticates the validity of For details about

the peer CMU for how to replace a
/mnt/log/cmu_client.crt communication through certificate, contact
Modbus-TCP. technical support
engineers to obtain
/mnt/log/ca_new.crt Authenticates the validity of the corresponding
the peer STS, PCS, or security maintenance
/mnt/log/client_new.crt inverter for communication manual.
through Modbus-TCP.

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429

SmartLogger3000
User Manual D Certificate Management and Maintenance

File Path and Name Application Scenario Replacement

/mnt/log/ppc_client.crt Authenticates the validity of

the peer end when the
/mnt/log/ppc_ca.crt SPPC is connected.

/mnt/home/cert/web/ Authenticates the validity of

server.crt the peer web module to be
connected.

/mnt/app/cert/default/ Authenticates the validity of

north_tcp_mb_cert_c/ the peer SACU for
ca.crt communication with the
SACU through Modbus-TCP.
/mnt/app/cert/default/
north_tcp_mb_cert_c/
tomcat_client.crt

/mnt/app/cert/default/ Authenticates the validity of

bin_cert_s/ca.crt the peer liquid cooling
controller (LCC) for
/mnt/app/cert/default/ communication with the
bin_cert_s/ LCC.
tomcat_client.crt

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430

SmartLogger3000
User Manual E Contact Information

E Contact Information

If you have any questions about this product, please contact us.

https://digitalpower.huawei.com
Path: About Us > Contact Us > Service Hotlines

To ensure faster and better services, we kindly request your assistance in providing
the following information:
● Model
● Serial number (SN)
● Software version
● Alarm ID or name
● Brief description of the fault symptom

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 431

SmartLogger3000
User Manual E Contact Information

NOTE

EU Representative Information: Huawei Technologies Hungary Kft.

Add.: HU-1133 Budapest, Váci út 116-118., 1. Building, 6. floor.
Email: [email protected]

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432

SmartLogger3000
User Manual F Digital Power Customer Service

F Digital Power Customer Service

https://digitalpower.huawei.com/robotchat/

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 433

SmartLogger3000
User Manual G Acronyms and Abbreviations

G Acronyms and Abbreviations

AC Alternating Current

AI Analog Input

AO Analog Output

APP Application

BMU Battery Monitoring Unit

COM Communication

CPE Customer Premises

Equipment

CMU Central Monitoring Unit

DC Direct Current

DI Digital Input

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434

SmartLogger3000
User Manual G Acronyms and Abbreviations

DO Digital Output

EMI Environmental Monitoring

Instrument

ETH Ethernet

ESU Energy Storage Unit

ESC Smart Rack Controller

ESR Battery Rack

ESM Battery Pack

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GND Ground

HVAC Heating, Ventilation and

Air Conditioning

LAN Local Area Network

LED Light-emitting Diode

LTE Long Term Evolution

MBUS Monitoring bus

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 435

SmartLogger3000
User Manual G Acronyms and Abbreviations

NC Normally Closed

NO Normally Open

POE Power over Ethernet

PCS Smart PCS

RST Reset

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree

Protocol

SFP Small Form-factor

Pluggable

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

SOC State of Charge

SOH State of Health

TCU Temperature Control Unit

USB Universal Serial Bus

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 436

SmartLogger3000
User Manual G Acronyms and Abbreviations

WAN Wide Area Network

WEEE Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment

Issue 22 (2024-09-30) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437